ATP 3-09.23 (FM 3-09.21) : Distribution Restriction Approved For Public Release Distribution Is Unlimited

ATP 3-09.23 (FM 3-09.
21)
Field Artillery Cannon Battalion
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
This publication supersedes FM 3-09.21 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures For The Field
Artillery Battalion dated 22 March 2001
Headquarters Department of the Army

This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online
(https://armypubs.us.army.mil/doctrine/index.html).
To receive publishing updates, please subscribe at
http://www.apd.army.mil/AdminPubs/new_subscribe.asp
*ATP 3-09.23
Army Techniques Publication Headquarters,

No. 3-09.23 Department of the Army
Washington, DC, 24 September 2015
Field Artillery Cannon Battalion
Contents
Page
PREFACE..............................................................................................................v i
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. vii
Chapter 1 FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION ORGANIZATIONAL FRAMEWORK ........... 1-1
Section I – Force Overview .............................................................................. 1-1
The Corps ........................................................................................................... 1-1
Field Artillery Brigade ......................................................................................... 1-1
The Division ........................................................................................................ 1-1
The Division Artillery ........................................................................................... 1-2
Brigade Combat Teams...................................................................................... 1-2
Section II – Field Artillery Cannon Battalion Role and Organization .......... 1-2
Role .................................................................................................................... 1-2
Organization ....................................................................................................... 1-3
Headquarters and Headquarters Battery ........................................................... 1-4
Forward Support Company ................................................................................ 1-5
Section III – Field Artillery Battalion Key Personnel and Responsibilities . 1-5
Command Group ................................................................................................ 1-5
Battalion S-3 Section ........................................................................................ 1-10
Battalion S-2 Section ........................................................................................ 1-12
Target Acquisition Platoon................................................................................ 1-13
Battalion Fire Direction Center ......................................................................... 1-14
Chapter 2 FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION MISSION COMMAND ................................. 2-1
Section I – Command and Support Relationships ........................................ 2-1
Relationships ...................................................................................................... 2-1
Section II – Mission Command ....................................................................... 2-2
Overview ............................................................................................................. 2-2
Command Post Organization and Operation ..................................................... 2-2
Command Post Organization ............................................................................. 2-4
Distribution Restriction: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
*This publication supersedes FM 3-09.21, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures For The Field Artillery Battalion,
dated 22 March 2001.
i
Contents
Command Post Positioning and Movement ........................................................ 2-8

Liaison Operations ............................................................................................ 2-10
Section III – Field Artillery Battalion Communications ............................... 2-11
Automated Systems .......................................................................................... 2-11
The Communications Network .......................................................................... 2-12
Field Artillery Battalion Radio Communication Operations ............................... 2-12
Internal And External Communications Networks ............................................ 2-15
Communications Techniques ............................................................................ 2-16
Chapter 3 THE FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION PLANNING PROCESS ........................ 3-1
Section I – The Military Decisionmaking Process ......................................... 3-1
Section II – Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield Conducted by a
Field Artillery Battalion ..................................................................................... 3-6
Steps in the Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield Process ......................... 3-6
Section III – Field Artillery Battalion Rehearsals ........................................... 3-7
Field Artillery Battalion Rehearsals ..................................................................... 3-7
Chapter 4 DETECT AND LOCATE SURFACE TARGETS ................................................... 1
Section I – Information Collection and Target Acquisition........................... 4-1
Information Collection ......................................................................................... 4-1
External Target Acquisition Capabilities ............................................................. 4-2
Section II – Field Artillery Battalion Target Acquisition ................................ 4-4
Overview ............................................................................................................. 4-4
Radar Employment ............................................................................................. 4-5
Chapter 5 DELIVER FIRES ................................................................................................. 5-1
Section I – Field Artillery Battalion Fire Mission Processing ....................... 5-1
Fire Mission Requests......................................................................................... 5-1
Tactical Fire Direction ......................................................................................... 5-2
Technical Fire Direction ...................................................................................... 5-5
Massed Fires ....................................................................................................... 5-5
Continuity of Operations ..................................................................................... 5-6
Section II – Fire Missions Requiring Special Consideration ........................ 5-6
Improved Conventional Munitions ....................................................................... 5-6
Illumination .......................................................................................................... 5-6
Smoke White Phosphorous ................................................................................ 5-7
Scatterable Mines ............................................................................................... 5-7
Excalibur ............................................................................................................. 5-7
Precision Guidance Kit ........................................................................................ 5-7
M1130 105mm Preformed Fragment .................................................................. 5-8
Danger Close ...................................................................................................... 5-8
Section III – Counterfire .................................................................................... 5-8
Responsibilities ................................................................................................... 5-8
Counterfire Planning ........................................................................................... 5-9
Rehearsing Counterfire ..................................................................................... 5-10
Counterfire Drill ................................................................................................. 5-11
Section IV – Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses ...................................... 5-11
Field Artillery Battalion in Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses Operations..... 5-12
ii ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Contents
Planning for and Conducting Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses Operations5-12

Section V – Meteorology ................................................................................ 5-14
Section VI – Survey ........................................................................................ 5-14
Survey Planning Factors .................................................................................. 5-15
Degraded Survey Operations ........................................................................... 5-16
Chapter 6 FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION OPERATIONS ............................................. 6-1
Section I – Key Considerations for Field Artillery Battalion Support to
Operations ......................................................................................................... 6-1
Close Combat Supporting Fires ......................................................................... 6-1
Fighting in Depth ................................................................................................ 6-1
Security and Protection ...................................................................................... 6-2
Section II – Common Field Artillery Tasks..................................................... 6-2
Deploy And Conduct Movement ......................................................................... 6-2
Develop Intelligence ........................................................................................... 6-2
Employ Fires ....................................................................................................... 6-3
Exercise Control ................................................................................................. 6-3
Perform Sustainment .......................................................................................... 6-4
Protect the Force ................................................................................................ 6-4
Section III – Field Artillery Battalion Support of Offensive Tasks ............... 6-4
Forms of Maneuver and Types of Offensive Tasks ........................................... 6-4
Field Artillery Battalion Tasks in the Offense...................................................... 6-4
Section IV – Field Artillery Battalion Support of Defensive Tasks .............. 6-6
Types of Defensive asks .................................................................................... 6-6
Field Artillery Battalion Tasks in the Defense ..................................................... 6-6
Section V – Field Artillery Battalion Support of Other Tactical
Operations ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Air Assault Operations ........................................................................................ 6-8
Airborne Operations ......................................................................................... 6-10
Urban Operations ............................................................................................. 6-11
Encircled Forces ............................................................................................... 6-13
Passage of Lines .............................................................................................. 6-14
Relief in Place ................................................................................................... 6-15
Gap Crossing Operations ................................................................................. 6-15
Breaching Operations ....................................................................................... 6-16
Security Operations .......................................................................................... 6-16
Base and Brigade Support Area Security......................................................... 6-18
Static Positions ................................................................................................. 6-19
Linkup Operations ............................................................................................ 6-21
Artillery Raid Operations................................................................................... 6-21
Section VI – Field Artillery Battalion Support of Stability Operations and
Defense Support of Civil Authorities ............................................................ 6-25
Stability Operations .......................................................................................... 6-25
Defense Support of Civil Authorities ................................................................. 6-25
Section VII – Operational Considerations .................................................... 6-25
Night Operations ............................................................................................... 6-25
Cold Weather Operations ................................................................................. 6-27
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 iii

Contents
Desert Operations ............................................................................................. 6-28

Jungle Operations ............................................................................................. 6-30
Mountain Operations ......................................................................................... 6-31
Chapter 7 FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION SUSTAINMENT ........................................... 7-1
Section I – Field Artillery Battalion Sustainment Overview .......................... 7-1
Field Artillery Battalion Sustainment Overview ................................................... 7-1
Section II – Organization and Functions ........................................................ 7-2
Forward Support Company ................................................................................. 7-2
Section III – Sustainment Planning ................................................................. 7-3
Reports ................................................................................................................ 7-4
Sustainment Support for Attachments ................................................................ 7-4
Section IV – Supply and Transportation ......................................................... 7-5
Supply ................................................................................................................. 7-5
Transportation ................................................................................................... 7-13
Section V – Explosive Ordnance Disposal ................................................... 7-13
Section VI – Financial Management .............................................................. 7-13
Section VII – Human Resources Support ..................................................... 7-13
Section VIII – Religious Support.................................................................... 7-13
Section IX – Legal Support ............................................................................ 7-13
Section X – Army Health System ................................................................... 7-14
Role 1 Medical Support ..................................................................................... 7-14
Section XI – Maintenance ............................................................................... 7-14
Field Maintenance ............................................................................................. 7-14
Sustainment Maintenance ................................................................................ 7-15
Section XII – Support Areas ........................................................................... 7-15
Trains ................................................................................................................ 7-15
Security of Support Areas ................................................................................. 7-19
Supply Routes ................................................................................................... 7-20
Section XIII – Sustainment Support Planning .............................................. 7-20
APPENDIX A FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION OPERATIONS ORDER............................... A-1
Section I – The Operation Order, Concept of Operations, Fires Annex,
Field Artillery Support Appendix, and Field Artillery Battalion Operation
Order ................................................................................................................. A-1
Operation Order ................................................................................................. A-1
Concept of Operations ....................................................................................... A-1
Fire Support Plan ............................................................................................... A-1
Field Artillery Support ......................................................................................... A-2
Section II – Field Artillery Battalion Operation Order................................... A-2
Field Artillery Battalion Operation Order Annotated Format .............................. A-3
Section III – Example Field Artillery Battalion Operation Order and
Annexes .......................................................................................................... A-11
Field Artillery Battalion Operation Order (OPORD) Body (Example) ............... A-11
Annexes ........................................................................................................... A-21
APPENDIX B COMPOSITE BATTALION ................................................................................ B-1
iv ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Contents
Overview ............................................................................................................. B-1

Unit Composition (Light And Medium Howitzer Mix) .......................................... B-1
Ammunition ......................................................................................................... B-2
Positioning .......................................................................................................... B-3
Manning .............................................................................................................. B-4
GLOSSARY .......................................................................................... Glossary-1
REFERENCES .................................................................................. References-1
INDEX .......................................................................................................... Index-1
Figures
Figure 4-1. RQ-11 Raven aircraft and coverage (example) ................................................... 4-3
Figure A-1. Annex A (Field Artillery Execution Matrix) to 1-37 FA OPORD (example) ........A-21
Figure A-2. Annex B (Target List Worksheet) to 1-37 FA OPORD (example) .....................A-22
Figure A-3. Annex D (Field Artillery Support Overlay) to 1-37 FA OPORD (example) ........A-23
Tables
Table 3-1. Field artillery battalion planning process (example) .............................................. 3-1
Table 5-1. Multiple target acquisitions .................................................................................. 5-10
Table 6-1. Artillery raid planning checklist (example) ........................................................... 6-24
Table 7-1. Classes of supply .................................................................................................. 7-5
Table 7-2. Field artillery expeditionary support packages (example) ..................................... 7-9
Table 7-3. Levels of operation .............................................................................................. 7-10
Table 7-4. Daily ammunition requirements—rounds per weapon and short ton
(example) .......................................................................................................... 7-11
Table 7-5. Conversion factors table ..................................................................................... 7-11
Table 7-6. Field trains and combat trains (example) ............................................................ 7-17
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 v

Preface
Army Techniques Publication (ATP) 3-09.23 provides techniques for the field artillery (FA) cannon battalion
commander and staff in support of the maneuver commander. This publication is the principle reference for the
FA cannon battalion.
This publication describes the FA cannon battalion to include:
• Doctrinal guidance for commanders, staffs, and subordinate personnel that are responsible for
conducting (planning, preparing, executing, and assessing) FA operations.
• Authoritative reference for personnel who develop—
 Doctrine, techniques, and force structure.
 Institution and unit training.
 Standard operating procedures for brigade combat team (BCT) and field artillery brigade
(FAB) operations.
• Operations for the BCT FA battalions assigned, attached, or under the operational control of the
division artillery (DIVARTY) or FABs. The techniques described herein are flexible guidelines.
• Doctrine that is nested with the principles and tactics found in Army Doctrine Reference
Publication (ADRP) 3-09 and field manual (FM) 3-09.
• Army operations doctrine as stated in ADRP 1, ADRP 3-0, ADRP 6-0, FM 3-90-1, and FM 3-
90-2.
• Applicable North Atlantic Treaty Organization standardization agreements (see the references
for a complete listing).
Commander, staffs, and subordinates ensure that their decisions and actions comply with applicable United
States, international, and in some cases host-nation laws and regulations period. Commanders at all levels
ensure that their Soldiers operate in accordance with the law of war and rules of engagement. (See FM 27-10.)
ATP 3-09.23 uses joint terms where applicable. Selected joint and Army terms and definitions appear in both
the glossary and the text. Terms for which ATP 3-09.23 is the proponent publication (the authority) are
italicized in the text and are marked with an asterisk (*) in the glossary. Terms and definitions for which ATP 3-
09.23 is the proponent publication are bold faced in the text. For other definitions shown in the text, the term is
italicized and the number of the proponent publication follows the definition.
ATP 3-09.23 applies to the Active Army, Army National Guard, Army National Guard of the United States, and
United States Army Reserve unless otherwise stated.
The proponent of ATP 3-09.23 is the United States Army Training and Doctrine Command. The U.S. Army
Field Artillery School is the preparing agency. Send comments and recommendations on Department of
the Army Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) to Directorate of Training
and Doctrine, 700 McNair Avenue, Suite 128, ATTN: ATSF-DD, Fort Sill, OK 73503-4436; by
email to: usarmy.sill.fcoe.mbx.dotd-doctrine-inbox@mail.mil.
vi ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Introduction
The techniques herein build on the collective knowledge and experience gained through recent operations,
numerous exercises, and the deliberate process of informed reasoning. These techniques are rooted in the
fires principles identified in ADP 3-09, ADRP 3-09, and FM 3-09 and accommodate force design changes,
new technologies and diverse threats.
ATP 3-09.23 has seven chapters and two appendices.
Chapter 1 provides the organizational framework for the FA cannon battalion found within a BCT a
DIVARTY or a FAB. Section I begins with a brief description of the corps, FAB, division, DIVARTY, and
the BCTs. Section II is devoted to the FA battalion mission and organization. Section III closes with a
discussion of FA battalion key personnel and responsibilities.
Chapter 2 describes the FA battalion mission command. Section I begins by describing command and
support relationships. Section II describes the FA battalion command post and its operation. Section III
details FA battalion communications.
Chapter 3 provides an overview of the FA battalion planning process. Section I provides a brief overview
of the military decisonmaking process. Section II is an overview of FA battalion intelligence preparation of
the battlefield; and Section III addresses FA battalion rehearsals.
Chapter 4 describes internal and external information collection support to the detect function. Section I
begins with a summary description of support from information collection assets external to the FA
battalion. Section II describes support to the detect function provided by weapons locating radars organic to
the FA battalion.
Chapter 5 focuses on the execution of attack with fires. Section I covers the fire mission process, including
tactical and technical fire direction, massed fires, and continuity of operations. Section II discusses various
types of fire missions. Section III provides information on counterfire. Section IV discusses FA battalion
support for suppression of enemy air defenses (SEAD) operations. Section V provides general information
on FA battalion meteorological operations and Section VI discusses FA battalion survey considerations.
Chapter 6 discusses how a FA battalion applies previously addressed techniques and principles in the
context of FA operations in a variety of operational situations. Section I discusses key considerations for
FA support. Section II discusses FA tasks common to operations. Sections III and IV cover FA operations
in support of offensive and defensive tasks. Section V details FA support of other unique tactical
operations, such as airborne operations. Section VI addresses FA support of stability tasks and defense
support of civil authorities. Section VII discusses climate and terrain considerations that affect FA
operations.
Chapter 7 describes the sustainment warfighting function as it relates to the FA battalion. This chapter has
13 sections:
 Section I – FA Battalion Sustainment Overview.
 Section II – Organization and Functions.
 Section III – Sustainment Planning.
 Section IV – Supply and Transportation.
 Section V – Explosive Ordnance Disposal.
 Section VI – Financial Management.
 Section VII – Human Resources Support.
 Section VIII – Religious Support.
 Section IX – Legal Support.
 Section X – Health Service Support.
 Section XI – Maintenance.
 Section XII – Support Areas.
 Section XIII – Sustainment Support Planning.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 vii

Introduction
Appendix A discusses development, format, and content of a formal FA battalion operation order written in
the five-paragraph field order format. Section I provides context for development of the FA battalion
operation order including the operation order, concept of operations, fire support (FS) plan, and attendant
FA support. Section II is an annotated outline that provides basic guidance on the content for various parts
and paragraphs of the FA battalion operation order. Section III provides an example of the FA battalion
operation plan, operation order and associated annexes.
Appendix B provides a discussion of techniques associated with a composite battalion of two different
howitzer systems.
The glossary contains acronyms and defined terms.
viii ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Chapter 1
Field Artillery Cannon Battalion Organizational Framework
This chapter provides the organizational framework for the field artillery cannon
battalion. Section I provides an overview of the force. Section II describes the field
artillery battalion role and organization. Section III lists key field artillery battalion
personnel and responsibilities.
SECTION I – FORCE OVERVIEW

1-1. Due to force design updates, a field artillery brigade now supports the corps. In addition, a division
artillery now supports the division. The following paragraphs discuss their duties.
THE CORPS
1-2. The corps is normally the highest Army echelon deployed to a joint operations area. It commands
joint, Army, and multinational land forces in campaigns and major operations. The distinguishing aspects
of corps operations are their scope and scale. Normally, the corps exercises operational control over 2 or
more U.S. Army divisions and a variety of supporting brigades, exercises tactical control over various
multinational units and United States Marine Corps units, and is supported by various theater sustainment
organizations. As a land component headquarters (HQ), the corps becomes the bridge between the
operational and tactical levels.
FIELD ARTILLERY BRIGADE

1-3. Active component FABs are aligned with a corps or 8th Army Korea. However, they may be under
the operational control of a task force, land component command, other service, or functional component.
FABs are task organized based on their assigned tasks. The FAB gives the division, corps, joint task force,
land component command, or other supported command a HQ to plan, synchronize, and execute close
combat fires for engaged forces, strike, counterfire, and fires in support of decisive and shaping operations
throughout the command’s area of operations.
1-4. FA brigades’ organic units include a HQ and HQ battery, target acquisition platoon, signal network
support company, and a brigade support battalion (BSB). The FAB can be task organized with additional
units based on the situation. This may be a combination of one to five Multiple Launch Rocket System,
High Mobility Artillery Rocket System, and cannon battalions, as well as other enablers. National Guard
field artillery brigades can support a corps but are aligned with National Guard divisions.
1-5. For more information on the FAB, see ATP 3-09.24.
THE DIVISION
1-6. The division is the Army’s primary tactical warfighting headquarters. Its primary role is as a tactical
headquarters commanding brigades in decisive action. The division combines offensive, defensive, and
either stability or defense support of civilian authorities tasks in an area of operations assigned by its higher
headquarters, normally a corps. It task-organizes its subordinate forces according to the mission variables
of mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, and civil
considerations (METT-TC) to accomplish its mission. Depending upon the variables of METT-TC, the
division commands between 2 and 5 BCTs and a mix of multifunctional support brigades.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-1

Chapter 1
THE DIVISION ARTILLERY

1-7. The DIVARTY conducts the three tasks of the fires warfighting function for the division. These tasks
are deliver fires, integrate all forms of Army, Joint, and multinational fires and conduct targeting. The
DIVARTY will coordinate, integrate, synchronize and employ fires to achieve the division commander’s
objectives. A DIVARTY is assigned to each active component division and is ideally stationed with the
division HQ. The DIVARTY commander is the fire support coordinator (FSCOORD) for the division, and
is the primary advisor to the division commander for the fires warfighting function. The DIVARTY HQ
focuses primarily on providing FS to the division. Specifically the DIVARTY coordinates with higher
echelons for joint and multinational fires assets to enhance the capabilities of the division.
1-8. The DIVARTY is the force field artillery headquarters for the division. The division commander
may direct the force field artillery headquarters to provide training certification standardization of all FA
units in the division to include the BCTs organic FA battalions. The division commander must specify the
degree of authority given to the DIVARTY commander. If directed the DIVARTY commander must work
closely with the BCT commander to train and certify of the BCT FA battalion. Once task organized with
FA battalions (rocket and cannon) or other assets the DIVARTY employs fires to create effects in order to
achieve the division commander’s objectives.
1-9. The DIVARTY commander must train his staff to integrate all forms of Army, joint and
multinational fires. This will include the conduct of targeting, and the delivery of fires to create effects. The
FSCOORD must balance his HQ efforts in executing the fires warfighting function tasks. Typically, the
DIVARTY focuses on providing FS for the division rather than delivery of fires.
1-10. The DIVARTY has an HHB that includes a signal platoon and a target acquisition platoon. The
DIVARTY and each of its subordinate elements can be augmented (task-organized) as required. This may
include a combination of one to five Multiple Launch Rocket System, High Mobility Artillery Rocket
System, and FA cannon battalions, as well as other enablers. Typically, these assets are allocated from a
FAB. A DIVARTY allocated FA battalions will also require a CSSB and signal support, as the DIVARTY
does not have any organic sustainment.
BRIGADE COMBAT TEAMS

1-11. The BCT consists of organic forces that are augmented and organized based on the mission variables
of METT-TC. The BCT’s organic units can be task organized internally or to other BCTs. The BCT is
normally attached to a division, although the BCT can report directly to a corps HQ or a joint force HQ if
the situation warrants. The three variants of BCTs are the armored brigade combat team (ABCT); the
infantry brigade combat team (IBCT); and the Stryker brigade combat team (SBCT).
1-12. The BCTs balanced combined arms organizations have three maneuver battalions, a cavalry
squadron, an FA battalion, engineer battalion, and a BSB. A forward support company from the BSB
supports each FA battalion.
1-13. For more information on the BCT, see field manual (FM) 3-90.6.
SECTION II – FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION ROLE AND

ORGANIZATION
1-14. The FA battalion has a specific role in supporting the maneuver commander. The organization of
each FA battalion in support of the different BCTs accomplishes this role.
ROLE
1-15. The field artillery has the role of destroying, defeating, or disrupting the enemy with integrated fires
to enable maneuver commanders to dominate in unified land operations. The FA battalion also provides
counterfire against enemy mortar, cannon, and rocket elements. The FA battalion has an established
command relationship, but the commander may assign a command or support relationship. The FA
battalion performs basic FA tasks derived from FM 7-15 to include:
1-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Deploy and conduct maneuver.

 Develop intelligence.
 Employ fires: close combat, shaping, and counterfire.
 Perform sustainment.
 Exercise mission command.
 Protect the force.
ORGANIZATION
1-16. The ABCT FA battalion provides responsive and accurate fires to the ABCT. The ABCT has a HQ
and HQ battery to provide mission command and administrative support. A forward support company from
a BSB provides logistical support. The ABCT FA battalion is organized with three batteries of six M109A6
Paladin self-propelled 155-mm howitzers. The battery consists of two platoons of three cannons in each
platoon. The battalion also has one AN/TPQ-36 and one AN/TPQ-37 weapons locating radar (WLR) for
target acquisition along with four AN/TPQ-50 WLRS. The ABCT is being fielded with two AN/TPQ-53
radars to replace the AN/TPQ-36 and AN/TPQ-37 radars.
1-17. The IBCT FA battalion provides responsive and accurate fires to the IBCT. The IBCT has a HQ and
HQ battery to provide mission command and administrative support. A forward support company from a
BSB provides logistical support. IBCT FA battalions come in a variety of configurations but most have two
batteries of six M119-series towed 105-mm howitzers and one battery of six M777-series 155-mm towed
howitzers. Each IBCT FA battalion has one AN/TPQ-36 WLR and four AN/TPQ-50 WLRs. The IBCT is
being fielded with two AN/TPQ-53 radars to replace its AN/TPQ-36 radar.
1-18. The SBCT FA battalion provides responsive and accurate fires to the SBCT. The SBCT FA battalion
has a HQ and HQ battery to provide mission command and administrative support. A forward support
company from a BSB provides logistical support. The SBCT FA battalion is organized with three batteries
of six M777-series towed 155-mm howitzers. The SBCT FA battalion has one AN/TPQ-36 and one
AN/TPQ-37 WLRs and four ANTPQ-50 WLRs. Once fielded the SBCT will replace the AN/TPQ-36 and
AN/TPQ-37 WLRs with two each AN/TPQ-53 radars.
1-19. The FA cannon battalions assigned to a FAB are currently in the National Guard and are organized
with a HQ and HQ battery and three firing batteries. The HQ and headquarters battery and forward support
company provide mission command, administrative, and logistical support for organic and attached
elements. Each firing battery has two fire direction centers and four howitzer sections. A forward support
company from the BSB supports the FA battalion.
1-20. The battalion fire direction center (FDC) provides tactical fire planning and fire control through
automated systems with manual backup and communications equipment. Specific responsibilities are as
follows:
 Monitor and operate in the battalion fire direction and FS coordination nets.
 Schedule fire units for planned fires in coordination with the battalion operations staff officer (S-
3), brigade fire support officer (FSO) (if applicable), reinforcing or reinforced FA (as
appropriate), and force field artillery HQ.
 Review the maneuver commander’s attack guidance and force field artillery HQ directives and
apply them to all fire mission requests.
 Ensure all battalion elements have the proper guidances and attack criteria entered into digital
systems for both current and planned operations. Where applicable, this includes all fires cells
and requires close coordination with the brigade fires cell.
 Execute planned fires as requested by force field artillery HQ, fires cells, observers, and
reinforced units.
 Coordinate fire mission processing procedures (digital and voice) with fires cells, force field
artillery HQ, reinforced or reinforcing units, targeting and intelligence assets, and air defense
airspace management/brigade aviation elements (ADAM/BAEs) as appropriate. This includes
digital fire mission routing and advanced field artillery tactical data system (AFATDS)
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-3

Chapter 1
intervention rules. For airspace clearance, this includes digital or voice coordination requests and
munition flight paths.
 Respond to immediate fire requests in the priority established by the supported maneuver
commander's attack criteria.
 Ensure the battalion meets the five requirements for accurate fires:
 Accurate target location and size.
 Accurate firing unit locations.
 Accurate weapons and munitions information.
 Accurate meteorological information.
 Accurate computational procedures.
 Determine registration requirements in coordination with the S-3.
 Provide technical fire direction (FD) assistance to battery and platoon FDCs as required.
Coordinate for technical FD in case of catastrophic loss of the technical FD capability of battery
and platoon FDCs.
 Ensure that all fire missions comply with current fire support coordination measures (FSCM)
and are deconflicted with current airspace coordinating measures (ACM).
 Assist the S-3 in monitoring ammunition expenditures. In cannon units, this includes
ammunition lot management. Recommend changes to attack criteria or other tactical FD
guidances as necessary.
 Conduct mutual support operations as required.
 Establish and practice standard procedures for FDC operations in a degraded mode.
 Plan for and employ precision munitions.
HEADQUARTERS AND HEADQUARTERS BATTERY

1-21. The HQ and HQ battery consists of a battery HQ, battalion command section, personnel staff officer
(S-1), operations and intelligence platoon, communications platoon, logistics staff officer (S-4), medical
platoon, unit ministry team, and a target acquisition platoon. The battery provides communications support,
and mission command for the FA battalion and subordinate, reinforcing, or attached units. The enhanced
intelligence staff officer (S-2) section with target processing capability, the target acquisition platoon, and
access to tactical unmanned aircraft systems (UAS) for target acquisition and battle damage assessment,
constitutes a highly lethal reconnaissance-strike capability. All maintenance capability has been moved to
the BSB and forward support company and is provided, as required.
1-22. The target acquisition platoon provides the FA battalion and the supported higher HQ with the
capability to acquire threat mortar, artillery, and rocket systems and provide target intelligence and
information. This provides the FA battalion an organic counterfire mission processing capability. The
target acquisition platoons are organized with a platoon HQ, a counterfire operations section, survey
section, and a mix of WLRs depending on the unit.
1-23. The FA battalion medical platoon has a platoon HQ, a medical treatment team, a combat medic
section, and an evacuation section. A combat medic from the combat medic section and a ground
ambulance from the evacuation section deploy with each firing battery. The medical platoon provides
Army health system support through performing its health service support and force health protection
missions. The medical treatment team establishes the battalion aid station, which usually operates from the
combat trains. An ambulance team also operates from the battalion aid station.
1-24. Combat medics habitually work with the same battery. Combat medics will return to the medical
platoon periodically as required for mentorship, medical skills enhancement, refresher training, and military
occupational specialty recertification requirements. It is often necessary to augment these medics with
Soldiers who have received enhanced first aid training (for example, combat lifesavers). The goal is to have
one combat lifesaver trained per section throughout the battalion.
1-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY

1-25. The forward support company is organic to the BSB and augments the FA battalion. The forward
support company provides field maintenance, subsistence, and supply distribution for the battalion. The
forward support company consists of a company HQ, a field feeding section, a maintenance platoon, and a
distribution platoon. It can operate from the FA battalion field trains, combat trains, or split and operate
from both trains.
1-26. The distribution platoon provides distribution of all classes of supply except Class VIII. The FA
battalion HQ and HQ battery medical platoon distributes Class VIII. The forward support company is not
designed to carry an authorized stockage list, except as necessary to support issue and turn-in operations. It
may carry critical line replaceable units and combat spares as authorized or directed. The maintenance
platoon can function consolidated or split, based on factors of METT-TC. The maintenance platoon
consists of a maintenance control section, service and recovery section, radar repair team, and a field
maintenance section. In the ABCT there are also two maintenance support teams to support the firing
batteries.
SECTION III – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION KEY PERSONNEL AND

RESPONSIBILITIES
1-27. The commander controls the activities of the battalion with the assistance of the battalion staff. The
battalion executive officer synchronizes the efforts of the battalion staff. The battalion staff consists of
coordinating, special, and personal staff officers. The coordinating staff officers include the S-1, S-2, S-3,
S-4, and the S-6. The chaplain and command sergeant major are members of the commander’s personal
staff.
1-28. Special staff officers include the fire direction officer (FDO), targeting officer, chemical, biological,
radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) officer, and physician’s assistant. The forward support company has a
distribution platoon leader who has as an additional duty and responsibility to function as the FA battalion
ammunition officer.
COMMAND GROUP
1-29. . ADRP 6-0 identifies the command groups organization and duties. Discussion of the command
group’s duties follow.
BATTALION COMMANDER
1-30. The BCT FA battalion commander is also the brigade FSCOORD. The FA battalion commander
receives mission orders from the supported higher HQ and plans fires in support of operations. Aided by
the battalion staff the battalion commander directs the tactical, logistical, administrative, and training
activities of the FA battalion. In the role of FSCOORD, the battalion commander is responsible for
advising the brigade commander and the maneuver battalion commanders on the employment and training
of all fires assets, as required. FM 3-09 details the duties of the FSCOORD. The battalion commander
directs employment of the FA battalion in accordance with assigned missions and guidance from the
supported higher HQ. The battalion commander works closely with the commanders of supported and
supporting units to ensure that the FA battalion can accomplish its mission. The battalion commander has
specific responsibilities, which may include:
 Oversee the training of the battalion, with particular emphasis on those elements directly
concerned with delivery of fires and FS.
 Continually assess the needs of the battalion in terms of its ability to sustain its internal
operations and to support assigned missions.
 Advise the brigade commander on the effects of fires on the environment and rules of
engagement (ROE).
 Establish clear and consistent standards and guidance for current and future operations.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-5

Chapter 1
 Establish policies to promote discipline and ensure a positive and ethical command climate
within the battalion.
 Provide for the administrative and logistical support of the battalion.
 Coordinate fires digital training with the supported higher HQ fires cell and battalion or
squadron fires cells, as required.
 Train the company fire support teams (FIST).
 Control the operations and fires of FA units.
 Provide guidance and ensure targeting and lethal effects are applied in an ethical manner.
 Direct preparation of the FA battalion operation order.
 Perform FSCOORD duties, as necessary:
 Advise the supported maneuver commander on all FS matters.
 Direct and supervise the planning and coordination of all FS assets supporting the maneuver
unit, to include fires cells and FISTs.
 Coordinate and control the operations and fires of reinforcing and general support
reinforcing FA units.
 Direct and supervise preparation of the FS plan in support of the maneuver plan.
COMMAND SERGEANT MAJOR

1-31. The battalion command sergeant major is the senior enlisted advisor to the commander. He is both a
specialist and a generalist, as he must have technical competence as a field artilleryman while being
broadly knowledgeable in all functional areas such as operations, administration, and sustainment. The
command sergeant major best serves as an extension of the commander’s eyes and as his primary
troubleshooter. He works closely with each of the battalion staff sections and the firing battery leaders,
frequently changing his area of focus based on the needs of the unit and the direction of the commander.
The command sergeant major usually operates independently of, but complementary to the commander,
frequently at a critical location where the commander needs additional supervision, oversight, or
observation. Because of this, the command sergeant major requires a vehicle, radio, and driver. The
command sergeant major has specific responsibilities, which may include:
 Assist the commander in maintaining effective communication with senior and subordinate
leaders and staffs.
 Validate that the commander’s directions and intent are being properly communicated through
the leadership chain to the front line Soldiers and that their feedback and concerns are reaching
the commander.
 Advise the commander and staff on matters pertaining to enlisted Soldiers.
 Assist the S-3 in planning, coordinating, and supervising collective and individual training to
include certification requirements.
 Mentor unit first sergeants and noncommissioned officers.
 Direct noncommissioned officer professional development.
 Develop future leaders from within the enlisted ranks.
EXECUTIVE OFFICER
1-32. As second in command and chief of staff, the executive officer must keep abreast of current and
anticipated operations. The executive officer must be prepared to assume the duties of the commander if the
need arises. The executive officer must position himself forward, traveling among the battalion command
post, the batteries, and the trains area(s) to perform his duties. The executive officer has specific
responsibilities, which may include:
 Direct staff actions and operations, to include the battalion’s military decisonmaking process,
especially production of the FA battalion operation order and battalion staff involvement in the
brigade FS plan.
 Supervise administrative and logistic operations within the battalion, to include development of
the battalion’s combat and field train’s concept and sustainment plan.
1-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Collaborate and communicate with his counterparts on the BCT, FAB, and maneuver battalion
staffs, as required.
 Direct development of continuity of operation plans for the command post, the various
operations centers, and each staff section.
 Direct development of mutual support unit operations, as necessary or as directed, with another
FA unit.
 Enforce the commander’s standards throughout the unit, in the battalion commander’s absence.
1-33. The battalion commander decides which function the executive officer will give his primary focus at
any given time. The commander bases this decision on the immediate requirements of the battalion and the
overall tactical situation. Changing situations will require periodic changes in the executive officer’s focus.
The executive officer must recognize his primary function is to understand the battalion commander’s
intent and that he is normally the senior officer at the battalion responsible for executing that intent. When
the executive officer is functioning primarily as second in command, one or more of the primary staff
officers (often the S-4) assumes a major portion of the functions of senior sustainment coordinator. When
the executive officer concerns himself primarily with the sustainment of the battalion, the S-3 assumes a
greater portion of the commander’s duties in the battalion area.
S-1
1-34. The S-1 is the coordinating staff officer for all matters concerning human resources support (military
and civilian). The S-1 provides technical direction to FA battalion units in the areas of: Man the Force
(personnel readiness management, personnel accounting, strength reporting; personal information
management, and casualty operations); Provide Human Resources Services (postal operations and essential
personnel services); Human Resources Planning and Operations; and Coordinate Personnel Support
(morale, welfare, and recreation operations, command interest programs, and retention). For more
information on the duties and responsibilities of the S-1, see FM 1-0.
S-2
1-35. The S-2 performs a wide variety of tasks concerning intelligence, targeting, and protection. In
addition, he assists the S-3 in the supervision of the command post. The S-2 has specific responsibilities,
which may include:
 Supervise the intelligence section.
 Develop artillery focused intelligence preparation of the battlefield in conjunction with other
staff elements, the brigade S-2, and the S-2 for any supporting FA units.
 Develop enemy artillery order of battle and monitor tactics and techniques of enemy artillery,
mortars, and target acquisition assets.
 Predict artillery target locations and pass predicted locations to the appropriate fires cell, fires
element, FDC, or targeting cell.
 Provide survivability and mobility information to the battalion S-3.
 Assess the enemy’s capability to interfere with signal communications and supervise the
counterintelligence aspects of signal operations within the battalion, in conjunction with the S-6.
 Recommend commander’s critical intelligence requirements, especially priority intelligence
requirements, related to the primary mission, tasks, and role of the battalion.
 Prepare intelligence estimates, the enemy situation portion of the FA battalion operation plan or
operation order, and assists the targeting officer and the target acquisition platoon leader with the
target acquisition tab of the FA battalion operation order, including the radar deployment order,
as required.
 Organize an aggressive collection effort designed to answer priority intelligence requirements, in
coordination with other S-2s.
 Advise the S-3 in positioning, tasking, and supervising organic and attached target acquisition
assets and coordinating survey for target acquisition assets.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-7

Chapter 1
 Assist in developing and collecting the intelligence and target acquisition data necessary to
support counterfire operations.
 Assist the counterfire operations section of the FA battalion or the target processing section of
the DIVARTY or FAB in radar employment and positioning, decision points for cueing and
moving radars, cueing schedules, and radar zones.
 Template potential enemy locations; determine enemy-to-friendly FA force ratios; evaluate
enemy FA target acquisition capabilities and tactics; and advise the FA battalion and maneuver
commanders on the enemy indirect fire and counterfire threats.
 Verify intelligence preparation of the battlefield analysis includes evaluation of the role and
capabilities of ground, air, and naval forces, and possibly satellite and space-based assets in the
enemy’s counterfire program.
 Verify subordinate and supporting units are kept informed of the enemy situation.
 Provide analysis of the air and ground threat to assist the S-3 in coordinating the battalion
ground and air defense plans.
 Advise the commander and staff on control of classified materials.
 Identify the role of intelligence in the development of FS tasks.
S-3
1-36. The S-3 is responsible for training, planning, and execution of battalion operations. The S-3 has
 Advise the battalion commander in specific areas including:
 FA organization for combat and attack guidance.
 Identification of FS tasks.
 Positioning of firing and target acquisition assets; command posts; forward support
company operations, and battalion trains command post, as required.
 The FA battalion estimate, military decisonmaking process, and operation plan or operation
order.
 Employment of organic, attached, and reinforcing firing units.
 Employment of organic or attached radars and other target acquisition assets to include
UAS, as required.
 Employment of organic and attached survey assets.
 Logistic priorities in coordination with the executive officer, S-4, and S-1.
 Supervise rehearsals.
 Direct the operations and positioning of the command post.
 Direct tactical movement, to include selection of positions, preparation of the tactical movement
plan, and terrain management, for elements under the battalion’s control or direction.
 Direct preparation and dissemination of the operation plan, or operation order and directives.
 Direct battalion survey operations.
 Coordinate plans with higher, subordinate, and adjacent FA units.
 Verify databases and commander’s guidance in automated equipment are correct and properly
coordinated within the battalion.
 Plan and manage ammunition consumption, distribution, and resupply, to include calculating
ammunition requirements, basic loads, required supply rate, and controlled supply rate, in
coordination with the S-4 and forward support company commander.
 Integrate operations security into the overall operations of the unit.
 Establish communications priorities.
 Direct the planning and execution of the battalion’s participation in the counterfire fight.
 Verify counterfire plans meet the intent and guidance of the supported maneuver commander,
the FA battalion and FAB commanders, as appropriate.
1-8 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Verify the command post and firing battery leaders understand the priorities, mission routing,
clearance of fires, and attack guidance for counterfire within the battalion’s zone of fire.
 Maintain close coordination with the supported higher HQ fires cell and other artillery HQ to
ensure the battalion’s counterfire responsibilities are coordinated and synchronized, and higher
and supported unit requirements do not conflict with the FA battalion.
 Supervise radar management and incorporation to confirm radar zone management, sector
assignments, cueing, and positioning into the decision support template, synchronization matrix,
and the target acquisition tab of the FA battalion operation order.
 Identify detailed counterfire responsibilities, to include specified and implied counterfire tasks,
and counterfire responsibilities during the planning process.
 Verify counterfire ammunition requirements in overall ammunition requirements.
 Evaluate assigned controlled supply rates to determine the impact on counterfire responsibilities.
 Evaluate protection issues inherent in counterfire tasks and tactics, in conjunction with the S-2,
counterfire operations section or target processing section, and FDO.
S-4
1-37. The S-4 coordinates and manages logistical support for the battalion. The S-4 and forward support
company commander conduct joint planning to ensure continuity and integration of logistics throughout
operations. The forward support company commander and S-4 host periodic logistics synchronization
meetings with commanders, executive officers, and first sergeants to adjust the concept of support and to
update logistics requirements, as required. The S-4 has specific responsibilities, which may include:
 Advise the commander and staff on sustainment, to include logistics operations, battalion trains
concept and positioning.
 Monitor ammunition estimates, distribution, and resupply operations.
 Monitor transportation requirements and main supply route selection and operation.
 Plan non-tactical unit movements.
 Prepare logistic estimates and plans using logistic preparation of the battlefield methodology.
 Prepare paragraph 4 of the battalion operation order and the logistics support plan or tab, in
conjunction with the S-1.
 Direct battalion supply and sustainment operations, to include ammunition and refueling.
 Monitor distribution operations for classes of supply, except Class VIII within the battalion.
 Recommend logistics priorities and employment of S-4 assets that support the commander’s
intent and mission accomplishment.
 Direct the administrative and logistics operations and battalion support operations, in
conjunction with the S-1.
 Verify the S-4 section and the BSB support operations officer establish and maintain situational
understanding.
 Direct administrative movements.
 Request maps (digital or paper) for distribution.
 Review the battalion’s FS tasks for critical logistic requirements (for example, expeditionary
support packages of ammunition or vehicle refuel).
S-6
1-38. The S-6 is responsible for communications and automation operations, management, and security.
The S-6 is a coordinating staff officer and is directly accountable to the executive officer. The S-6 has
 Selection of unit position areas from a communications standpoint.
 Communications and automation planning, operations, priorities, security, training, and
rehearsals.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-9

Chapter 1
 Communications and automation requirements associated with FS tasks (for example, unique
communications and automation equipment, networks, database exchange, procedures for data
links, or other critical communications).
 Direct communications operations to include establishment of communications systems and
installation and maintenance of equipment.
 Coordinate integration of battalion communication systems into those of the supported higher
HQ, maneuver units, subordinate and supporting FA units.
 Coordinate with signal units for communications support.
 Supervise operator maintenance of communication equipment.
 Manage frequency allocations and assignments.
 Direct communications security.
 Supervise the communications security custodian who issues and accounts for communications
security equipment, key lists, codes, ciphers, signal operating instructions, and authentication
systems.
 Direct automation systems administration, maintenance, and security.
 Establish automation systems administrative and security procedures for automation hardware
and software.
 Direct battalion local area networks configuration and usage of network capabilities.
 Update global positioning system satellite constellation (ephemeris) data for precision munitions
capable units.
 Prepare communications estimates and the signal paragraph of the FA battalion operation order.
 Perform communications reconnaissance and survey to assist the S-3 in positioning key
elements (for example, retransmission stations) of the battalion.
 Plan for retransmission sites, as necessary.
BATTALION CHAPLAIN
1-39. The chaplain serves the commander as the personal staff officer to plan, synchronize, coordinate, and
provide personally delivered religious support. He advises the commander on moral and ethical issues. He
develops a religious support plan, conducts field services, and manages Soldier welfare ministries. He
provides counseling to Soldiers and helps maintain the morale and spiritual well-being of personnel, as
required. A chaplain’s assistant supports the chaplain by performing religious support duties and
coordinating religious programs, worship, and crisis intervention.
FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY COMMANDER

1-40. The forward support company commander should be involved in the planning process to assist the S-
4 in determining logistics requirements and integrating the concept of sustainment into the tactical plan.
The forward support company commander knows best how to employ the forward support company in
support of the tactical plan.
BATTALION S-3 SECTION

1-41. The battalion S-3 section consists of an assistant S-3, operations sergeant, battalion master gunner,
CBRN officer and noncommissioned officer, and a battalion ammunition officer. The section performs
their duties as directed by the S-3.
ASSISTANT S-3
1-42. The assistant S-3 supervises the activities of the operations section and manages command post
operations in the absence of the S-3. During operations, the assistant S-3 is usually on shift as a command
post battle captain. The assistant S-3 constructs the FA support matrix and positioning overlay for the FA
battalion operation order. During execution, the assistant S-3 ensures that all digital displays and manual
status boards are updated as necessary; verifies targets, and advises the S-3 of targets that violate fire
1-10 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

support coordination measures or maneuver control measures, or conflict with airspace coordinating
measures. His focus is on positioning and ranging targets established in the FS plan, maintaining howitzer
strength, and coordinating ammunition resupply. With advice from the S-2 and targeting officer, the
assistant S-3 positions and moves organic and attached radars.
OPERATIONS SERGEANT
1-43. The operations sergeant supervises the activities of enlisted Soldiers in the command post and assists
the assistant S-3 with operations functions. He trains all personnel on command post digital functions. He
supervises network control duties for the battalion command network. He maintains the staff journal and
message log, and verifies all situation maps and graphics or charts (digital and paper) are current at all
times. The operations sergeant prepares the briefing site for the battalion’s military decisionmaking process
(MDMP). The operations sergeant verifies the command post supplies, maintenance, and security.
BATTALION MASTER GUNNER

1-44. The battalion master gunner is the weapon system expert in the battalion. He is the battalion’s most
knowledgeable Soldier on the unit’s primary weapon system(s). In a composite battalion, there may be a
need for 2 master gunners. The master gunner knows all aspects of the weapon (for example, operation,
maintenance, training, and record keeping) and supporting ammunition vehicle. He also serves as a
command post assistant operations sergeant. The battalion master gunner has specific responsibilities,
which may include:
 Assist the S-3 and command sergeant major in managing the battalion’s individual and crew-
served weapons training and certification program, to include training and certification of
officers and senior noncommissioned officers with emphasis on the training and evaluation of
howitzer section chiefs.
 Direct battalion certification events.
 Assist the S-3 in the management of the artillery safety program. Note: coordinate these efforts
with the battalion safety officer and noncommissioned officer as part of the battalion’s overall
safety program.
 Assist the S-3 and executive officer in maintaining primary weapon system readiness and
operational status, which includes howitzer, ammunition, and the vehicle and crew maintenance
training.
 Assist the batteries in the management of their primary military occupational specialty training
and battery safety programs.
 Provide technical expertise to the firing battery gunnery sergeants when troubleshooting the
weapon system and ammunition vehicles.
 Acquire and review information on weapon systems and ammunition vehicles, to include field
manuals, technical manuals, bulletins, training circulars, training support packages, and other
relevant information for updates.
Note. The master gunner must frequently check official internet sites, professional publications,
and other sources of information for current and emerging tactics, techniques, procedures, and
safety information.
 Maintain a dialogue with master gunners in other battalions and United States Army Fires
Center of Excellence to ensure rapid identification of new issues noted by other units.
 Assist the S-3 to disseminate critical information concerning the battalion’s primary weapon
system.
CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, AND NUCLEAR OFFICER AND CHEMICAL,

BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, AND NUCLEAR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER
1-45. The CBRN officer’s primary roles and responsibilities include the following:
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-11

Chapter 1
 Advises the commander on all CBRN threats and hazards, ranging from weapons of mass
destruction to toxic industrial material
 Implements CBRN protective measures
 Provides CBRN warning and reporting
 Prepares CBRN plans and orders
 Plans operational level decontamination missions.
 When not executing inherent duties, the CBRN officer serves as a battle captain.
1-46. The CBRN noncommissioned officer’s roles and responsibilities include the following:
 Advises the commander on the conduct of unified land operations in CBRN environments.
 Advises the commander on CBRN readiness for the unit and associated assessments.
 Advises the commander on the integration of CBRN threats and hazards into unit level training
and associated assessments.
 Maintains the unit CBRN room.
 Maintains appropriate and current publications associated with CBRN operations.
 Performs organizational level maintenance and supervise operator level maintenance for CBRN
defense equipment.
 Coordinates unit supply activities associated with CBRN defense equipment.
 Maintains the unit level optical inserts program.
 Develops, in conjunction with the unit leadership, the unit level administrative, deployment, and
tactical SOPs as appropriate.
 Manages unit reports related to CBRN operations.
 Writes the CBRN portion of the FA battalion operation order.
 Advises the commander on equipment maintenance, CBRN reconnaissance and surveillance,
and supports contingency requirements.
BATTALION AMMUNITION OFFICER

1-47. The distribution platoon leader in the forward support company manages re-supply of ammunition in
the FA battalion and performs an additional duty as the battalion ammunition officer. As such, the battalion
ammunition officer may collocate with the operations section or in the combat trains command post if one
is established in the brigade support area. The ammunition officer has specific responsibilities, which may
include:
 Manage the use of the battalion’s ammunition carrying assets.
 Manage ammunition movement from the forward support company holding area to the combat
trains area and then forward to the batteries.
 Maintain accountability of ammunition.
 Verify ammunition loads delivered to the batteries contain the proper mix and quantities of
ammunition.
 Perform mission analysis to verify ammunition-handling capabilities can support current
operations and report shortcomings to the S-3.
 Coordinate with the S-4 on ammunition resupply actions.
 Manage turn-in of residue and unexpended ammunition.
 Assist the S-4 with the development and processing of requests for ammunition.
BATTALION S-2 SECTION

1-48. The battalion S-2 section provides tactical focus and targeting capability for the FA battalion.
1-12 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

TARGETING OFFICER
1-49. The targeting officer and the S-2 section intelligence analyst operate as part of the FA battalion
counterfire operations section within the battalion command post. The targeting officer also serves as the
battalion counterfire officer and functions as an assistant S-2. He focuses on target information received
from target acquisition sources and uses the AFATDS, distributed common ground/surface system-Army,
and the effects management tool to collect, analyze and process this information into required target
guidance and instructions. The targeting officer has specific responsibilities, which may include:
 Assist the S-2 and S-3 in target production, processing, administration, and assist with external
targeting coordination.
 Assist the S-2 with enemy FA order of battle development and intelligence preparation of the
battlefield.
 Assist the S-2 with the intelligence, target acquisition, and surveillance portions of the operation
plan or operation order, to include the radar deployment order, as required.
 Direct attached, organic, and operational control target acquisition assets.
 Assist the battalion S-2 and S-3 with development and execution of the target acquisition and
counterfire plans.
 Assist the S-2 in identifying commander’s critical information requirements.
 Supervise the intelligence section in the absence of the S-2.
 Perform officer in charge shift duties for the S-2 section.
 Update target acquisition coverage of FA target acquisition assets, and position areas for FA
target acquisition assets.
 Orient FA target acquisition assets to ensure required coverage.
 Track the status of FA target acquisition assets.
 Maintain situational understanding of targeting operations.
 Recommend target selection standards.
 Use target selection standards to develop enemy artillery targets and suspect targets.
 Provide target location error information on available target acquisition assets to the S-2, S-3,
and brigade FSO as a basis for target selection standards recommendations to the targeting team.
 Advise the FA battalion commander and the supported higher HQ FSO on counterfire
operations.
 Support targeting meetings, as required.
 Conduct predictive battle damage assessment and request battle damage assessment from
external sources and supported higher HQ.
INTELLIGENCE SERGEANT
1-50. The intelligence sergeant (master sergeant) assists the S-2 in the planning, supervision, and execution
of intelligence and targeting operations. The intelligence sergeant may be a shift leader for the section,
especially in the absence of the S-2. In the FA battalion, the intelligence sergeant may perform many of the
section’s targeting functions.
TARGET ACQUISITION PLATOON

1-51. The target acquisition platoon has two key leaders the platoon leader and the target acquisition
platoon sergeant. A description of their duties follows.
TARGET ACQUISITION PLATOON LEADER

1-52. The platoon leader is the officer in charge of the target acquisition platoon and the assistant
counterfire officer. The platoon leader is a key participant in the battalion’s planning and operations. He
supervises the activities of the platoon to include training, maintenance, security, and employment. The
target acquisition platoon leader has specific responsibilities, which may include:
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-13

Chapter 1
 Perform tactical coordination for FA weapons locating radars in support of the supported higher
HQ, to include communications, security, protection, logistics, and administration.
 Inspect maintenance of platoon vehicles and equipment.
 Monitor the mission support requirements of weapon locating radars.
 Inform the FA battalion commander, S-3, and S-2 on the status of FA weapon locating radars.
 Recommend to commander and S-3 external mobility and survivability assets, as required.
 Advise the battalion commander and his staff on radar operations.
 Examine, write, and interpret standard operating procedures, orders, directives, and technical
publications for data pertinent to employment of radars and data collection assets.
 Commands and directs the target acquisition platoon’s operations and associated equipment.
 Inspects maintenance of platoon vehicles and equipment.
1-53. When positioned with the BCT fires cell:
 Serves as the conduit that links the BCT counterfire effort with trend and pattern analysis
conducted with the S-2.
 Serves as the BCT assistant counterfire officer within the BCT fires cell and is linked digitally to
the counterfire cell at division level and the FA battalion counterfire operations section.
 Develops and maintains the counterfire and indirect fire database within the BCT fires cell.
 Assists the BCT intelligence analyst and S-2 in developing indirect fire products for use during
the targeting working group and targeting meeting.
TARGET ACQUISITION PLATOON SERGEANT

1-54. The target acquisition platoon sergeant is the senior enlisted Soldier in the platoon. He assists the
platoon leader in the performance of his duties. The target acquisition platoon sergeant has specific
responsibilities, which may include:
 Train radar section chiefs.
 Coordinate survey support for radars, as required.
 Supervise maintenance and training of radar sections.
 Provide input to the targeting officer to construct and maintain the target acquisition capabilities
chart, as required.
 Provide input to the radar deployment order, as required.
 Monitor the deployment of the radar sections and recommend general position areas, search
areas, and cueing agents to the targeting officer.
 Coordinate the distribution of replacement personnel and administrative actions.
 Facilitate supply distribution to the radar sections.
BATTALION FIRE DIRECTION CENTER

1-55. The fire direction center has two key leaders the fire direction officer and the chief fire control
sergeant. A description of their duties follows.
FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER

1-56. The FDO supervises tactical and technical fire direction within the battalion. Based on guidance from
the battalion commander, S-3, S-2, and targeting officer, the FDO decides where and how the battalion and
any reinforcing units will fire. The FDO has specific responsibilities, which may include:
 Supervise the FDC.
 Assist the FA battalion commander in developing tactical and technical fire direction guidance.
 Develop and supervise input of appropriate parameters into the AFATDS, coordination of these
parameters with maneuver battalion fires cells and the BCT fires cell, reinforcing, reinforced FA
units, and FAB HQ, as necessary.
1-14 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Coordinate digital communications and database elements with users of non-FA digital mission
command systems, as required.
 Analyze requested targets for attack by FA. Consider ROE, desired effects, method of fire, and
types of ammunition needed.
 Verify dissemination of fire orders, schedules of fire, and schedules of targets to subordinate and
supporting unit FDCs, fires cells, and the supported higher HQ fires cell, as required.
 Maintain the current target display or overlay.
 Keep FA elements informed of targets.
 Establish procedures and train personnel to accomplish tactical and technical fire direction in a
degraded (manual and voice) mode.
 Establish procedures for interface between AFATDS and any other digital system with which
the FDC may be required to interface.
 Establish and maintain the tactical air integration system link in particular to receive the airspace
control overlay, and facilitate coordination and clearance of airspace for mission execution.
CHIEF FIRE CONTROL SERGEANT

1-57. He is the automated technical and tactical fire control expert in the battalion FDC. The chief fire
control sergeant has specific responsibilities that may include:
 Establish the tactical database in the battalion automated fire control system.
 Monitor the technical input and executions of fire plans and missions.
 Advise the FDO on changes or updates to battlefield geometry and firing unit status.
 Crosscheck status boards with system data.
 Assist the FDO in the execution of his duties.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-15

This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 2
Field Artillery Battalion Mission Command
Section I describes command and support relationships. Section II describes the FA
battalion command post and its operation. Section III discusses FA battalion
communications.
SECTION I – COMMAND AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

2-1. An FA battalion has a command or support relationship. FM 3-09 and ADRP 5-0 have detailed
information on command and support relationships.
RELATIONSHIPS
2-2. The FA battalion is organic to the BCT or task-organized to a DIVARTY or FAB. The FA performs
these functions as required:
 Deliver fires for close combat, shaping operations, and counterfire.
 Assume a different command or support relationship as directed by higher HQ. The FA battalion
personnel must know the inherent responsibilities of Army command and support relationships.
 Establish communications within the supported higher HQ fires cell communications network.
 Establish internal communications as the network control station for subordinate units of the
battalion.
2-3. Augmentation with additional FA depends upon the mission variables of METT-TC, which may
include:
 A FA battalion with a support relationship. For example, the division or corps commander may
place an augmenting FAB or BCT FA battalion in a reinforcing or general support-reinforcing
relationship to a BCT’s organic FA battalion.
 A FA battalion given a different command relationship. For example, an augmenting FA
battalion attached to a BCT. The brigade commander has the authority to:
 Give the FA battalion a reinforcing support relationship to his organic FA battalion.
 Attach the FA unit to his organic FA battalion.
 United States Marine Corps or Multinational artillery units may support a BCT. Command,
support and liaison requirements must be coordinated. United States Marine Corps artillery units
and North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) artillery units are prepared to accomplish the
tactical tasks and responsibilities found in FM 3-09.
2-4. If the FA battalion is operating as part of a joint (multi-service) or multinational operation, several
other command relationship terms may be encountered (combatant command, operational command)
during support. Detailed information on these command relationship terms are in FM 3-09 and ADRP 5-0.
2-5. The FA battalion commander and staff also need to understand that some of the command
relationship terms used have slightly different definitions within multinational forces than within
Department of Defense. For example, in NATO, operational control does not include authority to assign
separate employment of components of the units concerned. (The NATO definition of operational control
more closely represents the Department of Defense definition of tactical control.) During joint and
multinational operations, FA battalion commanders should seek clarification from their higher commander,
or verify the definitions of operational terms through review of orders or from the agreements that established
the force. Commanders use agreed-upon multinational command and support relationships when
controlling multinational forces.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-1

Chapter 2
NONSTANDARD FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

2-6. If an unusual tactical situation exists, or none of the standard command and support relationship
inherent responsibilities (or NATO tactical tasks and responsibilities) accurately convey the maneuver
commander’s guidance for fires, he assigns a nonstandard FA support relationship to the FA unit. A
nonstandard FA relationship may amplify, limit, or change one or more of the support inherent
responsibilities, or it may spell out contingencies not covered by those responsibilities. See FM 3-09 for
additional information.
ON-ORDER COMMAND OR SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

2-7. During the course of an operation, a FA battalion may change command or support relationships.
The assignment of an on-order FA relationship gives the battalion advance notice. This facilitates planning
for and transition to the follow-on command or support relationship. Positioning, ammunition requirements,
and timing of the change are several of the key considerations for battalions that have an on-order
relationship. An on-order relationship is in the maneuver operation order, FS plan, and the FA battalion
operation plan or operation order. See FM 3-09.
SECTION II – MISSION COMMAND
OVERVIEW
2-8. The FA battalion commander exercises mission command through the establishment of a battalion
command post. The command post, which is typically comprised of the S-3, S-2, S-6, FDC, and the
counterfire operations section, is habitually located with the command group. The combat trains command
post if established is located in the combat trains battalion support area and is manned by the S-4, S-1
noncommissioned officer, battalion aid station, and elements of the forward support company. The combat
trains command post is the operations center for the combat trains. See Chapter 7.
2-9. The primary command facility is the battalion command post. The commander usually positions his
command group with the command post. It is normally located where the commander can best command
assets and influence FA and other fires systems in support of operations.
2-10. The battalion will also designate an alternate command post, which will assume control of battalion
operations in the event the main command post becomes inoperable or loses communications. The alternate
command post may be another FA battalion, a firing battery, the supported higher HQ fires cell, or the
combat train’s command post. The battalion may also form a tactical command post forward during high
intensity, fast moving operations. The tactical command post concentrates on the current battle, performing
critical operations, fire direction, and intelligence tasks, while the main command post performs planning
and coordination functions.
2-11. In offensive tasks, the main command post may be required to move forward to shorten
communications distances and maintain control of the firing batteries and platoons. Under these conditions,
the FA battalion may use a tactical command post technique, moving some elements of the main command
post forward while the rear element of the main command post maintains control. Once established forward
the tactical command post takes control and the rear element breaks down and moves forward to reform a
main command post. See command post positioning and movement for a discussion of employment of the
tactical command post.
COMMAND POST ORGANIZATION AND OPERATION

2-12. The makeup of the FA battalion command post will vary with the situation and the commander’s
concept of operations. Most of the elements that comprise the command post are in the HQ and HQ battery,
which may include:
 Command group.
 Main command post.
2-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Communications support.
 Survey elements.
COMMAND GROUP
2-13. The command group consists of the battalion commander, assisted by the command sergeant major,
the executive officer, and their drivers. They frequently operate out of the command post, where they can
best monitor and control the battalion’s operations.
2-14. The FA battalion commander positions himself where he can best fulfill his command
responsibilities. This may be in the FA battalion command post, a trains location, a firing battery, or a key
traffic or observation point. The FA battalion commander may at times be in the brigade HQ, a maneuver
battalion fires cell, or with the brigade commander at a critical location on the battlefield. The FA battalion
commander will have digital equipment and radios in his vehicle that allow him to monitor digital traffic
and aid in command of the battalion while he operates away from the command post.
2-15. The members of the command group are often away from the command post observing, directing, or
otherwise influencing the action at critical places on the battlefield. The battalion executive officer,
command sergeant major, and S-3 provide critical support, which allows the FA battalion commander the
flexibility to position himself wherever the situation dictates.
2-16. The battalion executive officer may operate out of the battalion trains command post instead of the
main command post, especially when focusing his efforts on the battalion’s sustainment operations. During
periods of major planning actions, or when the commander and S-3 may be out of the main command post
for extended periods, the executive officer will probably be in the main command post.
MAIN COMMAND POST

2-17. The main command post serves as the FA battalion’s primary operations center, assisting the
battalion commander in synchronizing fires in support of brigade operations. It is the location in the
battalion where the majority of planning, staff coordination, plan execution, receiving and disseminating
information, and monitoring of key events occur. In order for the FA battalion to accomplish its assigned
mission, the command post personnel should be able to perform critical functions, to include:
 Advise the battalion commander, and as appropriate, key FS personnel, on the organization for
combat, positioning, allocation of ammunition and attack guidance.
 Perform tactical fire direction, to include selection of units and ammunition to support fire
mission requests in response to the supported commander's attack guidance and to achieve the
desired effects.
 Plan operations, to include generating a FA battalion, operation plan or operation order that
outlines the concept of operations and responsibilities for the battalion and describes the FA
battalion commander’s plan for accomplishing assigned missions and responsibilities. Note: In
the FA battalion, the operation plan or operation order must address the scheme of fires, and is
prepared in coordination with the supported higher HQ fires cell as part of the maneuver
operation order. The operations section, in coordination with the maneuver fires cells, ensure
that the FA plan is synchronized with the maneuver force plan. The command post automation
systems provide a collaborative planning capability to assist in these planning functions.
 Direct current operations, to include controlling fires and target acquisition assets that are
organic, attached, or reinforcing the battalion; move and position firing elements; orchestrate the
delivery of effective fires in support of close combat.
 Monitor technical fire direction, to include providing technical assistance to battery and platoon
FDCs.
 Maintain situational understanding of the overall supported higher HQ operation to ensure the
battalion provides timely, responsive support and rapidly adjusts to the changes encountered.
 Conduct information management operations, receiving, processing, and disseminating critical
battlefield information in all formats.
 Direct counterfire operations.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-3

Chapter 2
 Conduct essential intelligence operations and tasks.

 Perform targeting.
 Direct and coordinate tactical UAS employment.
 Advise the S-4 of Class V requirements.
 Direct survey operations to support the battalion’s operations.
 Direct communications operations, to include radio, wire, automation management, local area
networks, and signal security.
 Direct CBRN defensive operations within the battalion.
 Provide general direction of administrative and logistic operations in coordination with the
battalion trains command post, forward support company, and the firing batteries.
 Perform mutual support unit operations.
Headquarters and Headquarters Battery Commander and First Sergeant

2-18. The HQ and HQ battery commander and first sergeant are responsible for the security and logistical
support for the command post. Dispersed elements of HQ and HQ battery at the battalion main command
post, or at the battalion trains command post, must work closely with staff officers and section leaders to
ensure adequate support for all elements.
2-19. With the HQ and HQ battery commander and first sergeant usually directing the security, support,
and movement of the battalion main command post, the forward support company commander and first
sergeant assume responsibility for the FA battalion support area. Due to dispersion of personnel, both
leadership teams must coordinate their efforts between the command post and the FA battalion support
area. The FA battalion commander designates command and security responsibilities for the battalion trains
command post. While positioning and movement of the main command post are primarily an S-3
responsibility, the HQ and HQ battery commander and first sergeant provide assistance in reconnaissance,
movement, and occupation.
Communications Support
2-20. The S-6, S-3, and the HQ and HQ battery commander work together to ensure the command post has
adequate communications support. This primarily includes assistance in the setup and maintenance of
radio, digital communications and automation equipment, and retransmission capability. The S-6 supports
the battalions other operations centers and the firing batteries. The communications element in the
command post may consist of a contact team that travels with and gives priority to command post support.
Survey Elements
2-21. The battalion survey sections may base their operations out of the command post in order to allow
better control by the S-3.
COMMAND POST ORGANIZATION

2-22. The operations and intelligence element and the battalion FDC are the two major functional elements
of the FA battalion command post. The operations and intelligence element manages both current and
future operations and coordinates aspects of FA support. It also performs the planning and operational
functions, to include developing fire plans, orders, conducting artillery focused intelligence preparation of
the battlefield, developing artillery targets, planning, and executing supported higher HQ counterfire
operations, tracking the status of subordinate units, and controlling unit movements.
2-23. The FDC performs tactical fire direction by processing calls for fire, determining the type and
amount of ammunition required to achieve the desired effects and transmitting fire orders to the platoon
FDCs or platoon operations centers.
S-3 SECTION
2-24. The operations section responsibilities may include:
2-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Plan and coordinate the positioning of key mission command logistic elements and firing
batteries and platoons supporting current and future operations.
 Plan and coordinate battalion movements and assist the battery commanders with coordination
of movements. This includes assignment of routes, position areas, and their clearance through
the area of operations.
 Maintain current operational status of organic, attached, and reinforcing and reinforced units.
 Prepare and disseminate operational reports.
 Maintain friendly situational understanding and common operational picture.
 Disseminate the battalion common operational picture.
 Coordinate survey requirements for the supported higher HQ to include radars or units from the
FAB.
 Advise the FDC, fires cells, reinforcing and reinforced units on scheduling of planned fires, as
required.
 Prepare and disseminate the FA battalion operation plan or operation order, while assisting fires
cells with development of the supported higher HQ FS plan.
 Monitor ammunition consumption and resupply for the battalion.
 Inform other staff sections (such as, S-1, S-4, forward support company commander, and combat
trains) of the current status of the supported forces and any changes to sustainment requirements.
 Supervise CBRN defensive operations.
 Direct operations security within the battalion along with the S-2 and S-6.
 Assume control of reinforcing and reinforced artillery battalions during mutual support unit
operations, as required.
 Coordinate communications requirements with the S-6 for the battalion.
S-2 SECTION
2-25. The S-2 section is an integral part of the operations and intelligence section. The intelligence section
provides the commander and S-3 with intelligence information essential to the operation and survival of the
battalion. The intelligence section responsibilities may include:
 Prepare artillery focused intelligence preparation of the battlefield products of the supported
higher HQ area of operations in coordination with the brigade S-2. The FA battalion intelligence
preparation of the battlefield is an extension of the BCT intelligence preparation of the
battlefield and higher HQ intelligence preparation of the battlefield, focused on specific artillery-
related intelligence requirements. The intelligence preparation of the battlefield process is a
continuous process.
 Assist the S-3 in battery and platoon position area selection to ensure that positions are in
consonance with intelligence preparation of the battlefield insights and survivability
requirements.
 Assist the counterfire operations section in the development of the target acquisition Annex or
Tab to the FA battalion operation plan or operations order and the radar deployment order for
organic and attached radars. Ensures the radar deployment order designates positions and
establishes cueing procedures. Coordinate the use of target acquisition radars, organic or
attached, with the battalion S-3.
 Develop targeting data based on the brigade commander's high-payoff target list and attack
guidance matrix. Provide recommendations and input to the targeting team that develop the
high-payoff target list and attack guidance matrix for the brigade commander.
 Monitor enemy artillery tactics and techniques within the supported higher HQ area of operation.
 Exchange combat information and intelligence with the supported higher HQ, subordinate units,
reinforcing, reinforced units, and adjacent units, as required.
 Coordinate with battery first sergeants to develop a ground and air defense plan for the battalion.
 Assist the S-3 with planning, coordination, and conduct of operations security.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-5

Chapter 2
 Coordinate external battalion security requirements.

 Support the development of commander’s critical information requirements, specifically priority
intelligence requirements.
COUNTERFIRE OPERATIONS SECTION

2-26. The counterfire operations section and the FA battalion S-2 make up the target processing team. This
is a working group that recommends and updates target acquisition coverage, control of FA target
acquisition assets and position areas for FA target acquisition assets. The counterfire operations section
duties include:
 Conduct counterfire operations.
 Produce the radar deployment order for the supported higher HQ.
 Orient FA target acquisition assets to ensure required coverage of the supported higher HQ area
of operations.
 Track FA target acquisition assets and reports status to the S-2 and S-3.
 Assist the battalion S-2 and S-3 with development and execution of the FA target acquisition and
counterfire plan.
 Maintain situational understanding of targeting operations.
 Recommend target selection standards.
 Use target selection standards to develop enemy artillery targets and suspect targets.
 Provide target location error information on available target acquisition assets to the S-2, S-3,
and brigade FSO as a basis for target selection standards recommendation to the targeting
working group.
 Advise the FA battalion commander on counterfire operations.
 Support targeting meetings, as required.
 Assist the battalion S-2 in writing the target acquisition and surveillance portions of the FA
battalion operation plan or operation order.
 Direct attached, organic, and operational control target acquisition assets.
 Assist the S-2 in identifying commander’s critical information requirements.
 Conduct predictive battle damage assessment and request battle damage assessment from
external sources and supported higher HQ.
 Assist in the planning of tactical UAS missions and operations.
COMMAND POST ACTIVITIES

2-27. The S-3 supervises the command post’s activities. The S-3 usually does not have a specific shift of
duty because he directs operations during critical times.
2-28. The S-3 positions himself in the command post where he can see and hear critical information that
will allow him to make sound tactical decisions based on the commander’s guidance. In the event the S-3 is
not in the command post, the assistant S-3 or shift officer assumes the S-3’s responsibility of managing
command post operations. The S-3 and executive officer should develop shifts to cover 24-hour operations.
This should be covered and published in the tactical standard operating procedures.
2-29. Each section should maintain a shift log, documenting the major events, actions, and message traffic
applicable to the section, as well as accomplishment of major shift responsibilities. The log serves as a
record of the major events and as a tool to prepare for shift briefings.
2-30. Shifts should overlap by about an hour to allow proper handover of the battle. In addition, shift
changeover for each section may be staggered to improve continuity. Update approximately an hour before
shift change, maps, status boards, shift logs, and other tools with current information; filing and document
destruction is accomplished; and general command post housekeeping completed. The oncoming shift
should be given time to review maps, status boards, shift logs, and other applicable tools. The outgoing
shift should provide a shift briefing that addresses, as a minimum, current operational status, command post
status, and battalion command post and section tasks.
2-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

2-31. The S-3 or section leaders may establish a tactical standard operating procedure format for the shift
change briefing.
MANAGEMENT OF TACTICAL INFORMATION

2-32. The battalion S-3 and the rest of the command post staff control the day-to-day operations of the FA
battalion. They receive and track battlefield information into tactical movement, delivery of fires, and
sustainment operations. For the battalion staff to effectively track the tactical situation and satisfy the
maneuver commander’s concept of fires, situational understanding and battle tracking must be as accurate
as possible. Using digital systems the staff provides situational understanding, battle tracking capabilities,
collaborative planning, and rapid dissemination of information.
2-33. AFATDS provides automated planning, preparation, execution, and assessment of close combat,
counterfire, interdiction, shaping operations, and SEAD. AFATDS interfaces with other automation
systems. It can also provide numerous separate overlays to allow specific information when needed such as
enemy overlay, target overlay, friendly artillery locations overlay, and operational graphics.
2-34. Display the commander’s tactical display on the command post of the future at the FA battalion.
Display the supported higher HQ staffs map, overlays, and other control measures. AFATDS publishes unit
information, targets, and certain geometries that other automated systems in the command post can access.
2-35. Automated systems, such as force XXI Battle Command and below (FBCB2), display the current
situation on a map with boundaries and other control measures. It is important to remember that the current
situation provided by a satellite-based system has a time delay and is near-real time, not real time.
2-36. Where the various systems are located throughout the command post will depend on the command
post design as determined by the commander, executive officer, and S-3. It is imperative that each staff
member fully understand the capabilities of each system and use each system to facilitate command post
information management. The physical layout of the command post should support the flow of information
and allow the S-3 to direct the efforts of the staff in an efficient manner.
2-37. The S-3 should position himself in the command post where he can effectively manage his personnel.
He should be at a vantage point where he has access to radios, telephones, and digital display devices. He
must also monitor and manage the back-up systems, such as the operations and intelligence maps and other
manual status charts.
2-38. The primary information sources in the command post are its internal and external digital and voice
networks. Normally, in a FA battalion, the networks that give the S-3 the clearest picture of current events
on the battlefield are the supported higher HQ FS coordination network and the command networks
(voice). It is important to understand that the FA battalion staff monitors these networks and does not
normally transmit on them. To reduce confusion in the command post, it is recommended these networks
be the only ones audible on remote devices in the operations (extension) area. Use headsets when
monitoring the other voice networks or monitor from within the appropriate staff vehicles. The S-3 is kept
informed of the majority of the traffic on the other networks (data and voice) by status charts updates,
reviewing message forms, and computer displays. Bring anything of significance that requires the S-3’s
attention to the S-3 immediately.
2-39. The S-3’s principal networks for fire planning and execution are the battalion fire direction,
operations, fires, and supported higher HQ FS networks. These networks allow the command post to
review fire missions and perform a secondary independent check of FS coordination measures. The S-3 is
able to observe targets in relation to the tactical situation.
2-40. The operations and intelligence section must closely monitor the information received from all
tactical information sources to verify critical data, identify potentially inaccurate information, and to
resolve discrepancies between conflicting reports or data.
2-41. By monitoring the supported command network plus the situational understanding provided by
automation systems, the S-3 determines the tempo of the operation, anticipates where fires will be directed
by the battalion commander or brigade FSO, and maintains situational awareness. This allows the S-3 to be
proactive in positioning units and managing ammunition for effective tactical control of fires.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-7

Chapter 2
2-42. The command post passes tactical orders and information to the batteries and any supporting units
over the battalion command network. Send tactical orders and information to the firing platoons over
AFATDS. Remote the voice command network radio to the operations sergeant’s post and monitored with
a headset. The S-3 receives the information passed on this network by monitoring the computer screens and
by reviewing messages and reports used to update the situation. Avoid sending situation reports and
updates of information with battalion combat and field trains on this network. Send routine administrative
and logistical traffic on the battalion administrative and logistics network.
2-43. The S-2 section monitors the supported higher HQ operations and intelligence network. The focus of
the traffic on operations and intelligence network is maneuver specific, but the S-2 can gather information
relevant to FA support requirements and operational security considerations. The S-2 section should
monitor this with either a remote (headset) or from inside the S-2 vehicle. Pass routine traffic to the S-3 in
message form. The S-3 monitors critical traffic requiring his attention from his battle station, on the S-2’s
remote. The S-2 shares target information generated by the target acquisition platoon with the supported
higher HQ analyst.
2-44. When the BCT is subordinate to a division or corps and not operating independently or directly for a
Joint Task Force, the FA battalion monitors and operates in several DIVARTY or FAB networks.
DISPLAY OF INFORMATION
2-45. Automation systems provide the FA battalion command post with tools for the management of
information. The digital systems are very dependent on generator power and except for FBCB2 and
AFTADS will not be available on the move. It is recommended that the command post also maintain
alternate information management tools to augment and back-up the digital systems, which may include:
 Map boards that facilitate exchange of overlays with minimum loss of accuracy.
 Overlays with tactical information to assist command post personnel in planning and executing
operations (for example, maneuver graphics, position area, target, and sustainment).
 Status boards along functional lines to track the current status of elements and other combat
information.
COMMAND POST POSITIONING AND MOVEMENT

2-46. The S-3 control the movement and positioning of the FA battalion command post based on the
guidance and direction of the commander. The S-2 provides mobility information concerning terrain,
trafficability of roads, obstacles, minefields, contaminated areas, and survivability information regarding
ground, air, and CBRN threat from enemy forces, and information about the civilian populace in the area.
The S-6 provides guidance on communications factors. The other members of the command post may also
assist with reconnaissance, security, and advance party operations. The fires cell assists with clearance for
the positions and movement routes that must be coordinated with the supported higher HQ staff and
subordinate maneuver battalions.
COMMAND POST POSITIONING CONSIDERATIONS

2-47. The S-3 uses the intelligence preparation of the battlefield products in determining positions. The S-3
usually plans primary, alternate, and possibly supplementary command post positions. The primary
consideration for positioning the command post is the ability to accomplish its mission. The S-3 must also
consider if the command post will be collocated with other elements, such as the battalion trains or a
supported maneuver unit.
Other Factors That Influence Positioning Of The Command Post

2-48. Position the command post based on general movement of the forward line of own troops, which
may be forward, rearward, static, or erratic.
2-8 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 In a sustained, rapidly advancing offensive operation, position the command post as far forward
as feasible.
 During a retrograde, place the command post farther to the rear than normal. On a non-linear
battlefield, increased security considerations may be less predictable than on a linear battlefield.
2-49. If in a high enemy counterfire threat, position the command post outside the range of mortars and as
many of the enemy’s artillery systems as feasible,. Defilade or reverse slope positioning may provide
increased protection, however, retransmission of communications may be necessary.
2-50. In response to high enemy air threat, position the command post in heavily wooded or urban terrain
that allows better camouflage. Place the command post close to an air and missile defense unit that can
provide coverage. The use of wooded or urban terrain, coupled with camouflage and light discipline, are
also critical to reducing vulnerability to air and satellite imagery.
2-51. Position the command post with or near other friendly elements when there is a high risk from enemy
penetrating forces or small force operations. When there is a threat of rapid penetration from an enemy
attack or counterattack, position the command post off the expected axis of advance, especially any high-
speed avenues of approach. For increased security, position infantry, military police, or logistic elements
with the command post.
2-52. If there is a significant electronic warfare threat, position the command post away from the maneuver
command posts and the battalion trains to reduce the threat to them and to reduce the electronic signature.
To reduce electronic locating vulnerability, position the command post in defilade or masked locations and
use retransmission.
2-53. Position the command post close to the maneuver command post when extensive coordination with
the BCT HQ is critical.
2-54. Consider communications factors such as digital and radio communication ranges and retransmission
capability. Communication considerations are the distances between units, the capabilities of the
equipment, atmospheric conditions, and terrain.
2-55. Consider grounding of equipment, tie-downs for extensions and shelters, and preparation of
defensive positions for terrain that is extremely wet, rocky, or steep, and urban terrain that may interfere
with weapon platforms.
2-56. Consider hilly or mountainous terrain that provides survivability advantages, but may also interfere
with communications for the command post.
TACTICAL COMMAND POST CONSIDERATIONS

2-57. To facilitate the continuity of operations during movement of the command post to a new location,
the battalion may use a tactical command post. This is a variation of movement by echelon. A small portion
of the main command post, and minimal security and support elements, will move to the new location in
advance of the remainder of the command post. Designate a FDC to assume control of fire mission
processing and act as the battalion until the main command post can re-assume control and continue to
process fire missions. Maintain tactical fire control at the main command post (-) during the tactical
command post movement. Once the tactical command post is in place it conducts a continuity of operations
exchange with the main command post (-) and establishes communications with subordinate, higher, and
supported units before it assumes control of the battalion. The remainder of the command post then moves
to the new location and normal operations can resume.
2-58. Composition of the tactical command post is limited to key equipment and personnel. As an
example, a tactical command post may include:
 A high-mobility multipurpose-wheeled vehicle; operations vehicle with extension.
 An FBCB2, AFATDS, status boards and situation maps.
 S-2 or S-3; assistant S-3; command post noncommissioned officer; FDO and FDC
noncommissioned officer; S-2 noncommissioned officer; selected operations and intelligence
and FDC personnel; and other HQ and HQ battery elements to provide support and security.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-9

Chapter 2
2-59. The size and composition of the tactical command post will depend on the tactical situation and the
S-3’s major concerns. A smaller tactical command post may be preferred during periods of rapid
advancement and frequent moves, while utilizing a larger tactical command post if security is a major
issue, and speed of movement is not critical. During a rapidly advancing offensive operation, the tactical
command post may be moving again shortly after the rest of the command post has closed and assumed
control of the battalion.
2-60. The unit can use a version of the tactical command post technique in a reversed sequence, during
defensive operations when the battalion must move to the rear or laterally away from a penetration. The
bulk of the command post would move first, while the tactical command post remains in place controlling
the battalion until a new command post is established. This allows quick displacement of the tactical
command post and the ability to remain close to the fight.
2-61. The battalion can also form a tactical command post to place the battalion commander or S-3 closer
to the action, near the maneuver commander, his command post, or the supported higher HQ fires cell. Use
the tactical command post during operations requiring frequent, fast moves where the main command post
would have trouble-keeping pace with the supported maneuver unit. The tactical command post would be
the focal point for battalion control of the current fight, emphasizing operations, fire direction, and limited
target acquisition and intelligence functions. The main command post would follow as soon as possible and
monitor the situation, prepared to assume control, as required. The main command post continues to
conduct planning and other command post functions in order to allow the tactical command post to
concentrate on the current fight during a critical stage in the battle. The tactical command post will consist
of only one or two vehicles that have the speed and maneuverability to keep up with the maneuver forces.
The tactical command post should have a robust communications capability as it may operate separate from
the main command post for a longer period and must be fully capable of controlling the battalion’s fires
and directing subordinate elements. The tactical command post technique is also useful when the
commander wants to send a command post element forward with an artillery raid.
ADDITIONAL COMMAND POST MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES

2-62. Security, organization for combat, personnel strength, equipment status, availability of mutually
supporting battalions, and the tactical situation influences movement of the command post. The command
post may move as a single unit, or in several small elements. A major consideration in determining the
command post movement technique is the availability of an element to assume the command post functions
for continuity of operations. For example, an AFATDS at the FA battalion could conduct continuity of
operations with the brigade fires cell AFATDS, or a firing platoon FDC AFATDS. Rehearsal and clear
tactical standard operating procedures prevent confusion.
LIAISON OPERATIONS
2-63. One of the inherent responsibilities of a FA battalion assigned a reinforcing or a general support-
reinforcing support relationship is to provide liaison to the reinforced unit. The battalion commander may
direct liaison be established with another FA unit, a maneuver unit, or any other element. Liaison may be
necessary with nonmilitary elements. FA battalions organic to BCTs do not have organic liaison sections. If
liaison is required, establish a team from existing resources.
2-64. Liaison is the contact or intercommunication maintained between elements to ensure mutual
understanding and unity of purpose and action. Liaison activities augment the commander's ability to
synchronize and focus combat power. Liaison includes establishing and maintaining physical contact and
communications. Establish liaison activities to ensure cooperation and understanding between commanders
and staffs; coordination on tactical matters to achieve mutual purpose, support, and action; exact and
precise understanding of implied or inferred coordination measures to achieve synchronized results.
2-65. Overall, liaison becomes another tool to help commanders gain assurance that supporting and
supported commanders understand implicit coordination, and achieve synchronized results. Effective
liaison enhances the commander's confidence in planning and in mission execution.
2-66. If the reinforced and reinforcing units have compatible communications and automation equipment,
and both units maintain communications and situational understanding, the actual physical presence of a
2-10 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

liaison team at the reinforced unit may not be required. If the units choose to collocate command posts or
FDCs, no additional liaison is required.
2-67. When assigned a support relationship of general support, position a DIVARTY, FAB, or FA
battalion in a BCTs area of operation. The general support FA battalion commander may consider sending
one of his liaison teams to the BCT fires cell. This team can help the battalion commander track the
maneuver situation and keep the brigade commander informed of the location and status of the FA battalion
that is in his area but not under his control.
SECTION III – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION COMMUNICATIONS

2-68. The commander must develop techniques that promote an expeditious flow of information
throughout the unit. List the techniques in the unit’s standard operating procedures.
2-69. Units base decisions on the information derived from the mission command processes and activities,
to include:
 Acquire information.
 Assess whether new actions are required.
 Determine what these actions should be.
 Direct subordinates to take appropriate actions.
 Supervise and assess.
2-70. The mission command system includes the facilities, personnel, networks, information systems,
processes and procedures essential to a commander to enable mission command. The mission command
system of the FA battalion is the command post, the personnel that operate the command post, a mixture of
automation systems and the communications systems with which they operate.
AUTOMATED SYSTEMS
2-71. Automated systems provide the electronic architecture in which situational understanding is
accomplished. The BCT, DIVARTY, and FAB are equipped with automated systems, providing them
significant advantages in collecting technical information, and distributing information and intelligence
rapidly. The automated systems enable commanders to rapidly gain reliable information and, therefore,
achieve information dominance in their operational environment. The automated systems satisfy two
critical requirements; interoperability, and situational understanding. The automated systems employ
networks that are interoperable with theater, joint, and multinational command and control systems. These
systems pass critical information at decisive times, which leverage and exploit tactical success and facilitate
future operations.
2-72. The automated systems include:
 Global Command and Control System – Army.
 Command Post of the Future.
 Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System.
 Air and Missile Defense Workstation.
 Distributed Common Ground/Surface System-Army.
 Battle Command Sustainment Support System.
 Force XXI Battle Command-Brigade and Below.
 Integrated Meteorological System.
 Digital Topographic Support System.
 Tactical Airspace Integration System.
2-73. The FA battalion gains access to these network automated systems through a wideband capability
provided by the FA battalion small command post node. The small command post node provides secret
data and voice over the internet protocol phone service. This architecture allows the battalion data network
to access the Global Command and Control System-Army through either a unit hub node or a joint network
node.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-11

Chapter 2
2-74. At the FA battalion, assigned operators are in charge of setting up the communications package to
support data and voice over internet protocol services to the HQ. Setup for the network is a standard
procedure that consists of powering the system, pointing to the satellite, and connecting the data equipment
for needed dial tone or e-mail and organizational traffic.
2-75. Vertically and horizontally integrate automated systems at the tactical and operational levels. The
digital message capabilities of the automated systems provide the FA battalion commander a variety of
tools to assist him in command of the battalion. It is imperative that commanders and staffs fully
understand what the systems can and cannot do for them. Commanders should never forget that face-to-
face communication is always the most effective.
THE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK

2-76. The BCT, DIVARTY and FAB rely on a federation of communications networks that collectively
enable mission command. Not all components of the network are under the BCT, DIVARTY or FAB
control. The network is a critical tool in BCT, DIVARTY and FAB operations and must be redundant,
flexible, and adaptive to the commander. It is important that all BCT, DIVARTY and FAB brigade
leadership be familiar with the capabilities and limitations of the components of the communications
network. Various networks may be encountered at the BCT, DIVARTY and FAB, which may include:
 Combat Net Radio.
 Blue force tracking.
 Enhanced Position Locating Reporting System.
 Warfighter Information Network – Tactical
 TROJAN data network.
 Satellite communications.
 Global Broadcast Service.
 Movement Tracking System (forward support company)
 V-Sat (forward support company)
2-77. For more information on these systems, see FM 3-90.6.
FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION RADIO COMMUNICATION

OPERATIONS
2-78. Radio communications are critical to the operation of the FA battalion. The different responsibilities
and areas that are essential to radio communications success are as follows.
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS RESPONSIBILITIES

2-79. Radio communication is a command responsibility and essential to efficient command of the FA
battalion and enhances its ability to provide effective fires. The commander's radio communications plan
should address elements of his command to include supported, reinforced, and adjacent units. To establish
a responsive and dependable communications system, the FA battalion must consider and work within the
following parameters, to include:
 Rely heavily on frequency modulation radio communications.
 Monitor multiple radio networks while maintaining continuity of operations during
displacement.
 Communicate over long distances to many diverse elements, such as FIST, fires cells,
reinforcing units, FAB, and the supported maneuver force.
 Rely increasingly on digital data communications, which have shorter-range capabilities than
voice communications.
2-80. The FA battalion commander is responsible for adequacy and proper use of radio communications
within his command and for their efficient operation in the system of the next higher command. The
2-12 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

commander can delegate the authority to establish, maintain, control, and coordinate the battalion’s various
radio networks to a subordinate.
2-81. The FA battalion S-6 has overall authority and direction of the communications assets and operations
within the FA battalion. The battalion S-6 must work closely with the brigade S-6 to ensure efficient radio
communications for FS throughout the supported higher HQ area of operations. The S-6 maintains the
communications and automation systems, in addition operates retransmission stations for the FA battalion.
The S-6 section has a section HQ, an automation management section, and a retransmission section.
2-82. Elements of the battalion send communications equipment for repair through the S-6 section. The
communications maintenance section performs maintenance on battalion HQ communications equipment
within their capability. Repair personnel in the forward support company provide on-site field maintenance
and assistance for the subordinate units of the battalion.
2-83. The automation management section provides assistance with the establishment, operation, and
maintenance of the battalion’s automation systems. This includes hardware, software, networks, and
automation security. The section’s networking functions include management and maintenance internal to
the FA battalion local area network.
2-84. The retransmission section establishes and maintains the retransmission station, as required. Dual
retransmission capability is essential to maintaining digital and voice communications over extended
distances or due to areas of rough and complex terrain.
ECHELONS OF COMMAND
2-85. The senior unit is responsible for establishing communications links with its subordinate units. This
responsibility is primarily one of planning and directing the establishment of the communications links
since assets belonging to either the senior HQ or the subordinate unit may be used. The supported higher
HQ has the responsibility to establish communications with the FA battalion and the FA battalion HQ has
responsibility to establish communications with its organic elements.
2-86. The battalion’s responsibilities for establishing communications include:
 Senior to Subordinate. A senior unit is responsible for establishing communications with a
subordinate unit. An attached unit of any size is subordinate to the attached command.
 Supporting to Supported. A supporting unit is responsible for establishing communications
with the supported unit.
 Reinforcing to Reinforced. A reinforcing unit is responsible for establishing communications
with the reinforced unit.
 Passing to Stationary. In a forward passage of lines, the passing unit is responsible for
establishing communications with the stationary unit.
 Stationary to Passing. In a rearward passage of lines, the stationary unit is responsible for
establishing communications with the passing unit.
 Lateral Communications. The next higher commander or SOP directs responsibility for
establishing communications between adjacent units. If responsibility is not directed by orders,
the commander of the unit on the left is responsible for establishing communications with the
unit on the right. The commander of a unit positioned behind another unit establishes
communications with the forward unit.
 Restoration. Regardless of the responsibility, all units take prompt action to restore lost
communications.
AREA OF OPERATIONS
2-87. Adjacent commands must maintain communications with each other to ensure coordination of the
combat effort. When facing the forward line of own troops (left-to-right relationship), the command on the
left establishes communications with the command on its right. In a noncontiguous area of operations, units
will establish and maintain communications with adjacent units that can mutually support or influence their
operations.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-13

Chapter 2
RESTORING AND REESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS

2-88. Regardless of which unit is responsible for establishing communications, all units served by the
system must help restore any communications system outage. This means that units will work from higher
to lower and lower to higher to reestablish communications when interrupted and not wait for the network
control station to solve the problem.
PLANNING CONSIDERATION
2-89. The communications plan supports the command requirements of a tactical mission. To meet specific
requirements commanders may modify their systems based on METT-TC. The S-6 assists the S-3 in
developing the communications plan during the MDMP. There are factors to be considered during the
planning phase, to include:
 Digital and Voice Networks. FA battalions use a mix of digital and voice radio networks as
determined by the operational status of assigned equipment and mission variables. If digital
capability is lost by the battalion or by one or more of the batteries, the voice networks can
quickly become overburdened. The FA battalion communications plan must include plans for
converting some digital networks to voice while continuing to support the remaining digital data
networks. The communication plan should include a plan for reconverting to digital networks. It
is extremely important to keep voice traffic off digital networks and vice versa. Develop and
rehearse frequently a voice backup plan for each operation. Many of the details can be included
in the unit tactical standard operating procedure.
 Planning Ranges. Range capabilities vary with the method of communications, the type and
model of equipment used, terrain, weather, and atmospheric conditions. Jamming also degrades
communications range. Since rehearsal on the actual terrain and under the exact conditions is
often impossible, experience, digital terrain tools, and thorough map reconnaissance are essential
to proper estimation of communications ranges.
 System Mixes. The factors of METT-TC have different effects on the communications means.
The preferred communications setup is any system or mixture of systems that will communicate
the information with the least exposure to enemy electronic warfare and not place total reliance
on radio. A good communications plan maximizes the use of all available systems and backup
plans to prevent over reliance on any one system. Address much of a FA battalion’s basic
communications planning in the unit’s tactical standard operating procedure.
COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS

2-90. Communications security should be part of each FA battalion tactical standard operating procedure.
Effective communications security techniques include:
 Require authentication on non-secure networks if operating in the single channel mode of
operation. Note: proper authentication procedures can eliminate intrusion and imitative
deception.
 Never mix plain and encrypted traffic on the same network. Doing so compromises the nature of
the network, which makes interception and analysis easier for the enemy.
 Use secure equipment whenever possible. If the battalion is supporting a unit without secure
capability, specify networks that will be unsecured and enforce secure discipline on all
remaining networks.
 Limit transmissions to five seconds or less, if operating in the single channel mode of operation.
This makes interception and direction finding more difficult.
2-14 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Work through jamming if possible. Report suspected jamming on a different network to

supported higher HQ or the network control station immediately. Do not stop using the
suspected network as this may tip the enemy that their jamming attempts were successful and
friendly forces will not be able to pinpoint the jamming location if they stop and start jamming a
new channel or frequency. Jumping networks should be a last resort. Remember that if jamming
is bad enough to keep a unit from operating on a network, it may also keep many of the stations
from receiving the signal to change frequencies. Disseminate anti-jam frequencies well in
advance, so that subscriber stations can move to the alternate frequencies in sequence. Reduce
susceptibility to jamming by using frequency-hopping radios.
 Schedule and use only authorized call signs from the automated network control device or signal
operating instructions.
INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS

2-91. The FA battalion communicates through internal and external communication networks. The details
on both internal and external networks follows.
INTERNAL NETWORKS
2-92. The FA battalion will require 6 to 10 internal networks for normal operations, to include as required:
 Use battalion command (voice) network for command, collection, and dissemination of tactical
information and intelligence. The battalion operations section is the network control station.
 Use battalion fire direction (digital) networks for tactical and technical fire direction from the
forward observer through the FA battalion FDC to the controlling platoon FDC. Assign the fire
direction networks according to the mission and the battalion’s communications status, not
necessarily one per platoon. However, a technique frequently used under ideal communications,
is to assign a network per firing platoon, with the forward observers, FIST, maneuver battalion
fires cell, and battalion FDC spread evenly across the networks. In some operational situations,
when platoons are firing units, it will be required to allocate a fire direction network per firing
platoon. The network control station for all fire direction networks is the battalion FDC.
Establish one or more of the networks as a voice network.
 Use battalion command (digital) networks for FS planning and coordination between FA
elements, for mutual support unit operations, and for tactical and technical fire direction to
reinforcing artillery units. The network control station is the battalion FDC. Establish the
network as a voice network during degraded operations.
 Battalion operations and intelligence (digital) network is used for exchanging targeting,
counterfire section, survey, meteorological data, and intelligence information within the
battalion. These elements can include radars, target processing section, and survey teams. The
network control station is the battalion S-3 section.
 Battalion administration and logistics (voice) network is used for coordinating battalion
administrative and logistical matters. The battalion trains command post is the network control
station. The FA battalion S-4, S-1, the forward support company commander, and his
subordinate platoon leaders will operate in this network on a full time basis. The firing battery
commanders, first sergeants, or executive officer will operate in this network, as required.
EXTERNAL NETWORKS
2-93. The FA battalion may operate on several external networks. The actual number will depend on
availability of communications assets, supported higher HQ task organization, and the division or corps
organization with supporting brigades. The FA battalion may operate numerous external networks, to
include as required:
 BCT (voice).
 BCT operations and intelligence (voice).
 BCT administrative and support (voice).
 FAB network (digital) as assigned.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-15

Chapter 2
 FAB operations and intelligence (digital), as assigned.

 DIVARTY network (digital) as assigned.
 DIVARTY operations and intelligence (digital), as assigned.
 BCT FS network (voice).
 Maneuver battalion FS network (voice).
 BCT fires cell and battalion or squadron fires cells may also operate on a naval gunfire (voice)
network.
COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIQUES
2-94. Communications operations must take advantage of all techniques to facilitate mission
accomplishment. Communication operational techniques should be considered and employed to enhance
the FA battalion command capability, which may include:
 Remote Transmitters. Using remote transmitters separates the radio frequency emitter from the
command post or from other critical facilities. In addition, remote radios allow transmitters to be
sited for optimum communications while allowing the user to position in locations better suited
to survivability. Remote transmitters also minimize on-site or mutual interference while
dissipating and reducing electronic signature.
 Retransmission. The FA battalion should use retransmission operations to extend the area of
coverage of a specific radio network or to reduce the electronic signature of a position. Reduce
radio frequency power output by the use of a retransmission site at the command post or other
location. Double overall, network ranges by the effective use of retransmission. Terrain and
obstacles restrict the transmitting distances of frequency modulation and very high frequency
transmissions. The positioning of radio equipment is often critical. Techniques for using
frequency modulation retransmission include:
 Conduct a map reconnaissance of the area of operations. The S-6, S-2, and S-3 should
discuss retransmission operations during the planning phase.
 Analyze the terrain for optimum communications; use the digital terrain tools to assist in
this analysis.
 Select primary and alternate locations for retransmission. Consider accessibility, security,
and logistical support.
 Arrange the timetable for site occupation and network operation.
 Train operators on retransmission procedures.
 Ensure users are aware of the tactical situation and how retransmission works.
 Program additional key and delay time to allow radios to key up before transmitting.
 Plan to use a nearby firing platoon, battery, FIST, or supported higher HQ fires cell to relay
messages. This capability is useful when direct communication with an element is not
possible. Relay addressing should be established per tactical standard operating procedure
or as identified in the signal operating instructions.
 Antenna Multiplexers. Using antenna multiplexers reduces the number of ground plane
antennas required to operate multiple radios. The time required to align and tune these devices is
considerably less than the time required to install multiple antennas. However, multiplexers also
have several disadvantages, to include reduced communications range and significantly
increased bit error rate for digital traffic. Note: the rate will vary for different frequencies.
 Directional Antennas. Directional antennas reduce electronic signature in two directions while
extending the range of the radio along the long axis of the antenna. Use directional antennas in
single-channel mode, not frequency-hopping mode.
2-95. A robust digital and voice communications network that can transmit over an extended range is
essential for successful operations. Interrupted communications include, obstructions to line of sight, other
systems operating in the same electromagnetic spectrum, atmospheric conditions, and enemy electronic
attack. Planning communications is increasingly complex and requires participation by every staff member,
not just the S-6. Planning should include at a minimum:
2-16 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Include a detailed communications line of sight analysis (digital terrain tools or a

communications modified combined obstacle overlay).
 Provide for alternate means of communications.
 Ensure subordinates understand the commander’s intent so that they know what to do if
communications are lost.
 Plan communications architectures in detail, including the use of retransmission, digital network
linkages, and command post placement.
 Develop and distribute an overlay that depicts retransmission, digital network links, and
command nodes in the brigade’s area of operations. This communication overlay enables
communications node and terrain management deconfliction, prevents fratricide, and provides
for an increase in communication efficiency by reducing communications signature, profile, and
request for information.
 Define the initial task organization and expected changes to establish and maintain the tactical
internet.
 Follow proper signal and communications security procedures.
 Keep digital orders, overlays, and messages concise to avoid overloading the tactical internet
and digital systems.
 Establish standard operating procedures, for when and what communications will be transmitted
digitally and which will be transmitted by voice.
 Establish alternate communications procedures.
Commercial Lines and Cell Phones

2-96. Use commercial lines when approved by supported higher HQ. Consider securing commercial lines
using devices like the secure telephone unit and limiting classified material sent over non-secure lines and
on cell phones. Threat forces may rely heavily on local communications networks.
Sound and Visual

2-97. Sound and visual signals include pyrotechnics, hand-and-arm, flags, metal-on-metal, and sirens. The
instructions for the use of signals are in the signal operating instructions or the unit standard operating
procedures. Establish signals not included in the signal operating instructions by the use of standard
operating procedures or in the operation order. The battlefield will have many sound and visual cues that
become increasingly important in complex and urban terrain. Commanders and staff planners must
carefully determine how sound and visual signals will be used and authenticated.
Messengers and Liaison Officers

2-98. Use messengers between the command posts, BSB, and higher and lower HQ in the event of
communications failures or enemy jamming. Send liaisons to supported higher HQ to speed the passage of
information between command posts. The use of liaison officers becomes increasingly important as
digitally equipped units operate with non-digitally equipped units. The liaison officers provide access to the
digital common operational picture.
Frequency Modulation (voice) Communications

2-99. The FA battalion should not rely on digital communications alone. Digitization does not eliminate
the requirement for maps and voice communications. Digitized systems facilitate collaborative planning
and rapid dissemination of plans and orders. The FA battalion commander and staff must learn to use the
automation systems extensively during the planning and preparation phase of any operation.
2-100. Whether to use voice or digital means for communication is a function of the situation and
standard operating procedures. Even though both systems are critical for effective command at all levels,
voice may be the primary method for control.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-17

Chapter 2
2-101. Voice radio remains the primary means of communications after crossing the line of departure
because it is more responsive, multiple stations can monitor the network, and parties convey emotion
during the transmission, which is a critical tool in assessing and understanding the battlefield situation.
2-102. Voice is the primary method of communications when maneuver elements are in contact and time
is a critical factor. The FA battalion commander and staff must remain sensitive to the difficulty and danger
of using digital systems when units are moving or in contact and not expect digital reports under those
conditions. The FA battalion commander and staff must continue to update digital databases and common
operational picture. Use digital systems for reporting combat information when not in direct fire contact.
Company and troop command posts serve as the critical link in turning the voice reports received by units
in contact into the digital reports that generate the common operational picture on the FBCB2 system.
Other general guidelines may include:
 Report initial contact at any echelon within the brigade on voice, as this alerts the network that a
digital threat spot report will follow as soon as possible.
 Use voice for elements on the move (not in command posts), unless they can stop and generate a
digital message or report.
 Initiate emergency logistical requests, especially casualty evacuation requests, on voice with a
follow-up digital report if possible.
 Transmit threat spot reports for reconnaissance elements moving or in contact on voice; their
supported higher HQ should convert voice reports into digital spot reports to generate situational
understanding.
 Submit calls for fire on targets of opportunity digitally or by voice.
 Submit digital planned calls for fire from FIST in the initial part of an engagement.
 Submit digital routine logistics reports and requests.
 Submit digital routine reports prior to and following combat.
 Submit digital orders, plans, and graphics, accompanied by a voice call to alert recipients that
they have critical information. Additionally, the transmitting element should request a verbal
acknowledgement of both receipt and understanding of the transmitted information by an
appropriate Soldier.
 Submit voice obstacle and CBRN reports followed by digital reports to generate a geo-
referenced situational understanding message portraying the obstacle or contaminated area
across the network.
2-18 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Chapter 3
Field Artillery Battalion Planning
Planning helps commanders create and communicate a common vision among
commanders, their staffs, subordinate commanders, and unified action partners.
Planning results in a plan and orders that synchronize the action of forces in time,
space, and purpose to achieve objectives and accomplish missions. The primary
planning methodology used by FA battalions is the MDMP. This chapter has three
sections. Section I provides an overview of the MDMP and provides considerations
for the FA BN. Section II discusses intelligence preparation of the battlefield and as
it applies to the FA battalion. Section III addresses FA battalion rehearsals.
SECTION I – THE MILITARY DECISIONMAKING PROCESS

3-1. The FA battalion commander and staff use the MDMP to guide their planning. They must tailor the
MDMP to fit the tactical situation and the battalion’s mission. The FA battalion integrates the battalion’s
planning process with the brigade’s planning process. This includes development of the brigade operation
plan or operation order, unit airspace plan, FS plan, and supporting FA battalion operation order.
3-2. For more information on the MDMP, see ADRP 5-0 and FM 6-0.
3-3. Table 3-1 provides an overview of how the FA battalion uses the MDMP for planning.
Table 3-1. Field artillery battalion planning process (example)
Chapter 4STEP Chapter 5INPUTS Chapter 6ACTIONS Chapter 7OUTPUTS

Receipt of •Higher HQ warning •Evaluate higher HQ information •Initial FA task list.
Mission order or operation – mission and task guidance •Initial running
order, FS plan, and focus. estimates & briefs to
unit airspace plan (if •Initiate running estimates, FS, FA battalion
prepared) FA operations, intelligence and commander.
• FA Battalion target acquisition, mission •Draft commander’s
Operation Order or command, sustainment, and data critical information
FA support plan (if collection. requirements and
prepared). •Identify draft commander’s requests for
•Available or critical information requirements. information.
updated internal •Conduct time analysis. •Initial timeline for
and external data. MDMP and rehearsals.
•Initial commander’s
guidance
•Warning order.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 3-1

Chapter 3
Table 3-1. Field artillery battalion planning process (example) continued
Mission •Higher HQ (BCT, •Understand 2 higher HQ •Updated running

Analysis DIVARTY, FAB) maneuver orders, FS plans and estimates.
operation order, FS FA support plans. -Facts and
plan, FA support •Identify specified and implied assumptions.
plan, and unit tasks. -Constraints and
airspace plan (if •Identify commander’s critical restrictions.
prepared). information requirements. -Critical shortage
•Facts and •Organize and analyze facts. lists.
assumptions from
•Translate facts and status of FS, -Artillery-focused
higher, lower,
FA, and target acquisition assets intelligence preparation
supported,
into capabilities, limitations, and of the battlefield
supporting, and
constraints. products (for example,
adjacent elements,
•Analyze effects of intelligence modified combined
to include fires cells.
preparation of the battlefield on - obstacle overlay,
•Intelligence situation templates, and
FA and target acquisition.
preparation of the enemy courses of
battlefield products •Develop draft FA support tasks.
action).
(such as, modified •Refine running estimates, FA,
operations, intelligence, target -Commander’s
combined obstacle
acquisition, mission command, critical information
overlay, situation
and sustainment. requirements, request
templates).
for information
•Commander’s •Initiate target value analysis.
•Restated mission.
critical information •Identify potential wargaming and
requirements. rehearsal aids (for example, •Specified and implied
models, tables, maps, sketches, tasks.
•Enemy course of
action from S-2. and audio visual equipment). •Approved FA tasks.
•High-value targets •Identify non-combatants to be •Commander’s
by phase or critical protected and critical or cultural guidance and intent.
event. infrastructure to be preserved. •Mission analysis brief.
•Outputs from •Refine rehearsal plan (such as, •Initial movement;
previous step. timelines, communications, mission command;
•Internal and control, and database sustainment; fires (fire
external replies to requirements). control and schedules);
commander’s critical •Develop mission analysis brief. and intelligence,
information surveillance, and
requirements and reconnaissance plans
request for and concepts.
information. •Updated timelines.
•Warning order.
3-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Course of •See outputs from •Develop FA battalion courses of •For each course of
Action previous step. action in synchronization with action developed:
Development •Higher HQ updates BCT, DIVARTY, FAB courses of -Course of action
(BCT, DIVARTY, action. statement and sketch.
FAB). •Identify FS and FA decision -Concept of fires.
•Internal and points and firing unit and fires cell -Draft FS execution
external replies to options. matrix or FA support
commander’s critical •Determine where to find and matrix.
information attack enemy formations -Draft target lists and
requirements and associated with FA tasks. overlay.
requests for •Identify high-payoff targets in -Draft or modified
information. those formations. target synchronization
•Quantify desired effects for FS matrix.
tasks. -Changes and
•Plan decide, detect, deliver, and differences in FS or FA
assess methods for FA tasks to guidance, target
include triggers. selection standards,
•Integrate triggers with BCT, integrated processes,
DIVARTY, FAB course of action. and fire order
•Allocate assets to acquire and standards.
attack. -Basic schedule of
•Develop draft targeting and fire fires requirements.
plans products. -Information
Course of •Identify FA and target acquisition collection plan
Action position areas, routes, differences.
Analysis movements, and timing options. •Refined modified
Wargaming •Identify FA trains and combined obstacle
sustainment options (such as, overlay & situation
ammo distribution and resupply template.
options). •Wargaming aids (for
•Use battle calculus to test example, charts,
feasibility. sketches, overlays,
•Refine intelligence, surveillance, handouts, models, and
and reconnaissance plan. audiovisual
requirements).
• Define airspace requirements,
and any desired FSCMs and • FSCMs for fires
ACMs. planning files, and
ACMs for UAPs
Develop control measures to
supporting each COA.
safeguard non-combatants and
critical or cultural infrastructure.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 3-3

Chapter 3
Course of •See outputs from •Targeting decisions: finalize high- •Course of action
Action previous step. payoff target list and target decision matrix.
Analysis and synchronization matrix. •Refined modified
Comparison •Wargame the FA battalion course combined obstacle
of action and operation plan or overlay and situation
operation order versus enemy template.
courses of action. •Detailed task
•Supported BCT course of action organization.
and integrated FS plan(s) versus •Refined running
enemy courses of action. estimates.
•Modify or refine inputs, as •Refined risk estimate.
required. •Refined commander’s
•Test and refine BCT FS plan or critical information
FA battalion operation plan or requirements and
order. request for information.
•Finalize running estimates, FS,
FA operations, mission command, Final Drafts:
intelligence, target acquisition, and •Fires paragraph BCT
sustainment. operation plan and FS
•Finalize and coordinate draft plan.
target lists, schedules of fires, and •FS plan and annex:
schedules of targets.
-FS execution matrix.
•Refine and finalize commander’s
-Target list and
critical information requirements.
overlay.
•Prepare or modify draft FA -Target
support plan or FS plan. synchronization matrix
• Finalize airspace requirements or modified target
and associated ACMs for each synchronization matrix.
COA. -High-payoff target
list, attack guidance
matrix, and target
selection standards.
•BCT FA support plan
or FA battalion
operation plan or order:
-FA support matrix
-Fires schedules
-Radar deployment
order and information
collection plan
• Finalize FSCMs for
fires planning files, and
ACMs for Unified Action
Partners supporting
each COA.
3-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Course of •See outputs from •Conduct BCT, DIVARTY, FAB, or •Approved or modified
Action previous step. FA battalion approval briefing. FA battalion courses of
Approval •FSCOORD presents analysis to action.
brigade commander as part of •Commander or
staff. executive officer issues
•FA battalion executive officer or FA battalion operation
operations officer presents plan or order in
analysis to FA battalion conjunction with BCT
commander. operation plan or
•BCT FS plan or FA battalion operation order and FS
operation plan or order briefed as plan.
part of each course of action. •FA battalion guidance
•Brigade, DIVARTY, FAB, or FA (for example, format,
battalion commanders direct coordination,
changes and approve courses of addressees, and
action as required. timelines).
•FA battalion staff and
FS back briefs.
Issue final rehearsal
guidance and
information.
•Issue warning order,
as required.
Orders •See outputs from •Finalize staff and other inputs •Issue FA battalion
Production previous step. and products. operation plan or
Dissemination •Gather inputs, prepare and operation order in
and quality check final FA and FS conjunction with BCT
Transition products. operation order and FS
•Verify receipt and understanding. plan.
•Gather and evaluate lower and •Disseminate post-
higher feedback and rehearsal production changes and
results. updates via warning
orders and fragmentary
•Recommend post-production
orders.
changes and updates, as
necessary based on rehearsal
results, feedback, and changes to
the commander for decisions.
•Prepare modified products,
warning orders, and fragmentary
orders to reflect changes and
commander decisions.
ACM – airspace coordinating measure, BCT- brigade combat team, COA - course of action,
DIVARTY – division artillery, FA - field artillery, FAB – field artillery brigade, FS – fire support,
FSCOORD - fire support coordinator, HQ – headquarters, MDMP – military decisionmaking process
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 3-5

Chapter 3
SECTION II – INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION OF THE BATTLEFIELD

CONDUCTED BY A FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION
3-4. The FA battalion S-2 must expand the supported higher HQ intelligence preparation of the battlefield
products, particularly the threat data, to focus on survivability and mobility issues for the FA battalion. The
S-2 must answer, “How can the threat and terrain affect my unit?”
STEPS IN THE INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION OF THE

BATTLEFIELD PROCESS
3-5. The FA battalion must focus on the following steps when conducting intelligence preparation of the
battlefield. For more information on intelligence preparation of the battlefield, see ATP 2-01.3.
DEFINE THE OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

3-6. The FA battalion S-2, together with the commander and S-3, review the identified area of operations
and area of interest to determine any recommended changes are necessary based on the battalion’s mission.
The area of operations and area of interest focus the S-2’s efforts, information collection, and the
development of the radar deployment order.
DESCRIBE THE ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS

3-7. This step includes weather analysis; modified combined obstacle overlay; observation, cover,
concealment; avenues of approach, obstacles, key terrain; and FA specific considerations. The supported
higher HQ normally provides the products that describe the battlefield effects. Refined products by the S-2
accurately reflect the battalion’s area of operations and area of interest. The defining product in this step is
the modified combined obstacle overlay. It is a graphic depiction of an in-depth study of the battlefield area
incorporating terrain and weather. Refinement of the modified combined obstacle overlay must include
analyzing terrain from a FA perspective, determining inter-visibility lines, identifying avenues of approach
and potential position areas, and identifying key and decisive terrain.
EVALUATE THE THREAT

3-8. The FA battalion S-2 analyzes threat templates that accurately portray how enemy forces execute
their operations and how they react to current conditions. The FA battalion S-2 determines which enemy
capabilities may significantly affect friendly FA operations. Use common source data or other
governmental agencies to develop a template if a doctrinal template is not available. The use of doctrinal
templates that show how enemy doctrine dictates their tactical approach without terrain and weather
constraints assist in providing answers to important FA questions, for example:
 What are the high-value targets for the enemy forces?
 What means of FS will the enemy use based on friendly maneuver force actions?
 Can the enemy FA and mortars range friendly forces with conventional and rocket-assisted
projectiles?
 Where will enemy FA, mortar units, electronic intelligence, and counterfire acquisition assets
position and reposition?
 At what point will the enemy firing units need to resupply, and how are they being resupplied?
 What is the enemy threat in friendly brigade support areas?
 Doctrinally, where will the enemy emplace persistent and non-persistent CBRN obstacles and
mine fields?
DETERMINE THREAT COURSES OF ACTION

3-9. Concurrent with the development of friendly courses of action by the FA battalion staff, the S-2
analyzes the situational template and event template. The S-2 will usually receive the supported higher HQ
situation templates. Normally, the situation templates do not address the concerns of the FA battalion. The
3-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

S-2 should refine them to focus on specific FA issues, including enemy indirect fire systems and units
down to the battery level. At a minimum, the S-2 should refine two situation templates. The first is the most
probable threat course of action, and the second is the most dangerous threat course of action.
3-10. The process does not end when the FA battalion S-2 has produced the intelligence preparation of the
battlefield products. The S-2 uses their knowledge of the area of operations and area of interest in
conjunction with intelligence feeds from sources to update the intelligence preparation of the battlefield
products and advise the commander and S-3 on changes to the threat course of action and impacts for the
battalion.
SECTION III – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION REHEARSALS

3-11. Rehearsals are an integral part of the planning process. An effective rehearsal both practices and tests
the plan. The FA battalion staff translates modifications identified during rehearsals into verbal and written
changes to previously published plans, orders, and even standard operating procedures. Time availability is
the critical element in conducting rehearsals.
FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION REHEARSALS

3-12. The following information provides broad guidance and possible techniques. Timeframes mentioned
are rough estimates based on lessons learned, feedback from units, publications, and other published
documents. Actual rehearsal techniques, schedules, and times will vary depending on the situation and unit
standard operating procedure.
CONFIRMATION BRIEFS AND BACK-BRIEFS

3-13. FA battalion commanders, staff, and leaders give and receive confirmation briefs and back briefs.
Commanders and staffs prepare in advance since confirmation briefs often occur immediately after the
briefing or issuing of the operation order. If time is limited, the FA battalion commander may have the
executive officer and S-3 take some of the briefings from subordinate leaders. A supported higher HQ may
also use this disseminated briefing technique, however the FA battalion commander should try to give his
briefing to the supported maneuver commander whenever possible.
COMBINED ARMS REHEARSALS

3-14. The supported higher HQ commander, the type of rehearsal, and the technique used will determine
the extent of the FA battalion’s involvement in a combined arms rehearsal. At a minimum, selected
personnel from the battalion command post will participate in the combined arms rehearsal. When time is
limited, the FA battalion may integrate some of its support rehearsals into the combined arms rehearsal.
However, this should not interfere with the rehearsal. The battalion should rehearse critical tasks prior to
the combined arms rehearsals.
FIRE SUPPORT REHEARSALS

3-15. Fire support rehearsals verify synchronization of the FS plan with the scheme of maneuver. They
focus on the execution of FS tasks and the FS execution matrix, the effectiveness of FS coordination and
airspace coordinating measures, and the timing and synchronization of FS efforts. FS rehearsals rehearse
FS tasks (including FA tasks) or when time is limited, the ones limited as designated by the maneuver
commander. Use this rehearsal prior to the combined arms rehearsal, as a preparation tool, or after the
combined arms rehearsal, to reinforce previous rehearsals, or to address weaknesses and changes identified
during the rehearsal. This small-scale rehearsal focuses on the functioning of the FS chain. Preparing for
other rehearsals, when time is limited, or to reinforce training units use these rehearsals.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 3-7

Chapter 3
FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICAL REHEARSALS

3-16. Tactical rehearsals ensure the FA battalion operation plan or operation order properly plan and
synchronize FA tactical fire control, movement, and key sustainment operations. FA tactical rehearsals
focus on areas, to include:
 Tactical execution of FA fire support tasks, the FA support matrix, schedules of fires, and
schedules of targets – primary and backup methods.
 Tactical fire control and mission routing procedures.
 Clearance of fires requirements and procedures.
 Commander’s attack criteria and priority of fires considerations.
 Effectiveness of FA movement and positioning plans, primary and alternate, for firing, control,
and sustainment elements.
 Targeting, counterfire, and SEAD operations.
 Mutual support and continuity operations.
 Communications requirements – use and positioning of retransmission equipment, use of voice
versus digital.
 Survey requirements.
 Timing and synchronization of FA efforts with maneuver and airspace operations.
 Enemy prisoner of war procedures.
 Meteorological requirements.
 Resupply triggers, especially for low-density munitions.
FIELD ARTILLERY TECHNICAL REHEARSALS

3-17. FA technical rehearsals ensure that the supported higher HQ FS plan and FA battalion operation plan
or operation order properly addresses FA technical fire direction and to exercise the technical fire direction
process. FA technical rehearsals focus on areas, to include:
 Technical execution of FA tasks and the FA support matrix – digital links and primary and
backup methods (for example, FDC). Rehearsal of backups includes evaluation of reactions to
catastrophic loss of a FDC (battalion or battery) and loss of digital or voice capability.
 Integration of tactical and technical fire control processes and computation of firing solutions, to
include the communication and interaction among the fires cells, fire direction, and firing
elements.
 Identification of technical fire direction issues – high-angle fire, minimum safe distance, target,
ammunition, range, FSCM and ACM conflicts.
 Digital database verification – setup, communications, positions, FSCMs, ACMs, target and
attack guidance, mission routing and intervention points, target list, and scheduling data.
 Digital continuity of operations – actions for minor and catastrophic failure.
 Digital interface requirements –fire direction system, AFATDS version differences, and any
other digital systems to include the tactical air integration system.
 Integration of voice and digital operations, to include backup plans.
FIELD ARTILLERY SUSTAINMENT REHEARSALS

3-18. Sustainment rehearsals verify and reinforce FA sustainment planning and synchronization, and
ensure that the FA battalion operation plan or operation order and FA support matrix, address sustainment
tasks. FA sustainment rehearsals focus on areas, to include:
 Sustainment required for execution of FA tasks and the FA support matrix.
 Positioning and movement of the battalion trains.
 Ammunition distribution, positioning, expenditure, and resupply.
 Maintenance and recovery operations.
 Refueling and resupply requirements.
3-8 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Medical treatment and evacuation procedures.

 Contaminated routes, and decontamination sites.
 Water requirements.
INTEGRATED REHEARSALS
3-19. Units may integrate fires and FA tactical, technical, and sustainment rehearsals to maximize use of
limited time. The commander will determine the amount of focus placed on each major area of the
integrated rehearsal, to include at a minimum:
 FS task planning.
 High-payoff target (for example, number, location, purpose, and priority).
 Primary and alternate triggers, observers, and sensors.
 Unit that will deliver fires.
 Attack guidance (for example, shell-fuze combination, number of volleys, and units to fire).
 Method of engagement (for example, time on target, at my command, or when ready).
 Time-space relationship between unit response time, duration of fires, and scheme of
maneuver.
 Mission thread from the observer or sensor to the firing unit for each task.
 Primary and backup digital communication links (for example, supported unit, observers
[ground and air], fires cells, FDCs, howitzers, radars, and intelligence assets).
 Correct solution.
 Attack methods (for example, shell, fuze, and unit).
 Intervention points in automated FS systems.
 Correct function of mission routing information.
 Coordination and deconfliction of targets, as required.
 Key actions that support each phase.
 Movement requirements, especially the trigger events that initiate moves and their
relationship with FS tasks (for example, survivability move criteria).
 Time-space relationships between FS tasks and movements to ensure units are in position to
mass during critical periods and verify the terrain management plan.
 Logistic requirements, especially critical sustainment tasks.
 FSCMs, ACMs, and coordination requirements for critical targets.
 Priority of fires during each phase.
 Digital database.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 3-9

Chapter 4
Detect and Locate Surface Targets
The detect function of the decide, detect, deliver, and assess targeting D3A
methodology translates target priorities developed during the MDMP into
information collection and target acquisition tasking contained in the operation plan
or operation order and its annexes. The S-2 is the primary staff section directing the
effort to locate and identify high-payoff targets. The S-2 overseas this effort and
directs the tasking of acquisition assets against appropriate targets. Artillery and
mortar weapons locating radars are organic to the FA battalion. Information
collection and target acquisition assets internal or external to the FA battalion may
acquire targets engaged by the FA battalion. Section I begins with a summary
description of support from information collection and target acquisition assets
external to the FA battalion. Section II describes support to the detect function
provided by weapons locating radars organic to the FA battalion.
SECTION I – INFORMATION COLLECTION AND TARGET ACQUISITION

4-1. Information collection and target acquisition are critical aspects of detecting and locating surface
targets. Details of information collection and external target acquisition assets follow.
INFORMATION COLLECTION
4-2. Artillery target intelligence can come from many sources, which may include:
 Direct observation by special operations forces, scouts, and forward observers.
 Electronic intelligence sources such as radio frequency intercept systems.
 Human intelligence sources.
 Weapons locating radars.
 Unmanned aircraft systems.
 Higher HQ and joint sources.
 Maneuver formations down through the squad level.
4-3. The S-2 is the staff representative responsible for directing the collection management effort to detect
high-payoff targets accurately enough to engage them, as identified in the decide function. The detect
function primarily entails execution of the supported higher HQ information collection plan. The brigade
has an S-2 element at the brigade and at each subordinate battalion HQ including the FA battalion
4-4. FA battalion FS coordination and observation entities located with the supported unit play a
significant role in the detect function, to include:
 BCT fires Cell. The fires cell is the BCT command post functional cell responsible for the
collective and coordinated use of army indirect fires and joint fires (including electronic attack).
fires cell capabilities include:
 Planning, integrating, and synchronizing lethal FS into the BCT operations.
 Integration of available nonlethal capabilities into targeting.
 Managing counterfire operations.
 Battalion or Squadron Fires Cell. Fires cells provide a FS coordination capability for the
maneuver battalion, cavalry squadron, and brigade engineer battalion. The brigade engineer
battalion once fielded will replace the brigade special troops battalion. The fires cell assists the
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 4-1

Chapter 4
battalion or squadron in executing its portion of the BCT’s scheme of fires. Through its
AFATDS, the fires cell provides the company FIST digital linkage to the battalion or squadron
mortars as well as the FA battalion and FS assets available at higher levels.
 Company and troop Fire Support Teams. FIST provide the maneuver companies or troops with
FS coordination, targeting, terminal control, and combat and effects assessments capabilities.
Each battalion fires cell has subordinate FIST that support each maneuver company and cavalry
troop. The FIST typically operates from a FS vehicle possessing a target acquisition and
communications suite with the capability to designate for laser-guided munitions. The battalion
commander can direct that FIST be task organized within the battalion or squadron based on
mission variables of METT-TC and employed according to an observation plan where they can
best acquire targets in support of the operation.
 Joint Fires Observer. A joint fires observer is a trained service member who can request, adjust,
and control surface-to-surface fires, provide targeting information in support of type 2 and 3
close air support terminal attack controls, and perform autonomous terminal guidance
operations. The capability to have terminal attack control down to maneuver company level is an
Army requirement. The Army joint fires observer requirement is 1 joint fires observer per
maneuver platoon. Personnel trained as a joint fires observer may be assigned or selected for
duty, to include:
 Company FSO.
 Company FS noncommissioned officer.
 Platoon forward observer.
 Member of a scout or reconnaissance organization.
4-5. Platoon forward observers. Forward observers are assigned to the FIST supporting each infantry
company. Equipped with target acquisition devices to accurately locate targets and communications
necessary to forward targets to AFATDS, the forward observers are the primary observers in the
companies. They are normally collocated with the platoon leaders. They provide target refinement, execute
planned fires, and request fires for their supported platoons. The forward observer may direct close air
support in emergencies where joint terminal attack controller personnel are not available.
EXTERNAL TARGET ACQUISITION CAPABILITIES

4-6. The military intelligence company consists of a HQ element, an analysis and integration platoon, a
multisensor ground platoon, and a tactical UAS platoon. The company provides analysis and integration
support to the BCT S-2 section and has the additional capability to coordinate and execute tactical human
intelligence operations. The military intelligence company usually has an attached United States Air Force
weather section. In all actions, the brigade commander’s critical information requirements drive the
information collection effort.
4-7. The BCT cavalry squadron has a HQ troop and three cavalry troops. The troop organization allows
for scout teaming; has small UAS in each troop; and a fires cell in the HQ and HQ company, which
includes a joint tactical air control party.
4-8. Selected other information collection capabilities include:
 A CBRN reconnaissance platoon in the brigade engineer battalion.
 A military police platoon, which consists of a HQ section and three military police squads in the
brigade engineer battalion.
 A civil affairs company, which consists of a civil military operations center, a civil liaison team,
and 4 to 6 civil affairs teams, uses a number of methods to assess the civil component of the
supported commander’s AO. The civil affairs core task of civil information management is a
process whereby civil information is collected, collated, processed, analyzed, produced and
disseminated. It is integrated with the common operational picture and briefed at updates.
 Infrastructure reconnaissance is a multidiscipline variant of reconnaissance to collect technical
information on various categories of the public systems, services, and facilities of a country or
region. This task may take the form of either an assessment or a survey and develops the
4-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

situational understanding of the local capability to support the infrastructure requirements of the
local populace and military operations within a specific area (see FM 3-34.170).
 Each maneuver battalion has a scout platoon consisting of three scout sections. The BCT may
recommend tasking a specific requirement to a subordinate units scout platoon, but normally
tasks the subordinate battalion for the requirements and lets the maneuver battalion commander
allocate resources internal to his organization.
 The long-range advanced scout surveillance system found in the cavalry squadron and battalion
scout platoons enables scouts to operate well outside the range of currently fielded threat direct
fire and sensor systems. The system’s line-of-sight, multi-sensor suite provides real time target
detection, recognition and identification capability with 24-hour and adverse weather operation.
The system also determines and can export far-target location coordinates. It can be mounted or
dismounted. The system consists of a second-generation forward-looking infrared with long-
range optics, an eye safe laser rangefinder, a day video camera, and global positioning system
with attitude determination.
 BCT UAS are capable of locating and recognizing major enemy forces, moving vehicles,
weapons systems, and other targets that contrast with their surroundings. In addition, UAS are
capable of locating and confirming the position of friendly forces, or the presence of
noncombatants. UAS perform reconnaissance, security, target acquisition, or battle damage
assessment. UAS sections are organic throughout the BCT. These UASs provide real time
imagery to the command post for analysis and retransmission over digital systems. The Raven is
organic to the specific company or troops of the battalions and the Shadow is organic to the
military intelligence company. One use of the Raven is for advanced party operations when
conducting reconnaissance selection and occupation of the position.
4-9. The RQ-11 Raven (figure 4-1) is typical of an unmanned aircraft system at echelons of brigade and
below and is characterized by close range (8-12 kilometers [km]), short duration missions (60-90 minutes)
operating below the coordinating altitude and thoroughly integrating with the ground forces normally in a
direct support role.
Figure 4-1. RQ-11 Raven aircraft and coverage (example)

4-10. For more information on UAS characteristics and employment, see FM 3-04.155.
4-11. Employ Air Force joint terminal attack controllers forward with each maneuver company and task
organize and position where they can best support the operation.
4-12. The cavalry squadron employs three cavalry troops and additional assets provided by the corps,
division, or the BCT. The BCT fires cell works closely with the cavalry squadron fires cell to integrate FA
support into the operation.
4-13. Each cavalry troop and maneuver company is typically provided a FIST with the capability to laser
designate targets for precision-guided artillery and joint munitions. The FIST performs FS tasks in support
of troop operations, aiding in the employment of supporting mortars and close air support. Specify
supporting FA fires allocated to cavalry squadron operations in FS tasks that were identified in top-down
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 4-3

Chapter 4
fire planning. Integrate this support into cavalry squadron operations as part of the scheme of fires for BCT
operations with specific synchronization instructions reflected in the appropriate attack guidance matrix.
4-14. Initiate the employment of the BCT fires during cavalry squadron operations through a variety of
sensor cues resulting from deliberate and incidental contacts. The cavalry squadron has numerous sensors
available for executing its information collection mission. Tactical UAS, ground sensors, and
counterintelligence personnel available to the commander to augment his internal assets. The squadron
commander can also request external assets available to him from Army forces, joint, and national levels as
well.
4-15. Every system or combination of systems employed by the cavalry squadron is capable of reporting
the presence of the enemy and therefore is a source for the initiation of FS. In many cases, the accuracy in
target location of an initial contact may not be sufficient to generate an immediate fire mission or other
tactical response. The BCT fires cell must be aware of this and ensure its targeting elements work closely
with the cavalry squadron fires cell to see that minimum target selection standards are met or cross-cue
other sensors to gain an accurate target location.
4-16. During the counterfire fight, counter-reconnaissance fight, or the close fight the FA battalion should
be the primary recipient of direct sensor inputs. This allows the FA battalion to fully exploit the AFATDS
digital architecture to provide timely and responsive FS. The BCT fires cell must constantly monitor
execution of current operations and consider the full range of both lethal and nonlethal attack options to
meet the commander’s guidance in achieving desired effects on enemy formations or capabilities.
SECTION II – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION TARGET ACQUISITION

4-17. This section on field artillery battalion target acquisition consists of an overview, radar employment,
which includes radar zone management, radar cueing, radar movement, and radar tasking. Details on this
information follows.
OVERVIEW
4-18. Sound tactical planning effectively covers the supported higher HQ area of operations with target
acquisition assets. Conduct target acquisition planning at tactical levels of the supported higher HQ as an
integral part of the MDMP. This fully integrates target acquisition assets into combined arms operations.
The FA battalion HQ is responsible for employing its organic target acquisition assets in accordance with
the supported higher HQ operational plan.
4-19. The goal of the target acquisition effort is to provide timely and accurate information to enable the
attack of specified targets. Target acquisition systems and equipment perform the key tasks of target
detection, location, tracking, identification, and classification.
4-20. The FA battalion S-2, with the counterfire operations section, assesses weapons locating radar
acquisitions and information collection reports to support targeting. The FA battalion uses this focused
intelligence in the development and execution of counterfire.
4-21. UAS support to the FA battalion enhances the battalion’s capability to conduct close support fires,
counterfire, and SEAD operations. The brigade commander may direct attachment of a UAS mission
planning and control section to the target acquisition platoon of the FA battalion. The mission planning and
control section consists of a ground control station and associated personnel and supporting equipment. The
mission planning and control section receives the mission, plans and controls the aircraft, and reports
information. The FA battalion S-3, S-2, and targeting officer will provide the mission planning and control
section with the information required to plan and execute the UAS mission. UAS supporting the FA
battalion contribute to the overall information collection and target acquisition picture. Primarily task the
UAS for FA battalion target acquisition and battle damage assessment. The FA battalion supported by a
UAS has enhanced ability to:
 Acquire and locate enemy strike assets to facilitate counterfire.
 Acquire and transmit target data to support the attack of high-payoff targets and targets of
opportunity.
4-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Provide target designation.

 Provide surveillance.
 Provide battle damage assessment.
4-22. Access to a UAS by the FA battalion allows the supported higher HQ reconnaissance elements to
concentrate on collecting combat information while FS personnel directing the UAS provide support with
target acquisition, fires, and battle damage assessment.
4-23. The target acquisition platoon organic to the FA battalion provides acquisition of threat mortar,
artillery, and rocket systems to enable counterfire operations, and generate artillery target intelligence. The
platoon consists of a counterfire operations section, a survey section, and a mix of AN/TPQ-36, AN/TPQ-
37, and AN/TPQ-50 weapons locating radars depending upon the type of BCT. Once fielding is complete,
all target acquisition platoons will consist of two AN/TPQ-53 radars and four ANTPQ-50 weapons locating
radars. The platoon deploys in whole or part within tailored force packages. Once in theater, the FA
battalion controls the employment of the platoon and any additional weapons locating radars attached or
augmenting the supported higher HQ. Weapons locating radars require external assets for security. The
survey section provides common survey for FA firing units and mortars when assets are available.
4-24. The counterfire operations section is responsible for providing responsive and accurate counterfire.
Counterfire operations are both proactive and reactive countermeasures. Both countermeasures serve as a
support multiplier. The counterfire operations section consists of the following personnel—a targeting
officer, the senior FA targeting noncommissioned officer, two targeting noncommissioned officers and two
target-processing specialists. These individuals work together with the battalion intelligence officer and
staff.
4-25. The survey team provides a common grid that will permit the massing of fires, establishes survey
control point as directed, and near stake and far stake data for the WLR for transmission of target data from
one element to another. The survey capabilities consist of an improved position and azimuth determining
system global positioning system team.
4-26. The primary mission of the WLR radars is to detect and locate enemy mortars, artillery, and rockets
quickly and accurately enough to permit immediate engagement. The AN/TPQ-36 locates shorter-ranged,
high-angle, lower velocity weapons such as mortars and shorter-range artillery. The AN/TPQ-37 locates
longer-range, low-angle, higher velocity weapons such as long-range artillery and rockets. The AN/TPQ-53
provides for extended range or the flexibility to do 6400 mil (360 degree) operations. The four organic
AN/TPQ-50 radars can detect mortars over a 6400 mil (360 degree) search sector.
4-27. For additional information on FA WLRs, see ATP 3-09.12.
RADAR EMPLOYMENT
4-28. The FA battalion S-3, S-2, and the target acquisition platoon leader, in coordination with supported
higher HQ and fires cells of supported units, must work closely to ensure effective management of organic,
assigned, or attached radars. Considerations for radar positioning are mission, survivability and security,
survey requirements, communications, movement, orientation, and cueing of radars.
4-29. Mission accomplishment is the primary consideration in selecting a radar position. The secondary
consideration is survivability and security. Radar position selection starts with the FA battalion S-2 and
targeting officer’s terrain analysis. They use the modified combined obstacle overlay, terrabase, radar
positioning analysis system, and the situational template developed and refined by the intelligence section.
They conduct map reconnaissance and select several potential positions. After detailed analysis of these,
they recommend primary, alternate, and supplemental positions to the FA battalion S-3, who accepts,
rejects, or modifies the positions. Key considerations when positioning radars include:
 Does the position support the commander’s intent?
 Where are the enemy’s indirect fire systems, or where will, they most likely be located?
 Where will the enemy focus his indirect fires?
 Can the radar acquire targets throughout the supported force area of operations?
 What are the electronic warfare, ground, and air threats to the radar?
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 4-5

Chapter 4
 Does the position effectively maximize the radar’s range capabilities while simultaneously
minimizing the risk of enemy target acquisition?
 Does the position offer a screening crest?
 What is the track volume and aspect angle?
 Do radar positions complement each other?
 Does the position offer good communications with the FA battalion?
 Does the position consider future operations and movement?
 Where are the radar alternate positions and supplemental positions?
 Where are the positions of other friendly units?
 Is the radar on a high-speed avenue of approach that could potentially make it vulnerable to
rapid advancement by the enemy?
 Avoid possible area for enemy chemical strikes or air assaults?
 Is the route clear of enemy, chemicals, and mines?
 What is the friendly scheme of maneuver?
 What are the emplacement and displacement times for the various radars?
 What are the movement times between the positions?
4-30. When possible, the target acquisition platoon leader or platoon sergeant should reconnoiter the sites
and provide input to the FA battalion S-3. The FA battalion S-3 coordinates the radar’s position(s) with the
supported higher HQ or other supported fires cells and S-3.
RADAR ZONE MANAGEMENT

4-31. Radar zone management involves the use of both sectors of search and various types of zones. The
FA battalion S-3, S-2, targeting officer, target acquisition platoon leader, and the supported higher HQ fires
cells work together to ensure that sectors and zones adequately support the overall force counterfire plan.
Radar Zone Management Planning Sequence

4-32. The FA battalion S-3, S-2, targeting officer, target acquisition platoon leader determine
considerations for successful zone planning to include:
 Prioritize operational sector and scheme of maneuver events for zone planning based on the
commander’s intent and guidance.
 Develop zones during the course of action development and the wargaming process.
 Approve and allocate zones to battalion or squadron fires cells that support the scheme of
maneuver, meet the commander's priorities for protection, and facilitate the engagement of high
payoff targets.
 Develop and assign decision points as triggers for the execution of planned zones.
 Incorporate decision points (triggers) for planned zones and radar movement into the appropriate
decision support template, synchronization and execution matrices, and information collection
plan.
 Ensure nominated zones facilitate the scheme of maneuver.
 Rehearse planned zones (for example, radar movement, zone activation, and counterfire battle
drill) during combined arms, FA technical, and FS rehearsals.
 Refine zones during execution as the intelligence preparation of the battlefield improves or the
supported higher HQ scheme of maneuver changes.
 Develop positioning guidance for the radar that optimizes the probability of acquisition and
supports the coverage of planned zones.
Radar Zone Management Responsibilities

4-33. The FA battalion responsibilities for radar employment and zone management must be established to
focus the planning process and execution. The FA battalion commander is ultimately responsible for
4-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

counterfire and zone management. He relies on the S-3, S-2, and targeting officer for counterfire and zone
management responsibilities. For more information on zone management, see ATP 3-09.12.
RADAR CUEING
4-34. The FA battalion S-2 and the targeting officer will establish cueing guidance to include authorized
agents, communications links, and conditions under which the radar may be cued. Publish the information
in the target acquisition tab in the FA appendix to the supported higher HQ FS plan or FA battalion
operation order. Cueing instructions are listed in the radar deployment order. For additional information on
cueing, see ATP 3-09.12.
RADAR MOVEMENT
4-35. During the wargaming process, the FA battalion S-2 and S-3 decide when they want to try to force
enemy indirect fire weapons to move and when accumulated cueing time can cause radar detection. They
include these events as decision points on the decision support template. The S-2 or targeting officer moves
the radar based on factors of METT-TC and the radar’s accumulated cueing times. Moving the radar at a
critical time in the battle may cause the supported unit to take heavy losses. When a radar moves, coverage
must be coordinated with other organic, attached, assigned, or reinforcing radars, if available. For more
information, see ATP 3-09.12.
RADAR TASKING
4-36. There are several methods for specifying coverage for radar sections. Specify radar coverage by
using the radar deployment order, the radar execution matrix, and the AFATDS radar deployment order
format. All three methods provide the required information for conducting radar operations. For more on
information on the radar deployment order, see ATP 3-09.12.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 4-7

Chapter 5
Deliver Fires
This chapter focuses on the delivery of fires. The chapter has five sections. Section I
covers the fire mission process, including tactical and technical fire direction, massed
fires, and continuity of operations. Section II discusses various types of special fire
missions. Section III provides information on strike and counterfire. Section IV
discusses FA battalion support for SEAD operations. Section V discusses FA
battalion survey considerations.
SECTION I – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION FIRE MISSION PROCESSING

5-1. FA battalion functions directly associated with surface-to-surface attack encompass the fire mission
process. Fire missions can be initiated by any sensor (for example forward observers, air observers,
weapons locating radars) or fires cell. FA battalions normally do not perform airspace deconfliction;
instead, the brigade fires cell handles the process through connectivity with the brigade air defense and
airspace management and brigade aviation element (ADAMBAE). Unmanned aircraft systems may send
their calls for fire directly to the brigade fires cell when acting under BCT control. Radars and the
counterfire operations section can also work at the brigade level. The FA battalion indirect fire attacks
depends on:
 Accurately locating an appropriate target (target acquisition process).
 Initiating a call for fire into the FS system (the fire request).
 Analyzing the fire mission to determine the proper method of attack (tactical fire direction) in
FA battalion and, sometimes, platoon FDCs.
 Transmitting the call for fire to the selected firing platoon FDC(s) that –
 Transmit the call for fire data to the howitzer capable of technical computations of firing
data or
 Convert the call for fire into fire orders for the howitzers (technical fire direction).
 Delivering the required ordnance on the target (deliver fires).
 Determining and reporting battle damage assessment.
5-2. Whether this process is done manually or through an automated system, the process is the same.
Automating fire control does not change what we do, but how we do it.
5-3. To expedite fires, the unit can coordinate the use of various quickfire linkages, designed to facilitate
rapid-fire mission execution, while achieving desired control. For example, a quickfire channel could be
established from a FIST, through the battalion or squadron fires cell, and then directly to the FA battalion
FDC. For even faster response and more decentralized control, the FIST may send the mission directly to
the FDC that will execute the mission. This is often used for priority targets and final protective fires.
Quickfire channels can be used for any observer or sensor. Any brigade, battalion, squadron fires cell or FA
command post that is normally in the fire mission flow, but is bypassed during quickfire operations, should
receive a notification of each fire mission through message of interest processing.
FIRE MISSION REQUESTS

5-4. The FA battalion digitally plans and executes fires as much as possible. However, the battalion may
receive an immediate fire mission from a wide variety of sources, in both voice and digital formats. Higher
or lower fires cells generate calls for fire. Fires cells and other requestors send fire missions directly from
the requestor to the battalion or the platoon FDC or through several elements in the system.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 5-1

Chapter 5
DIGITAL
5-5. FA and non-FA units send digital fire missions. Procedures and capabilities may vary depending on
which digital systems are interfacing with one another. FA battalion commanders must ensure their units:
 Maintain technical expertise in a rapidly changing hardware and software environment.
 Find digital training opportunities involving digital equipment that the unit does not possess.
 Train to troubleshoot digital communications.
5-6. Aggressively seek out training opportunities. Digital FA technical support rehearsals should
thoroughly address digital interface issues and possibilities. Rehearse digital fire missions along the entire
data link, under the same digital conditions anticipated for the actual operation (for example, extended
communications distances, surge digital traffic capacity, degraded operations, and alternate routes). For FA
battalions this involves significant coordination responsibilities for both FS and FA digital operations.
VOICE
5-7. Use of voice may be necessary for immediate fire requests or during adverse communications
conditions. FDCs must anticipate the circumstances and the types of voice missions they may encounter.
The tactical solution and effects on the target should be essentially the same regardless of whether the
mission is processed voice or digital. Missions from non-FA personnel may require innovative solutions to
coordination, communication, and clearance of fires.
UNTRAINED OBSERVERS
5-8. Occasionally the FA battalion may need to process fire missions from untrained observers. Often
these are critical requests where the requestor is under fire. Practice and rehearse the battle drill for
untrained observers. Identify specific members of the FA battalion and firing battery FDCs as the primary
handlers of untrained observer missions. These personnel should possess good communications skills,
patience combined with a sense of urgency, and the ability to remain calm in stressful situations. Practice
untrained observer missions during major training exercises.
5-9. For more information on untrained observer procedures, see ATP 3-09.30 and FM 6-40.
TACTICAL FIRE DIRECTION

5-10. The FDC primarily performs tactical fire direction. Tactical fire direction is the process that results in
a fire order. A fire order is a FDO decision, made under supervision of the S-3, on whether and how to
attack a target. The FDO considerations include:
 Location of the target –
 Is it cleared to fire?
 Is it within range?
 Can the target be attacked?
 Nature of the target –
 How large is it?
 What is its degree of protection?
 Ammunition available –
 Types of ammunition?
 Quantity of ammunition?
 Are firing units available in range and ready to fire.
 Maneuver commander's guidance and tactical standard operating procedure.
 Request for fire –
 What did the observer ask for?
 Can the FA battalion provide it?
 Should the FA battalion provide it?
5-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Deliver Fires
 Munitions effects –
 Proper ammunition?
 Nature of the target and commander's guidance?
 How should the target be attacked?
 Tactical situation –
 When should the battalion fire?
 Are special instructions required?
 ROE.
 FSCMs and ACMs.
 Collateral damage estimates.
5-11. The objectives of tactical fire direction include:
 Provide continuous, accurate, and responsive fires in all conditions.
 Maintain the ability to engage various targets types over wide frontages.
 Mass the fires of available units.
 Engage a number and variety of targets simultaneously.
5-12. Tactical fire direction is either centralized or decentralized. The AFATDS enables each FDC to
perform tactical fire direction, the FA battalion commander and S-3 must determine the mix of control to
best meet the tactical situation, anticipate changes in control, and train FDCs to quickly adjust control when
warranted.
CENTRALIZED CONTROL
5-13. Consider use of centralized tactical fire control when there are few firing units, when ammunition is
low, during critical operations where the commander needs to exercise control, or when restrictive ROE are
in place. The FA battalion will normally use platoon-based operations, but under maximum centralized
control, the FA battalion may use battery-based operations (for example, each battery designates one FDC
as the battery operations center). Also under maximum centralized control, fires requests will go through
the supported higher HQ fires cells and FA battalion FDCs. AFATDS intervention point rules and guidance
settings are restrictive. Each operations facility halts and reviews most fire missions with only pre-
designated critical missions flowing automatically through the fire control system. The airspace
environment is also likely to be non-permissive, and fires may require clearance for each individual
mission, depending on commander’s guidance, ROE, collateral damage restrictions, execution of close
combat attack or close air support, and other airspace operations.
DECENTRALIZED CONTROL
5-14. Decentralized tactical fire control is used when maximum responsiveness and speed of execution is
necessary. Under decentralized control, the FA battalion will usually use platoon-based operations. Some
degree of decentralized control may be used even when resources are scarce if the brigade commander,
with input from his FSO determines the risks inherent in reduced control are warranted.
5-15. Decentralized control involves the use of data linkages and quickfire channels that may bypass some
or all of the normal intervening operations facilities. Another method is to modify the AFATDS
intervention rules and commander’s guidance so that most missions flow through intervening operations
facilities without stopping. Airspace is likely to have been pre-cleared, or procedural controls established to
provide priority airspace to fires assets, with the commander desiring a more permissive environment and
accepting a somewhat higher risk to airspace conflicts.
5-16. With decentralized control, FA battalion commanders, S-3s, and FDOs must closely monitor
ammunition expenditures and the number of rounds fired from current positions. The potential for
ammunition shortages and forced survivability moves may increase under decentralized control.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 5-3

Chapter 5
QUICKFIRE CHANNELS
5-17. When significantly responsive fires are necessary, a quickfire channel may be established. This may
be a voice or digital link. The quickfire channel establishes a direct link between the sensor and the shooter,
or it may have one or more intervening control elements that evaluate and relay traffic. Quickfire channels
can be established using existing networks, with the only changes being in the actual routing or reporting of
information. Establishment of quickfire channels may also involve the use of alternate networks or
communications methods.
5-18. Quickfire channels uses include:
 Counterfire to link weapons locating radar and a firing unit.
 SEAD to link aircraft, electronic warfare, or information collection assets to a firing unit.
 Immediate suppression to link a FIST or other observer with a designated firing unit.
 Operations to link UAS with firing units.
5-19. Quickfire channel situations may involve supplementing the FA battalion with special
communications equipment or coordinating nonstandard digital communications protocols. The FA
battalion S-6 plays a critical role in identifying and evaluating quickfire channels in support of FA battalion
FS tasks. Wargaming and rehearsals require detailed analysis, as testing of the communications links may
not be possible until during or immediately prior to the event. Requesting lessons learned information from
other units that performed similar operations proves extremely beneficial in identifying potential problems
that are not identified during planning and rehearsal.
AUTOMATED TACTICAL FIRE CONTROL

5-20. AFATDS digitally links the FA battalion internally and externally with supported higher HQ,
subordinate agencies, and adjacent units. The system automates tactical fire direction and planning
functions. AFATDS can process and disseminate information, to include:
 Fire plans.
 Target information.
 Fire missions generated from incoming target intelligence (for example, tactical fire direction).
 FSCMs and other forms of battlefield geometry.
 Ammunition and firing unit data.
 Messages of interest to other operations facilities, to include fire mission airspace coordination
and munition flight path message to the higher HQs tactical air integration system and BAE.
 Meteorological and survey data.
 Operation plans, operation orders, fragmentary orders, running estimates, wargaming, graphics,
and matrices.
 Movement control and logistics management.
5-21. The AFATDS tactical fire control program analyzes nominated targets, selects the method of attack,
reviews available firing units, and selects the optimal firing unit(s) and munitions to engage the target.
After analysis is completed and approved by the FDO through either intervention or pre-established
standards; The tactical fire control program directs the delivery unit to attack the target.
5-22. The first step in providing for tactical fire direction involves establishing setup parameters in the
computer. These parameters, entered prior to operations, consist of the tactical database and commander’s
guidance. Enter much of the general planning data at BCT and FA battalion level or higher. Disseminate
this information downward with some modification at each level. Support Unit locations, ammunition
counts, and other data is input at lower levels and forwarded to supported higher HQ.
5-23. The tactical database consists of geometry, firing units, ammunition, and meteorological information.
The tactical database includes information from unit plans and orders such as the supported maneuver
unit’s area of operations (AFATDS zone of responsibility), FSCMs, ACMs, ammunition status, available
firing units, firing unit locations, and atmospheric conditions. The single, most critical function of the FDC
5-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Deliver Fires
is tactical database management, enabling any FDC to temporarily take tactical control of the FA battalion
and restore critical information to other FDCs.
5-24. The commander’s guidance is simply the translation of the supported higher HQ or other supported
maneuver commander’s concept of the operation and scheme of fires into system language. The guidance
includes information such as attack methods, priority zones, target types, shells, priority of selecting firing
units, and exclusion of any firing units or shells and fuzes. Keep the commander’s guidance current and
accurate because the computer uses it to produce a fire order.
5-25. AFATDS contains information from the joint weapons effectiveness systems concerning the amount
and type of ammunition and the optimum number of units to fire for a particular target. This information
enables the computer to select the best ammunition for a particular target. Commander’s guidance reserves
certain ammunition for future use. It can be used to vary the joint weapons effectiveness systems’ data in
the computer. Once established, the computer implements the criteria without a delay in mission
processing. In urgent situations, the commander's guidance may be manually overridden.
5-26. Based on the brigade commander’s guidance for the different phases of the operation, the FDO,
working with the FA battalion commander and S-3, and the brigade FSO, continually assess and adjust the
AFATDS guidance settings. Changes in the tactical situation may make previously valid assumptions and
guidance inadequate or even dangerously wrong. If anticipated ammunition fails to arrive, firing units are
not available, or if the threat changes, the AFATDS parameters must be adjusted. In a manual environment,
this process is no less important.
5-27. In the automated tactical fire direction process, AFATDS automatically prepares a request for
additional fires whenever the FA battalion and any reinforcing unit cannot provide the volume of fire
specified by the guidance settings. AFATDS automatically forwards requests for additional fires to the
supported higher HQ fires cell and when applicable, to the division or corps fires cell.
TECHNICAL FIRE DIRECTION

5-28. Technical fire direction converts weapon and ammunition characteristics (for example, muzzle
velocities, propellant temperature, and projectile weight), weapon and target locations, and meteorological
information into firing data. Howitzer sections use the results of this process for firing.
5-29. Paladin, M777A2, and M119A3 battalions perform technical fire direction on the howitzer and the
FDC assumes a back-up technical fire direction role. During degraded mode, the FDC will exercise direct
technical control of howitzers.
5-30. In FA battalions with M119A2 howitzers, the howitzers do not possess the capability to compute a
technical solution. Therefore, the FDC exercises direct control and transmits firing solutions to each
howitzer.
5-31. FDCs determine technical fire direction for special missions such as registrations and special
munitions (for example, Excalibur). FDCs maintain a capability to compute technical data manually for
trouble shooting data and in case of loss of automation capability.
MASSED FIRES
5-32. Massing available fires enables the FA battalion to inflict maximum damage on the enemy with a
minimum expenditure of ammunition. Massed fires reduce the vulnerability of the firing unit to the enemy's
target acquisition capabilities. Failure to mass fires may also give the enemy time to react and seek
protection. A clear understanding of the supported higher HQ or other supported maneuver commander's
guidance for fires and accurate AFATDS guidance settings are key to determining how much fires are
enough. Evaluate every mission received and employ sufficient massed fires to achieve the effects required.
5-33. The FA battalion should maintain the maximum feasible degree of centralized control over the firing
systems. Commander's criteria are critical in managing the fires of the battalion. If clear AFATDS guidance
is developed and accurately entered into the automated systems, the computer can assume much of the
burden of sorting the missions as they are received and assign them the appropriate priority.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 5-5

Chapter 5
5-34. Techniques available to the FDO for massing fires is the use of “time-on-target” or, for mobile
targets, use of “at my command” in the fire order. With these techniques, the element of surprise is not lost
since the delivery of fires is controlled. Survivability of firing units is enhanced, because mass fire
techniques require fewer rounds to achieve the desired effects and because massed fires temporarily
saturate enemy target acquisition devices. These two techniques for massing fires, when properly applied
against appropriate targets, can maximize effects.
5-35. A technique to mass fires effectively when more than one battery or platoon is to be fired for effect is
the efficient use of voice communications to execute digital fire orders. By using voice to execute an order,
the battalion FDO can ensure that target(s) are engaged with the required number of firing units in a
synchronized manner. Unit tactical standard operating procedures should address the procedures for both
digital and voice fire orders.
CONTINUITY OF OPERATIONS
5-36. Continuity of operations functions are built into the AFATDS software at the supported higher HQ
fires cell, FA battalion FDC, platoon FDC, and battalion or squadron fires cells for rapid reaction to the loss
of an operational element. This redundancy significantly reduces the need for complex and carefully
orchestrated mutual support unit operations. Once the systems are initialized and the data-sharing paths
established according to the operation, the computers will automatically, without human intervention,
update other systems with which a particular station is sharing information. A loss of any single computer
or group of computers in AFATDS may not have a devastating impact. The AFATDS at each node has the
capability to serve as a backup system for any other node’s AFATDS.
5-37. In addition to continuity of operations, manual means will remain an effective backup. The FA
battalion command post should thoroughly plan and rehearse transfer to manual backup operations.
SECTION II – FIRE MISSIONS REQUIRING SPECIAL CONSIDERATION

5-38. This section provides general information and guidance concerning fire missions that may require
special consideration by a FA battalion. For more information on these missions, from the perspective of
the observer, FDC, or fires cell, see ATP 3-09.30.
IMPROVED CONVENTIONAL MUNITIONS

5-39. The 105-mm and 155-mm howitzers can deliver improved conventional munitions. The types of
improved conventional munitions include antipersonnel and dual-purpose improved conventional
munitions. Anytime improved conventional munitions are fired, a percentage may fail to detonate
depending on the meteorology, environmental, and terrain conditions. Dud rates may increase in adverse
weather and terrain conditions (for example, forests, mountainous areas, rocky or uneven terrain, snow,
surface water, soft sand, marshy terrain, and high winds). Collateral damage and ROE may limit improved
conventional munitions employment.
ILLUMINATION
5-40. The amount of illumination ammunition required for a particular mission depends on the observer-
target distance, the visibility, and the size, width, and depth of the area to be illuminated. The FDC and the
observer must coordinate selection of the proper illumination pattern and controlled rate of fire to maximize
illumination effectiveness with minimal ammunition expenditure. Illumination missions may be lengthy
missions, increasing the firing unit’s vulnerability to enemy acquisition and attack. The FA battalion S-3
should consider directing platoons to fire illumination missions from supplementary positions as much as
possible. During the planning process, the FA battalion S-3 should evaluate fire support tasks requiring
coordinated illumination missions to determine their potential impact on the overall fire plan and on the
priority of fires. Illumination may expose friendly forces to enemy observation. Consider the use of infrared
illumination. Infrared illumination allows illumination of target areas covertly without the glare of a
conventional white-light flare. The empty canister may pose a down-range safety hazard to friendly forces
and noncombatants.
5-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Deliver Fires
SMOKE WHITE PHOSPHOROUS

5-41. The types of smoke projectiles used for FA delivered smoke include hexachloroethane and white
phosphorus (WP). Each has different characteristics and capabilities that must be considered in their
employment. Atmospheric stability, wind direction, and wind speed are the major factors influencing the
effectiveness of smoke. Significant changes in weather conditions require the FA battalion S-3 and FDO to
determine potential impact on FS tasks involving FA battalion delivered smoke (for example, wind,
temperature, humidity and precipitation, terrain, and darkness).
WARNING
Hexachloroethane and WP produce toxic fumes, may start fires,
and the empty canisters may pose a down-range danger to
friendly forces and noncombatants.
SCATTERABLE MINES
5-42. FA scatterable mines, which are currently limited to 155-mm howitzers, give the supported higher
HQ or other supported maneuver commander an all-weather capability to quickly emplace minefields,
which makes them best suited as situational obstacles. There are currently two types of FA delivered
scatterable mines: an area denial artillery munition antipersonnel mine and the remote antiarmor munition
system for use against lightly armored vehicles. Minefield angle, range, and target size all affect the fire
order requirements for effective scatterable mines delivery. Because scatterable mines missions can be
lengthy missions to fire (10-30 minutes), the FA battalion S-3 should consider the time the unit would not
be available to fire other missions and the increased vulnerability of the unit to enemy acquisition and
counterfire. The S-3 should consider protection measures, such as using additional howitzers to decrease
the time, firing the mission from an alternate (possibly hardened) position, or directing a survivability move
after mission completion. The S-3 should consider a safety zone for each minefield.
Note. S-3 should consider ROE when planning a minefield.
EXCALIBUR
5-43. The M982-series Excalibur is a 155-mm extended range, all weather, precision guided projectile
designed for use with 155-mm digitized howitzers. The employment of Excalibur helps reduce collateral
damage. Engaging enemy elements inside urban structures and near non-combatants denies sanctuary to
enemy forces. Unitary precision and steep terminal trajectory offset enemy advantages gained by
occupying compartmentalized complex terrain. As a high explosive projectile (equivalent to the M107), the
unitary maintains lethality sufficient to engage targets common to open terrain. Due to its extremely high
altitude flight path, Excalibur requires significant pre-coordination. Without this coordination, these fires
will require coordination by the Division’s supporting Air Support Operations Center, or joint airspace
command and control nodes, such as the Air Operations Center. For more information on the employment
considerations, capabilities, and options for Excalibur, see TM 9-1320-202-13.
PRECISION GUIDANCE KIT

5-44. The M1156 Precision Guidance Kit (PGK) is an all-weather, near precision, global positioning
system guided fuze for digitized platforms. The PGK is intended for engagement of area targets and other
targets normally engaged with high explosive munitions to correct for inherent ballistic errors. The near
precision capability (≤ 50-meter circular error probable) of the PGK increases the efficiency of the rounds
fired at targets at mid through maximum ranges by reducing the number of rounds required to achieve the
desired effects. The PGK makes small corrections of the ballistic flight path of the projectile to guide it to
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 5-7

Chapter 5
the intended target grid. The user initializes the PGK for guided flight via an electronic portable inductive
artillery fuze setter. The PGK has two fuze modes – point detonating and proximity.
M1130 105MM PREFORMED FRAGMENT

5-45. The M1130 105mm pre-formed fragment munition is a 105mm high explosive projectile for use
against personnel and light armored targets. The round is filled with 9,300 3mm tungsten spheres that
provide enhanced lethality. The pre-formed fragmented cartridge replaces the M760 and M927 cartridges.
DANGER CLOSE
5-46. The term “danger close” is used when friendly troops are within a prescribed distance of the intended
impact of munitions, specifically 600 meters for cannon and mortars and 750 meters for 5” naval gunfire.
In danger close missions the situation, type of ammunition being fired, the number of rounds, method of
fire, Angle T, weather, and terrain conditions must be considered to ensure safe firing. Weather and terrain
can affect certain munitions such as improved conventional munitions, smoke, illumination, and variable
time fuzes. Dry, grassy terrain, spilled fuel, damaged vehicles loaded with ammunition, and wooden
structures all present potential hazards. Mountains, trees, and urban terrain complicate danger close
missions as steep slopes make observer adjustment more difficult to estimate, and crests or buildings can
interfere with firing, stopping rounds or causing variable time fuzes to function early. High-angle fire can
alleviate problems with crests or buildings, but may have greater dispersion (for example, probable error).
Rocky terrain and hard surfaces present increased risk of ricochets, especially with flat trajectories.
Whenever possible, the most accurate weapon system and shell, fuze, and charge combination should be
used for danger close situations. Ground burst smoke or illumination can be used as marker to verify
expected impact, observer, and target locations.
SECTION III – COUNTERFIRE

5-47. Counterfire is not a separate battle, but one aspect of the overall combined arms fight. Integrate and
synchronize the counterfire fight with elements of the maneuver commander’s plan.
5-48. Effective counterfire includes the destruction or neutralization of enemy weapons, to include
electronic warfare weapons such as jammers, target acquisition systems (for example, radars, electronic
warfare systems, and UAS), supporting command and control, communications, transportation, and
sustainment sites. However, the critical aspect in counterfire operations is information management, which
involves two key areas: intelligence or target acquisition, and information processing. Friendly and enemy
intelligence and target acquisition assets compete to find the various parts of each other’s indirect fire
system, analyze the information, decide the most effective method to attack, and disseminate orders to
howitzers, jammers and other attack assets. Accuracy of information and fires, speed, and effectiveness
combine to determine the outcome of the counterfire battle.
RESPONSIBILITIES
5-49. The supported maneuver commander has overall responsibility for the planning and conduct of
counterfire operations as part of his operation. The brigade FSO advises the brigade commander on the
integration of counterfire into operations, the priority of counterfire within the overall operation, and basic
counterfire priorities.
5-50. The FA battalion commander has overall responsibility for the FA battalion’s execution of
counterfire. In the FA battalion, the key counterfire personnel are the FA battalion commander, S-3, FDO,
S-2, targeting officer, target acquisition platoon leader, and liaison officer (from a reinforcing FA battalion,
if available). The brigade commander receives input and recommendations from his organic FA battalion
commander, FSO, S-3, S-2, and other staff officers involved in counterfire operations. The brigade
commander issues decisions and guidance as necessary to direct counterfire efforts, to ensure effective
coordination occurs. Supporting reinforcing, general support, and general support-reinforcing FA units
frequently receive this counterfire guidance through the supported higher HQ or other supported maneuver
HQ.
5-8 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Deliver Fires
5-51. A FA battalion’s counterfire responsibilities will vary dependent on the echelon, tactical mission, and
guidance from the brigade commander. The FA battalion fires acquired counterfire targets or forwards
through fires channels for attack by other FA or non-FA assets. The S-3 and S-2 attempt to locate and
destroy enemy mortars and artillery that pose the greatest threat. Execute counterfire to counter enemy
artillery and mortar systems before they can inflict significant damage.
FIELD ARTILLERY ROLE IN COUNTERFIRE

5-52. The FA battalion usually plans counterfire within the supported higher HQ area of operations. If
circumstances dictate give, most of the counterfire fight to a reinforcing unit. The supported higher HQ has
specific counterfire responsibilities, to include as required:
 Supporting the commander’s protection priorities. State these priorities in terms of what assets,
functions, and positions are critical to the supported higher HQ mission.
 Development, dissemination, and management of intelligence and order of battle information on
the enemy’s indirect fire system, including systems in the maneuver unit’s area of operations, as
well as any within its area of interest that can impact the maneuver unit’s mission to include:
 Indirect fire weapon systems (for example, mortars, cannons, rocket, and missile launchers).
 Target acquisition assets (for example, observers, radars, sound and flash systems, and
electronic intelligence).
 Control elements relevant to counterfire operations.
 Enemy indirect fire tactics.
 Enemy counterfire tactics (for example, use of lethal and nonlethal assets against friendly
FA).
 Advising the brigade commander in establishment of attack guidance for counterfire targets.
 Coordination of counterfire operations with higher echelon counterfire operations.
 Integration of counterfire into the operation plan in a complementary manner that helps enable
maneuver operations.
 Achieving indirect fire superiority within the area of operations.
DIVISION OR CORPS COUNTERFIRE

5-53. Division or corps may task the BCT to cover target areas of interest with its organic radars and target
acquisition or information collection assets. The FA battalion commander must understand his unit’s
responsibilities in the larger counterfire fight, and ensure efficient execution of assigned counterfire tasks.
The BCT’s FA battalion will not normally execute the division or corps counterfire fight because that
would reduce immediate available fires for the BCT.
COUNTERFIRE PLANNING
5-54. The FA battalion S-2 and targeting officer plan, coordinate, and synchronize the counterfire fight
during the wargaming process. They recommend call for fire zones, decision points, triggers for cueing and
moving radars and changing zones. They coordinate with the supported higher HQ fires cell for supported
force critical friendly zones (CFZ). Counterfire planning considerations include:
 What unit will conduct counterfire (for example, unit designated by the FA battalion S-3 on the
FDO’s recommendation, considering range, ammunition, and position)?
 What will happen if multiple acquisitions occur simultaneously?
 What is the standard fire order (for example, the FDO recommends a standard fire order for the
S-3’s approval, ensuring it meets the commander’s guidance)?
 What are the decision points for moving the radar (for example, based on the phases of fire or
accumulated cue time)?
 What are the decision points to change the radar zones (for example, based on the phases of the
operation)?
 What are the decision points on when to start cueing?
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 5-9

Chapter 5
 Plan radar zones for all phases of the operation, and what are the decision points for turning
them on and off?
 When does the S-3 want to force the enemy’s artillery to move?
 Does the plan account for branches and sequels (for example, degrees of success or failure)?
 Does the plan call for when and when not to engage with counterfire?
 What is the criteria to meet the commander’s intent (for example, how many enemy firing or
launch platforms must be destroyed)?
 Can the call for fire zones be pre-cleared within maneuver and airspace planning? For example,
consider use of FSCMs such as a coordinated fire line, free-fire areas, and ACMs.
 What are the decision points for massing the battalion’s fires on the enemy’s artillery?
 What is the cueing schedule and who cues the radar during the different phases of the operation?
5-55. There are several critical decision points in the wargaming process. One of the most important
involves forcing the enemy’s indirect fire weapons to move, which allows the radar and the counterfire unit
to move without jeopardizing protection. Use suppressive, neutralization or destruction fires to force the
enemy to move. Another critical decision arises when target acquisitions occur simultaneously, the
counterfire unit can become overwhelmed. Table 5-1 lists the options available when the radar receives
multiple acquisitions.
Table 5-1. Multiple target acquisitions
FA Battalion With a Reinforcing FA Battalion Without a Reinforcing
Type Targets
Battalion Battalion
Multiple Targets in Reinforcing battalion engages FA battalion engages targets
Range target(s) and passes other target(s) simultaneously.
to the FA battalion. FA battalion engages the targets
Reinforcing battalion engages sequentially.
targets simultaneously. FA battalion engages target(s) and
Reinforcing battalion engages passes the other target(s) to a FAB,
targets sequentially. DIVARTY, or a higher HQ fires cell
for attack with other assets.
Multiple Targets in Reinforcing battalion engages FA battalion passes the targets to a
Range, but the FA target(s) and passes the other FAB, DIVARTY, or a higher HQ fires
Battalion is Involved in target(s) to a FAB, DIVARTY or a cell for attack with other assets.
Missions with a Higher
higher HQ fires cell for attack with
Priority
other assets.
Multiple Targets - Some Reinforcing and supported FA FA battalion engages the target(s)
Out of Range battalion engage the target(s) within range and passes the other
within range and pass the other target(s) to a FAB, DIVARTY or a
target(s) to a FAB, DIVARTY or a higher HQ fires cell for attack with
higher HQ fires cell for attack with other assets.
other assets.
DIVARTY – division artillery, FA – field artillery, FAB – field artillery brigade,
FS – fire support, HQ – headquarters
REHEARSING COUNTERFIRE
5-56. Counterfire rehearsal synchronizes the counterfire fight with the supported higher HQ schemes of
maneuver, fires, and communications. The FA battalion S-2 and targeting officer should rehearse the
counterfire plan with the radar and intelligence sections. The S-2 and counterfire operations section should
rehearse management of radar zones during different phases, using radio networks (digital and voice with
cueing agents); decision points for movements and prepare-to-march-order; times to be ready to radiate
(cueing schedules); and reporting accumulated radar radiation time.
5-10 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Deliver Fires
COUNTERFIRE DRILL
5-57. The following scenario describes possible FA battalion command post counterfire techniques. They
focus on the interactions of the staff, which are most important in synchronizing the counterfire fight, to
include:
 Plan. During the MDMP and wargaming processes, the BCT fires cell and FA battalion staffs
identify counterfire, targeting, and target acquisition data requirements and responsibilities. The
BCT operation order, fires annex, FA appendix, and target acquisition tab to include the radar
deployment order provides the necessary information. In the scenario, FA assets are in place and
ready to support the mission. The BCT organic FA battalion has an attached radar from a FAB.
 Acquire. As the battle begins, the radar acquires enemy artillery firing from a call for fire zone.
The radar section assigns a target number from its allocated block of numbers and immediately
transmits the counterfire information grids (for example, impact and origin).
 Decide. The FA battalion operations and intelligence section receives the radar fire mission
digitally or by voice. The AFATDS operator or radio operator sounds off with “fire mission,
radar” or a similar standard operating procedure phrase to alert the FDC. Then he announces
target number, origin and impact grids, and time acquired to the FA battalion S-2 and assistant
S-3. The FDO immediately sends a fire mission to the platoon(s) with a fire order of “do not
load.” The assistant S-3 and S-2 plot the grids. The assistant S-3 makes a quick map spot,
determines if units are in range of the target, and informs the S-3. The S-2 begins to verify his
template and identify the type of unit(s). The S-3 requests clearance of fires through the BCT
fires cell, as required. The BCT fires cell clears the fires through maneuver channels, and the fire
battalion FDO cancels “do not load.”
 Deliver. The FA battalion FDO fires the mission and requests additional fires from the
DIVARTY or FAB, as required. If attack criteria are achieved, the FA battalion S-3 directs end-
of-mission on that target. Alternative actions the S-3 may direct include:
 Handoff. The FA battalion may be forced to handoff the mission to DIVARTY or a FAB or
BCT fires cell if it cannot service the mission.
 End of Mission. The FA battalion S-3 or FDO may have to direct end-of-mission before the
mission is fired because FSCMs or boundaries are violated, clearance cannot be granted in a
timely manner, clearance of fires is denied, or there is a duplication of missions.
 Assess. The FA battalion operations and intelligence section uses supporting organic UAS or
coordinates with the BCT fires cell and DIVARTY or FAB to receive battle damage assessment.
The S-2 updates logs and revises enemy artillery positions based on origin grids and revises
enemy most likely course of action based on impact grids. The FA battalion S-2 and targeting
officer evaluates revised enemy artillery positions and refines the radar zones in coordination
with BCT fires cell targeting officers and those of DIVARTY or FAB supporting HQ. The FA
battalion S-2 may also need to update the radar deployment order, make cueing schedule
changes, move the radar, and coordinate coverage during movement. The S-3 may also need to
relocate firing elements.
SECTION IV – SUPPRESSION OF ENEMY AIR DEFENSES

5-58. This section provides a summary description of suppression of enemy air defenses (SEAD) and FA
battalion involvement in support of BCT or higher echelon operations. To assist in this task the use of a
joint air attack team may be employed. The joint air attack team normally operates as a coordinated effort
supported by FS, air defense artillery, naval surface FS, information collection assets, electronic warfare
systems, and ground maneuver forces against enemy forces. Joint terminal attack controllers may perform
duties as directed by the air mission commander in support of the ground commander’s scheme of
maneuver.
5-59. SEAD involves activities to neutralize, destroy, or temporarily degrade surface-based enemy air
defenses by lethal and nonlethal means. Effective SEAD increases friendly aircraft survivability, enhances
air operations, and facilitates rapid air superiority. This in turn supports the supported higher HQ’ ground
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 5-11

Chapter 5
maneuver and counterfire battles. Army SEAD operations are primarily designed to protect air assets near
the forward line of own troops or during cross-forward line of own troops operations.
5-60. Fires cells conduct SEAD planning, targeting, and coordination. Both ground force fires cells and
aviation unit fires cells may be working together in planning and coordinating SEAD.
FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION IN SUPPRESSION OF ENEMY AIR

DEFENSES OPERATIONS
5-61. The FA battalion may be involved in overall SEAD planning and coordination. This may include
planning and execution of both BCT and FA battalion FS tasks. There may also be instances where
supporting FA battalions with a support relationship of reinforcing, general support-reinforcing, or general
support plays a major role in the overall SEAD for an operation. In this situation, the FA battalion
commander or the S-3 may go to the planning HQ or fires cell and actively participate in the detailed
SEAD planning. Supporting FA battalions may establish temporary liaison with the supported maneuver or
aviation fires cell during the planning and execution of critical SEAD missions.
5-62. FA battalion involvement in SEAD may include:
 Planning, conducting, or participating in SEAD programs designed to degrade and suppress
enemy air defense assets throughout the supported higher HQ area of operations or to destroy,
degrade, and suppress enemy air defense within a specific area or corridor.
 Planning, executing, or participating in SEAD fire plans designed to support specific air
operations.
 Providing immediate fires to rotary or fixed-wing aviation assets in support of an ongoing air
operation.
5-63. A SEAD plan or program may involve several FA battalions, with cannon, rocket, or missile units
providing fires along ingress and egress routes. Early identification of air routes and attack by fire
positions is crucial in focusing target acquisition assets and intelligence templating in developing attack
plans, and in coordinating air corridors and airspace coordination areas with FA positioning requirements.
5-64. One technique for localized SEAD is to prepare the attack by fire positions with FA indirect fires
before occupation by the attack aircraft. Time separation is critical to prevent fratricide and to allow the
aircraft to occupy the attack by fire positions unopposed. The unit should fire the attack by fire preparation
based on an H-hour with the last rounds scheduled to impact from one to ten minutes before the aircraft
arrive in their attack by fire positions.
5-65. When using indirect fires, to orient the attack aircraft to the engagement area, they begin firing as the
aircraft arrive in their attack by fire positions. The engagement area preparation serves two purposes. First,
it suppresses the enemy maneuver elements and therefore any enemy air defenses that are accompanying
them. Second, the flashes and smoke from the munitions provide the aircrews with a visual reference of the
location of the targets.
5-66. SEAD targets should be fired during egress in the same fashion as the ingress targets. Any targets
discovered during ingress should be included in the egress program. The egress SEAD should be fired on-
call if the attack aircraft can communicate with the FSO. If all communications with the aircraft is lost
during the attack, then the egress SEAD should be fired on a planned time schedule. This allows the aircraft
to know when it is safe to proceed down their egress route without being hit by SEAD fires.
PLANNING FOR AND CONDUCTING SUPPRESSION OF ENEMY AIR

DEFENSES OPERATIONS
5-67. The FA battalion S-3 and FDO work closely with the appropriate fires cell and maneuver S-3 to
maintain current mission data. They review tasks involving SEAD for both the supported higher HQ and
FA battalion to ensure firing units will be in position, on time, with the necessary ammunition to fire the
missions. They review the relative priorities, potential mission conflicts, and enemy threats to better
anticipate how alternative or backup plans must be executed. The FA battalion S-3 verifies triggering
5-12 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Deliver Fires
responsibility, authority to change mission factors, and who the firing unit must contact if problems
develop. The S-3 briefs the FA battalion FDO and firing units (primary and alternate) in all aspects of the
SEAD mission.
5-68. The FA battalion S-3 should consider established air corridors and airspace coordination areas when
selecting firing positions. FA battalion S-3s should query fires cells early to identify air corridors and
airspace coordination areas.
5-69. Evaluate the SEAD primary and backup triggers during rehearsals. Timing is important in SEAD
fires to prevent fratricide of friendly air and obscuration of the main target. Aircraft may arrive early or
late, targeting information may not develop, or the FA firing unit may be unavailable, delayed, or involved
in another mission. The FA battalion S-3 must decide whether to fire or abort the mission. Since aborting a
SEAD mission can have serious impact on the air mission, wargaming analysis and prior coordination are
critical to understanding the commander’s guidance and priorities that should guide the FA battalion S-3’s
decision. The FA battalion commander may retain abort decisionmaking authority on SEAD FS tasks.
5-70. Review air observer immediate fires request procedures. Individual requests by flight leaders (pilots)
for SEAD support are treated as targets of opportunity. Add targets of opportunity to the current SEAD
plan and fire during egress or during a re-attack of the target. The FA battalion S-3 and FDO must
anticipate these missions and consider time, ammunition, firing units, and potential target types, and
develop tentative fire orders for the more likely scenarios.
5-71. The FA battalion S-3 or FDO may have to recommend or make rapid adjustment to the SEAD fire
plan to adjust for changing circumstances. The S-3 and FDO must carefully review the potential impact on
other fires. Successful execution of adjustments depends on a complete understanding of the commander’s
intent, priorities, and the concept of operations. Thorough review of branches and sequels and accurate
situational awareness (operational and sustainment) during planning will facilitate these adjustments during
execution,
5-72. Use smoke to obscure enemy air defenses and smoke or illumination to signal the lifting or shifting
of fires to allow aircraft to attack. The FA battalion S-3 should ensure the use of these fires is well
coordinated.
5-73. The FA battalion S-2 works closely with targeting officers in the fires cells and with S-2s in higher
and subordinate echelons to ensure the battalion has the most current targeting information. If the battalion
performs SEAD targeting, the S-2 must submit requests for SEAD related intelligence and targeting
information as early as possible. Direct coordination with aviation, Air Force, and military intelligence
elements may be necessary to get accurate information in a timely manner. The S-2 and targeting officer in
the FA battalion may briefly move to the fires cell responsible for planning SEAD.
5-74. SEAD targets include command and control, air defense artillery weapons, and radars. Because of
the ranges involved in supporting operations, target locations must be as accurate as possible. During
coordination of SEAD targeting, FA battalion S-2s and S-3s should discuss target location accuracy with
fires cells when they identify potential problems.
5-75. The sources for development of SEAD targets are primarily visual observation by ground and air
observers, electronic and imagery assets, or templating techniques. Suppression of deeper enemy air
defenses targets supporting air operations are provided primarily by Air Force tactical air reconnaissance
flight reports, other aircraft reports, or satellite imagery available through division, corps and above
intelligence coordinators, all of which may require more coordination and special communications or
automation arrangements.
5-76. The FA battalion S-6, working with the S-3, reviews tasks involving SEAD for unique
communications and automation requirements. Due to the varied command and support arrangements,
participants, and distances involved, unusual communications arrangements may be necessary.
Retransmission or voice and digital relay may be necessary. Additional communications equipment may be
warranted. Quickfire channels may be used. The FA battalion S-6 may need to work directly with a ground
or aviation force fires cell to ensure communications arrangements are adequate. Alternate (backup)
communications plans should be developed.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 5-13

Chapter 5
SECTION V – METEOROLOGY
5-77. Apply current meteorological data for accurate artillery fires, battlefield forecasts, radiological fallout
predictions, and target acquisition. This information is in the form of meteorology messages provided by
the FA battalion headquarters.
5-78. Computer Meteorological Data-Profiler (AN/GMK-2) is an evolutionary block of the Profiler system
and reduces the logistical footprint to a laptop configuration located in the main command post.
5-79. The AFATDS operator operates the Computer Meteorological Data-Profiler interfaces with the
AFATDS via local area network connection.
SECTION VI – SURVEY
5-80. This section summarizes key survey consideration for the FA battalion. Survey is used to establish
and transfer accurate locations and directional control for weapons and target acquisition assets. Survey
establishes a common grid that permits the massing of fires, the delivery of surprise observed fires, the
delivery of effective unobserved fires, and the transfer of target data from one unit to another. With the
increased availability of global positioning system devices in vehicles and weapon systems, requirements
for survey support are decreasing. However, understanding of standard survey principles is critical for
successful operations during degraded operations.
5-81. Survey control is a command responsibility. The FA battalion is responsible for establishing a
common grid throughout its area of operations. During MDMP development, the brigade commander, S-3,
and FSO identify key survey issues. In advising the brigade commander, the FSO analyzes the
commander's guidance, the scheme of maneuver, rate of movement, effects desired on high-payoff targets,
and accuracy requirements for weapons and target acquisition sensors. The FSO ensures that the supported
higher HQ FS plan and its FA appendix (FA battalion operation plan or operation order) provide the
necessary survey guidance and tasks. Details for survey support to mortars and non-FA target acquisition
assets are addressed in both the supported higher HQ FS plan and its appendix, as the non-FA units may
not receive the FA battalion operation plan or operation order.
5-82. The FA battalion may receive survey instructions and guidance directly from the brigade FSO or
fires cell during direct involvement in the supported higher HQ MDMP. The FA battalion commander, S-3,
and survey section chief are the key individuals involved in reviewing the instructions and guidance,
identifying the battalion’s total survey requirements, and developing battalion survey plans.
5-83. The FA battalion commander’s guidance must provide information, which may include:
 Priorities for survey to include survey methods.
 Accuracies required if other than tactical standard operating procedure. Modified survey
techniques may be needed as the result of mission variables of METT-TC.
 Times that critical tasks in the survey plan must be completed.
 Location accuracy and number of survey control points.
 Position requirements (for example, primary, alternate and supplementary).
 Future plans.
 Digitized platform (for example, automated fire control system or Paladin digital fire control
system, digital fire control system, mobile counterfire system) initialization information and
confidence checks.
5-84. The FA battalion S-3 must coordinate continuously with higher-echelon staff and commanders and
advise the FA battalion commander on any deviation from previous guidance. If the tactical situation or the
absence of accessible survey control points require use of hasty survey or field-expedient methods of
establishing survey control points, the BCT, DIVARTY, or FAB commander must be informed.
5-85. The FA battalion S-3, advised by the survey section chief, develops the survey plan using available
assets and techniques to best meet the guidance given by the commander. The S-3s of both reinforced and
reinforcing battalions must coordinate their efforts and plans. Survey assets may have to be pooled on
occasion without regard to unit identity to accomplish the mission. General support and general support-
5-14 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Deliver Fires
reinforcing units will closely coordinate their survey requirements with the FA battalion’s area of
operations, especially during offensive operations. During defensive operations involving rearward
movement, reinforcing units may rely heavily on supporting FAB or DIVARTY general support and
general support-reinforcing unit survey information to facilitate survey operations. The FA battalion survey
plan must be coordinated to ensure use of consolidated survey control point data and to eliminate
duplication of effort.
SURVEY PLANNING FACTORS

5-86. The FA battalion commander and S-3 must be aware of the basic capabilities and limitations of
survey before they can issue effective guidance and orders to the survey section, to include as required:
 Available survey assets, equipment, and personnel.
 Total survey requirements.
 Weapon locations and types.
 Target acquisition locations (for example, radars, observers, and military intelligence
equipment).
 Survey control points.
 FAB and DIVARTY requirements.
 Target area survey.
 Time and distance factors.
 Operational status of other positioning systems (for example, those in weapon or target
acquisition systems and other vehicular and handheld systems).
 Weather and terrain.
 Availability and accuracy of existing survey control points.
 In addition to acquisition assets designed specifically to locate enemy units, the brigade
commander has laser rangefinders, artillery survey, and laser-equipped observers to determine
accurate planned target locations in engagement areas and on obstacles. These tools and the use
of satellite oriented locating systems such as the global positioning system greatly enhance the
accuracy of FS.
5-87. Datum defines for the user a cohesive set of survey control. All surveyed positions in one datum are
reduced to a common grid reference with certain prescribed accuracies. It is therefore essential for users,
when working in an area where more than one datum exists, to define the datum of their grid coordinates.
FS agencies and personnel must be aware of datum concerns.
SURVEY PLANNING TIMES

5-88. The factors used in planning survey include:
 Cross-country - 10 kilometers per hour.
 Unimproved road - 25 kilometers per hour.
 Improved road - 50 kilometers per hour.
 Maximum mission time is unlimited.
 Maximum mission radial distance - 75 kilometers from last update point.
 Initialization times are—
 10 minutes.
 15 minutes below -20 Celsius.
 20 minutes in latitudes greater than 65N or S and temperature above -20 Celsius.
 25 minutes in latitudes greater than 65N or S and temperature below -20 Celsius.
 5 minutes using hot start.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 5-15

Chapter 5
PLANNING GUIDE
5-89. The FA battalion commander and S-3 can use guidelines to ensure that most of the issues relating to
survey planning are covered. It is not exhaustive and may have to be modified to meet a particular
situation, to include:
 Select primary, alternate, and supplementary position areas for assets requiring survey.
 Set time requirements associated with providing survey (for example, planning, reconnaissance,
fieldwork, and completion).
5-90. Reduce standard requirements only if time is a critical factor. An example might be providing only
direction to FA units and requiring other units to establish their own locations by use of hasty techniques.
Determine accuracy requirements for weapons and target acquisition systems (for example, third, fourth, or
fifth order survey), to include as required:
 Set a survey priority for each asset requiring survey. This may mean that survey will be
controlled at the highest feasible level and not be done independently by individual battalions
and units.
 Determine the availability of starting survey control points, improved position azimuth
determining system update points, closing points, and the accuracy of each point. If they are not
readily available, include the requirement to emplace them in survey priorities.
 Consider performing survey updates at survey control points during rearm, refuel, and resupply
operations or in conjunction with planned moves.
 Coordinate at all levels. The requirements from higher HQ must be determined so that they can
be included in the planning process.
DEGRADED SURVEY OPERATIONS

5-91. Degraded conditions for survey operations may occur due to unavailability of satellite systems or
inoperable automated position or direction systems. During these times, the FA battalion will rely more
heavily on the use of the most current and available improved position azimuth determining system and
hasty survey techniques. During offensive operations, all FA battalions may require survey assistance from
supported higher HQ survey assets. During defensive operations, supported higher HQ survey teams can
readily assist FA battalion and reinforcing units as they move rearward; however, this requires early
identification and coordination of requirements. Use hasty survey techniques during degraded operations or
when adequate survey control is not available.
5-16 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Chapter 6
Field Artillery Battalion Operations
This chapter discusses how a FA battalion in a variety of operations. Section I
discusses key considerations for FA support. Section II discusses FA tasks common to
operations. Sections III and IV cover FA operations in support of offensive and
defensive tasks, respectively. Section V details FA support of other unique tactical
operations, such as airborne operations. Section VI addresses FA support of stability
operations and defense support of civil authorities operations, and Section VII
discusses operational considerations that affect FA operations.
SECTION I – KEY CONSIDERATIONS FOR FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION

SUPPORT TO OPERATIONS
6-1. This section covers the key considerations for FA battalion support to operations, close combat
supporting fires, fighting in depth, and security and protection. The details of these considerations follow.
CLOSE COMBAT SUPPORTING FIRES

6-2. Close combat FS demands rapid response, precision, and, at times, sustained fires for suppression.
Suppressive fires cause the enemy to remain sheltered until friendly forces gain their objectives.
Suppression requires control at the lowest possible level to support maneuver and to respond quickly to
enemy movements. Smoke to facilitate maneuver is necessary in the close combat attack as well.
6-3. Close combat engagements fought by companies and platoons rely on highly responsive fires,
frequently using precision-guided munitions delivered simultaneously by any available means.
6-4. Because high-payoff targets appear fleetingly, they must be engaged quickly and accurately. FA
systems fire lethal area and precision munitions to engage high-payoff targets.
6-5. Companies and platoons will continue to need high volumes of smoke and suppressive fires in close
combat engagements. As opposed to the precision fires needed to kill identified targets, suppressive fires
must affect a larger area to cause the enemy to seek shelter. Since it is not always possible to predict
exactly where the enemy will be it is important for such systems to be extremely responsive.
6-6. Attacking forces require precise, immediately responsive fires employed close to friendly elements.
Further, these fires must be able to shift rapidly to engage or suppress new targets, isolate portions of the
battlefield, or degrade the enemy’s ability to maneuver. Therefore, organic means provide the optimal close
combat firepower requirements for attacking tactical ground forces because of the precise timing and
positive control ground commanders require.
FIGHTING IN DEPTH
6-7. FA battalions shape engagements for maneuver forces by providing long-range fires. Use indirect
fires to attack surveillance capabilities, artillery and air defense assets, and enemy command and control
nodes. BCT shaping of the situation in depth with both lethal and nonlethal means will be important in
assuring freedom of action for their battalions and for sustaining the BCT’s offensive actions to greater
depth.
6-8. The counterfire challenges for the attacking force have always been greater because weapons
locating radars and the units and sensors in their network must continually displace forward while
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-1

Chapter 6
maintaining counterfire coverage. The defender can put his artillery units in hidden and protected positions,
use them with great discretion, and refrain from using them in mass until he can achieve maximum effect.
6-9. Higher levels of command will remain responsible for acquiring and attacking enemy long-range
artillery systems that will target maneuver brigades. Maneuver forces must assume responsibility for
counterfire operations against the enemy’s short-range cannon and mortar systems in their proximity.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION

6-10. Maneuver forces need to secure and protect their command posts and sustainment units without
overly degrading their maneuver company strength. Determine elements vulnerable to enemy attack, which
may include:
 The HQ and its command posts and command groups.
 UAS launchers and sensors operating behind the cavalry troops and maneuver battalions.
 The artillery platoons, batteries, command posts, radars, and targeting elements of the FS
system.
 The various sustainment elements supporting the BCT.
 The retransmission sites.
 The military intelligence collection assets.
 The mortars, command posts, and combat trains of the maneuver battalions.
6-11. Maintaining security will be especially difficult during high-tempo offensive operations. Local
security and mutual support within a formation, to include rapid-response forces, and follow-and-support
forces will need to adapt to this condition wherever they fight.
6-12. The brigade engineer battalion provides an additional commander and staff to plan, coordinate, and
execute security for both Level I and Level II threats. For additional information on response force
operations see ADRP 3-37 and FM 3-39.
SECTION II – COMMON FIELD ARTILLERY TASKS

6-13. Common FA tasks include:
 Deploy and conduct movement.
 Employ fires.
 Exercise control.
 Perform sustainment.
DEPLOY AND CONDUCT MOVEMENT

6-14. During wargaming and during the battle, anticipate when tactical movement of the battalion or
batteries may be necessary. When speed is necessary, consider moving the battalion on multiple routes if
possible. Thoroughly identify terrain management issues during planning, wargaming, and rehearsals.
Conduct movement and positioning coordination early to reduce conflicts. Consider using the hours of
darkness for movement and resupply.
DEVELOP INTELLIGENCE
6-15. Develop information on both military and civilian threats. Identify and template enemy FA assets
that can affect both combined arms operations and the FA battalion’s operations. Develop and submit
prioritized FA related intelligence and target acquisition requirements as early as possible. Request and
collect intelligence information from maneuver units, military police, nearby units, and host nation civil
and military elements to protect FA battalion assets from attack, as required.
6-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

EMPLOY FIRES
6-16. The ability to employ fires requires the capability to detect and locate targets and to deliver fires.
Information on detect and locate targets and deliver fires follows.
DETECT AND LOCATE TARGETS

6-17. Identify specified and implied targeting responsibilities. Develop targets and targeting information to
support counterfire and SEAD operations. Identify which observers (primary and alternate) will trigger FA
events (for example, fire missions and cueing). Coordinate the support of external FA and non-FA
intelligence and target acquisition assets to acquire targeting information and battle damage assessment, as
required. Plan and direct counterfire radar operations in coordination with supported higher HQ radar
operations.
DELIVER FIRES
6-18. The FA battalion delivers fires to:
 Provide close combat and fires in depth to support maneuver operations and to destroy and
disrupt enemy command and control.
 Mass fires to gain maximum efficiency and effectiveness.
 Destroy, neutralize, and suppress enemy indirect fire systems with counterfire.
 Provide FA illumination to assist friendly force night operations, to mark locations or targets, to
provide friendly direction orientation, or to degrade night vision equipment of the enemy.
 Interdict and disrupt enemy sustainment efforts and troop movements.
6-19. The FA battalion S-3 must maintain close coordination with the brigade FSO and fires cell to
continuously monitor changes, review, and adjust primary and alternate task and trigger responsibilities.
When responsibilities change, the S-3 must ensure the responsible unit receives frequencies, lasing codes,
or quickfire and data linkage information. He will also coordinate for meteorology and survey data, and
integrate weapons locating radar placement and acquisition data into fire planning.
6-20. The battalion ammunition officer and forward support company commander may need to deliver or
redistribute ammunition, to include emergency expeditionary support packages tailored to provide fires in
support of aviation operations, scatterable mines, and smoke to support maneuver operations.
EXERCISE CONTROL
6-21. To exercise control the FA battalion must be able to communicate and coordinate fire support.
Information on how to communicate and coordinate fire support follows.
COMMUNICATE
6-22. Closely monitor distances during planning and execution to determine when digital and voice radio
range limitations and terrain may become excessive. Employ alternate digital routing and voice capability
to back up critical digital communications. Carefully position and move retransmission teams to maintain
communications in offensive and defensive tasks. Use decentralized techniques, such as direct routing and
quickfire channels to provide immediate responsive data linkages for critical fires.
COORDINATE FIRE SUPPORT

6-23. Make maximum use of available fires cells to gather friendly and enemy information and coordinate
movement and positioning. Use liaison as much as possible to ensure effective coordination with other FA
units and military and civilian elements, as required. During fast moving operations, and whenever danger
close fires are planned or anticipated increase frequency of information and database updates
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-3

Chapter 6
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-24. Stockpile ammunition to support major firing events (for example, preparations or counter
preparations). Time key ammunition deliveries of low-density ammunition (for example, illumination) and
stockpiled ammunition to arrive just before it is required. When supply lines become extended use
helicopter resupply for critical items.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-25. Coordinate support from maneuver units, military police, nearby units, and host nation civil and
military elements to assist in defending FA battalion assets from attack and in repelling attacks. Consider
using supplementary positions for lengthy, planned missions, especially when the counterfire threat is high.
Make maximum use of terrain masking to shield fires and communication from enemy acquisition.
SECTION III – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION SUPPORT OF OFFENSIVE

TASKS
6-26. This section describes FA battalion techniques and considerations for FA battalion support of
offensive tasks. It highlights those principles that are generally common to all offensive operations, and
discusses FA battalion considerations unique to specific types of offensive actions.
FORMS OF MANEUVER AND TYPES OF OFFENSIVE TASKS

6-27. Maneuver units use six forms of maneuver in the offense these include envelopment, turning
movement, frontal attack, penetration, infiltration, and flank attack. There are four types of offensive tasks,
movement to contact, attack, exploitation, and pursuit. The FA battalion commander and staff must
understand the differences in the types of offensive tasks, forms of maneuver, and the implications for the
FA battalions. For more information on offensive tasks, see FM 3-90-1.
FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION TASKS IN THE OFFENSE

6-28. The FA battalion and supporting artillery prepare the way for the maneuver force by suppressing,
neutralizing, or destroying the enemy as well as obscuring his vision of friendly movement, and creating
misdirection. Plan fires to soften enemy defenses before the attack. Use short, violent preparations against
front-line defenses, observation posts, command and control, indirect fire weapons, and reserves.

6-29. Offensive tasks frequently involve forward, rearward, and lateral movement. During periods of rapid
advance, open terrain may be available, and position areas may be relatively easier to find. When advances
stall, or attacking forces are counterattacked, terrain may condense. Movement may become a series of
shorter tactical maneuvers, occasionally involving increased lateral or even rearward movement. FA
considerations in support of maneuver includes:
 Plan to use hasty occupations to support rapid movement.
 Plan for the use of digital terrain tools and map reconnaissance, since time is short and the
enemy holds the terrain.
 Request photographic reconnaissance or copies of the products from other reconnaissance
efforts.
 Consider air reconnaissance, if available.
 Consider using locations that the enemy used for his FA units. It may be an indicator that the
terrain is suitable. However, these positions are known to the enemy, may contain hazards from
destroyed enemy equipment as well as provide a visible signature (for example, burning
vehicles) and unexploded ordnance hazards.
 FA battalions may have difficulty maintaining radar coverage during a fast moving attack.
Division and corps, DIVARTY and FAB assistance may be required.
6-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 FA battalions may rely heavily on fast movement techniques such as movement in column or
move units in several smaller march elements.
 Position firing units well forward to range beyond maneuver objectives. Identify requirements
for extended range munitions.
 Plan alternate routes to bypass enemy obstacles, and request engineer mobility support, as
required.
 Consider repositioning light units by air.
 Coordinate early and frequently for external weapons locating radar support.
 Position pre-designated combat configured loads at transition points.
6-30. Identify and prioritize locating enemy indirect fire assets that can potentially affect friendly offensive
tasks. Develop and identify counterfire targets for preparations, counterpreparations, and other fires. Use
canalizing terrain or road networks near enemy FA to create target areas of interest and engagement areas.
Coordinate intelligence collection and target acquisition coverage of the area. Consider attacking entrapped
enemy FA by air or ground forces as an alternative to attack by the FA battalion and supporting artillery.
EMPLOY FIRES
Detect and Locate Targets

6-32. Plan for frequent repositioning of target acquisition assets based on forward line of own troops
movement. Use call for fire zones to provide target acquisition coverage on suspected enemy firing
positions. Ensure radars are in position in time to support the assault on the objective and consolidation.
Consider the use of CFZs at congested areas such as breaching sites and gap crossings.
Deliver Fires
6-33. Provide fires at the time and place required by the maneuver commander, to include suppressive fires
on the objective. Isolate the objective with fires beyond and to the flanks. Provide fires to support breaching
tasks. Use improved conventional munitions, high explosive, and smoke to suppress enemy forces
overwatching obstacles. Use smoke to screen the breaching operation, and aggressive counterfire and CFZs
to reduce the enemy indirect fire threat against the breaching force. Plan for increased use of hasty survey.
Survey availability decreases in relation to the speed of the advance. Prepare to receive and execute hasty
fire plans to support changes in objectives, repelling enemy counterattacks, or developing penetrations and
exploitations. Put survey with lead FA units. Forward updated survey data to supported higher HQ to
facilitate emplacement of following FA assets. When the FA battalion supports lead elements, especially
during penetrations and exploitations, it must increase coordination with its higher FA HQ. Consider using
Excalibur and precision guidance kit against forces in strong points. Anticipate hasty planning. Coordinate
with higher HQ to identify targets at depth. Offensive tasks may require increased high explosive
munitions, less improved conventional munitions, and scatterable mines. Anticipate changing ammunition
requirements as the battle progress and for future tasks.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-35. Plan retransmission capability to cover extended lines of communication.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-5

Chapter 6
Coordinate Fire Support

6-36. Plan fires to prevent enemy reinforcement, disengagement, and resupply of the objective. Plan fires
to protect friendly units as they reorganize on the objective.
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-37. Coordinate stockpiling of ammunition for preparations. Plan for increasingly extended lines of
resupply. Plan for frequent moves of the combat trains. Synchronize resupply of ammunition, petroleum,
oil, and lubricants. Quickly link and push well-designed expeditionary support packages far enough
forward to firing units. Consider air resupply using Army air, container delivery system, or mass supply
(light forces).
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-38. Plan for unit defense in a 6,400-mil environment, since encountering bypassed enemy elements
becomes more probable. Ensure ammunition plans address security, movement, and recovery of not needed
ammunition. Within the framework of the maneuver deception plan, consider deception techniques to
confuse the enemy’s intelligence assets. Consider using weapons locating radar CFZs to enable effective
counterfire. Prepare to provide continuous FS in a CBRN environment. The threat of an enemy CBRN
attack may increase as his defeat becomes imminent.
SECTION IV – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION SUPPORT OF DEFENSIVE

TASKS
6-39. This section describes FA battalion techniques and considerations for FA battalion support of
defensive tasks. It highlights those principles that are generally common to all defensive tasks, and
discusses FA battalion considerations unique to specific types of defensive actions.
TYPES OF DEFENSIVE ASKS

6-40. The types of defensive tasks are area defense, mobile defense, and retrograde. The FA battalion
commander and staff must understand the differences in these and the implications for the FA battalions.
6-41. For more information on defensive tasks, see FM 3-90-1.
FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION TASKS IN THE DEFENSE

6-42. Several tactical techniques are common to FA battalion support of the defense. Planning
considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of defensive operations follow.

6-43. Movement during early stages of the defense may often be reactive. The FA battalion may
experience increased lateral and rearward movement until the friendly maneuver force can regain the
initiative, slow the advance or better anticipate enemy actions. All personnel involved in movement
planning must understand the impacts of battle tempo on movement, which may include:
 Integrate FA battalion, DIVARTY, and FAB movement so that the FA units are in their firing
positions in time to support the attack.
 Identify and avoid potential rearward and lateral chokepoints if possible by sequenced
movement.
 The FA battalion should consider the possibility that civilian exodus and evacuation during the
defense may interfere with movement. Request military police support as required.
 Coordinate movement plans with the maneuver HQ. Consider the obstacle plan in planning
movements.
6-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 If the defense is forced into unexpected lateral or rearward moves, conduct aggressive ground
reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of position. Other units may be slow to react, which
can cause congested terrain. The FA battalion may use alternate locations more frequently in the
defense.
 Use lateral maneuver to move the FA battalion and supporting FA units away from enemy
penetrations. This facilitates dispersal of FA battalion and supporting FA units while allowing
both continued support to forward defenses and massing of fires onto penetrating forces.
However, logistic support may be complicated if the penetration becomes large enough that
batteries are widely separated, especially if FA battalion trains are forced to move rearward.
 Controlled sequencing of FA battalion and supporting FA movement can facilitate positioning of
FA battalion and supporting FA for follow-on missions (for example, support of counterattack).
 Request advance engineer preparation of FA position areas.
6-44. Monitor threats posed by enemy reconnaissance and special purpose troops infiltrating into friendly
territory in advance of main force. Determine potential enemy offensive use of CBRN capabilities. Identify
indicators of enemy massing of FA.
EMPLOY FIRES

6-46. Reliance on external target acquisition assets to identify targets in depth may increase. Anticipate
movement of call for fire zones based on S-2s situation template and expected rate of enemy advance.
Higher FA HQ and target acquisition units can assist front line target acquisition assets in identifying and
reconnoitering target acquisition positions toward the rear.
Deliver Fires
6-47. The FA battalion may participate in targeting and scheduling for larger counterpreparation fires. The
S-3 must anticipate how these fires could affect other battalion missions. Provide target area survey to
ensure accurate placement of final protective fires, smoke screens, scatterable mines minefields, and fires
supporting obstacles. Identify survey requirements early and request supported higher HQ assistance with
survey points to the rear. Make maximum use of digital equipment to obtain and disseminate known survey
points. Deliver massed fires to support planned engagement areas, blunting enemy penetrations, and
counterfire or counterpreparation programs. Ensure sustainment areas have indirect FS. Consider propellant
types and positioning in order to avoid high-angle fires to limit enemy counterfire acquisition. Plan
alternate firing positions in support of brigade area.
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-48. In the defense, supply lines are frequently shorter. During rearward movement, the battalion has the
advantage of falling back into friendly territory. This allows advance preparation of position areas and the
battalion can fall back onto personnel, supplies, and equipment. However, civilian evacuations and enemy
fires can interfere with lines of communication. In this case, determine sustainment actions, which may
include:
 Preposition ammunition for immediate consumption.
 Plan for surge use of sustainment to maximize benefits of shortened supply lines.
 If the firing platoons of a the FA battalion become widely dispersed around the flanks of a
penetration, the FA battalion may need to run a modified echeloned trains operation or
coordinate support through other FA and maneuver units until normal resupply lines are
restored.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-7

Chapter 6
 Coordinate for forward triage of wounded personnel and forward repair of damaged equipment
to return to combat effectiveness rapidly.
 Consider means for controlling movement of detainees and dislocated civilians to the brigade
support area.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-50. Use digital communications whenever possible. Plan redundant communications means.

6-51. Coordinate additional FA fires when survival or unplanned tactical moves temporarily hinder
battalion or battery mission support. Identify FS requirements for stay-behind forces. Ensure commander’s
guidance addresses control of scatterable mines and dud and crater producing munitions, especially when
friendly counterattacks are expected.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-52. Coordinate for engineer support and Class IV materials to harden positions and reduce the
effectiveness of enemy weapons systems. Plan for use of direct fire in support of battery and platoon
defenses. Use CFZs to increase protection of key friendly units. Pay increased attention to operations
security considerations concerning trash and abandoned equipment. Review emergency destruction
procedures. Anticipate the need for survivability moves after the battalion has provided extended or intense
massed fires. In a CBRN environment, identify and plan for movement avoiding contaminated routes.
SECTION V – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION SUPPORT OF OTHER

TACTICAL OPERATIONS
6-53. The section describes techniques and considerations for FA battalion support of other tactical
operations. These techniques are common to both the offense and the defense.
AIR ASSAULT OPERATIONS

6-54. Tailor the air assault task force for a specific mission. As an example, the task force may consist of
an infantry battalion, an aviation company, and a FA battery. Overall command goes to the air assault task
force commander. Air assaults seize objectives in depth and conduct penetration, covering force, or
surveillance tasks. Air assaults may occur in urban areas, jungles, and mountains to reinforce threatened
sectors.
6-55. FA battalion participation in an air assault is characterized by maximum decentralization of mission
command. Firing units move to quickly provide FA fires to engage targets in depth, to bypass enemy
concentrations or untrafficable terrain, and to facilitate future operations. FA battalion and supporting FA
units can expect to conduct SEAD, landing zone preparations, and artillery raids. Artillery raids involve the
rapid movement of artillery assets by air into position to attack a high-payoff target. A FA raid normally
requires operations across the forward line of own troops, is short in duration, and does not involve
sustained operations. Detailed planning, surprise, and speed of execution are key factors for success.
6-56. For more information on air assault operations, see FM 3-99.
6-57. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of air assault are discussed in the following
paragraphs.
6-8 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015


6-58. Coordinate load plans to ensure critical elements are cross-loaded to prevent catastrophic loss in the
event of downed aircraft. Initially conduct reconnaissance by map and air. Plan for air or ground
displacement.
6-59. Imagery can aid in identifying potential firing points, the general topography of the land, and major
routes in the area. The supported maneuver unit S-2 and supported higher HQ S-2 can assist in templating
FA and non-FA enemy forces in the air assault area and in identifying primary threats.
EMPLOY FIRES

6-61. Request forward observers to accompany leading elements of the assault force to observe and adjust
SEAD fires and execute the FA tasks in support of the air assault. Coordinate with air reconnaissance and
air scouts for target identification and attack.
Deliver Fires
6-62. Execute fires to support the air movement plan. Fires initiated and terminated according to a strict
time schedule. Other fires rely on phase lines, air control points and other control measures to initiate, shift,
and terminate fires. Coordinate for meteorological data in the new position area. Give priority to
intelligence collection to ensure accurate location of enemy air defense. Ensure command posts and platoon
FDCs understand priorities for SEAD. Plan fires for false insertions in support of the deception plan.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-64. Use aircraft and coordinate retransmission during the movement to ensure continuous
communication between the fires cell controlling fires and the assets providing those fires. Plan and
coordinate visual signals (for example, flares and colored smoke). Coordinate signal between air assault
forces and supporting forces.

6-65. Coordinate short and intense SEAD fires along the flight route(s) to aid aircraft flying past areas of
known or suspected enemy antiaircraft positions. Consider the use of all SEAD assets: electronic warfare,
FA, close air support, and attack helicopters. Plan to lift and shift fires, airspace coordination areas (formal
and informal), and other FSCMs as needed to coincide with arrival times of aircraft formations. Ensure use
of FA or mortar smoke on or near landing zones meets commander’s guidance and does not interfere with
air or ground operations.
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-66. Ensure adequate ammunition is available for the artillery supporting the assault force. Plan,
prioritize, and synchronize resupply of sustainment materiel, primarily Class V.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-9

Chapter 6
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-67. Consider enemy air, ground, and artillery threats when planning moves because units are most
vulnerable in pickup and landing zones. Consider the effects of munitions in the landing zone or pickup
zone (for example, improved conventional munitions duds and high explosive and point detonating
cratering) that may make the area unusable. Be prepared to provide 6,400-mil observation and firing
capability, as required. Consider positioning units for mutual defense by taking maximum advantage of
available intelligence and air photographs.
AIRBORNE OPERATIONS
6-68. Airborne operations are joint operations conducted between the Army and Air Force. The Air Force
provides airlift, close air support, and air resupply for ground forces. FA battalion and supporting FA units
are normally attached to maneuver units for airborne operations (for example, FA battery or platoon
attached to a maneuver battalion). The higher HQ of the FA units assumes control of subordinate units
upon arrival in the airhead and resumes its command relationship. During BCT airborne operations, the FA
battalion provides an assault command post to control FA assets.
6-69. For more information on airborne operations, see FM 3-99.
6-70. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of airborne operations are discussed in the
following paragraphs.

6-71. Conduct initial reconnaissance by map or air. Plan displacement using air assets. Consider
decentralized control for unit movement.
6-72. Air photography can be extremely helpful in identifying potential firing points, better understanding
the general topography of the land, and major routes in the area from friendly and enemy perspectives. The
supported maneuver unit S-2 and supported higher HQ S-2 may be able to assist in templating any enemy
forces that can affect or are located in the drop zone.
EMPLOY FIRES

6-74. Use air observers to include UAS, and national level assets. Deploy weapons locating radars as soon
as practical after the initial assault.
Deliver Fires
6-75. Execute fires to support the air movement plan. Plan non-cratering munitions on airfields. Mass
available indirect fire systems, to include mortars. Ensure units have a 6,400-mil capability. Prepare to use
hasty survey techniques in the drop zone. Establish a common grid for FA and mortars as soon as possible.
Coordinate meteorological data for the area of operations.
EXERCISE CONTROL
6-10 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Communicate
6-77. Initially use primarily frequency modulation communications. Communicate by tactical satellite
means when available. Establish amplitude modulation radio communications for use over long distances.
Use visual signals and messengers for short-distance communications.

6-78. Rely on digital imagery and air photography when maps are not available. Ensure positive clearance
of fires, which is essential during initial stages of the operation. Because drop zones are frequently out of
range of supporting cannon FA, more reliance on joint FS assets (for example, Air Force manned or
unmanned observation and attack aircraft and naval FS) may be necessary.
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-79. Resupply requires careful planning and coordination, especially Class V, as airborne units have
limited sustainment capability. Supplies are usually airdropped or air-landed (for example, containerized
delivery or mass supply). Inspect weapons and equipment for damage after an airdrop. Conduct medical
evacuation by air.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-80. Position units based on enemy ground, air, and artillery threats, as well as, the amount of space
provided by the expanding airhead. Be prepared to provide 6,400-mil observation and firing capability, as
required. Position units for mutual defense. Prepare unit defense taking maximum advantage of available
intelligence and air photographs.
URBAN OPERATIONS
6-81. Urban operations are characterized by extreme limitations on freedom to maneuver. Both attacking
and defending forces must use available cover and concealment offered by urban areas, but both are equally
hampered by reduced visibility. While the defender normally has the advantage, operations are slow and
deliberate and small-unit operations predominate. The defender enjoys superior protection as well as
concealment and covered routes of movement. The attacker can isolate and bypass certain areas; but is
forced to fight into other, well-defended areas.
6-82. FA battalion units can use positions in villages and small towns to great advantage. Barns and other
large buildings offer complete concealment of weapons, HQ elements, supplies, and equipment. Normally,
decentralization is required. Detailed orders and tactical standard operating procedures are necessary due to
decreased communication ranges and extended frontages for firing units. FA techniques of assault fire and
direct fire may be required more often in urban terrain than elsewhere.
6-83. For more information on urban operations, see FM 3-06.
6-84. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of urban operations are discussed in the
following paragraphs.

6-85. Ensure position areas will support emplacement since there is a predominance of concrete surfaces in
urban areas. Anticipate the possibility that street rubble may hamper movement. Anticipate increased
movements to overcome obstruction and dead space. Ensure howitzer positions allow for high-angle firing.
Position FA on the edge of the urban area, if possible. Provide multiple routes of escape from the position.
Select howitzer positions that allow direct fire capability. Consider the need for multiple survey control
points. Anticipate difficulties due to obstructions and electro-magnetic interference (for example, structural
metal, power lines, and transformers).
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-11

Chapter 6
6-86. Closely coordinate targeting efforts to ensure protected areas and FSCMs are identified and posted to
automated and manual systems. Determine the status and disposition (for example, friendly, enemy, and
neutral) of the civilian population. Is the enemy using the civilian population for cover?
EMPLOY FIRES

6-88. Identify size and location of dead space where indirect area fires cannot reach. Dead space is
generally five times the height of buildings for low-angle fire and one-half the height of buildings for high-
angle fire for area munitions. Plan precision munitions to cover dead space. Plan radar coverage to take
advantage of the increase in enemy high-angle fires. Radars lose effectiveness if positioned too close
behind buildings.
Deliver Fires
6-89. Use variable time fuzes carefully to avoid premature detonation. Use caution in the adjustment of
fires. Observers may lose sight of rounds detonating behind building or other structures. The FA battalion
may support numerous small-scale close engagements. This involves frequent shifting of fires from one
mission to the next. The FA battalion may need to shift ongoing missions between firing units if battle
movements or adjustments move the fires into the dead space of the initial firing unit. More frequently,
FDCs must account for bursting radius, delivery errors, and standard deviations. Reference cards, tactical
standard operating procedures, and rehearsals are critical in ensuring timely clearance of fires.
6-90. Commanders may require close control of white phosphorous projectiles, since they may create
unwanted fires and smoke. Use a delay or concrete-piercing fuze to penetrate fortifications and buildings.
Plan for increased use of high-angle fires. Use precision-guided munitions to engage targets in area
munitions dead space or to minimize collateral damage. Consider an increase in ammunition expenditure,
especially if other fires assets are not available. To provide maximum flexibility in urban operations,
consider the use of a FA composite battalion. Consider use of infrared illumination if friendly forces are
properly equipped.
6-91. Determine the limitations of laser designators in urban terrain, which may include:
 The difficulty in maintaining a continuous laser track on moving targets because of structure
interference.
 The presence of highly reflective surfaces, such as windows that may refract laser energy or pose
a hazard to friendly troops.
 Presence of highly absorptive surfaces such as open windows or tunnels, which may degrade
designator effectiveness.
 It may be hard to position designators to ensure Angle T does not exceed 800 mils.
 Determining accurate locations by map spot can be difficult.
 Smoke and dust dispersing the laser.
EXERCISE CONTROL
6-12 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Communicate
6-93. Anticipate reduction of radio ranges due to line of sight problems. Increase use of wire, messenger,
and visual signals. Route wire through sewers and buildings for protection. Plan to remote antennas to
upper floors to increase their range. Do not position antennas on rooftops since they will be vulnerable to
fires and possibly give away unit locations. Locate generators near existing walls outside occupied
buildings. Use existing civilian telephone systems for unsecured communications, when possible.

6-94. To the maximum extent possible, avoid collateral damage to civilian populations. Well-defined
priorities of fire are extremely important in urban operations. Consider use of air observers. Consider use of
observers on overlooking terrain outside the city and using external routes for observer movement. Review
the ROE carefully. The supported higher HQ and battalion or squadron FSO will encounter more detailed
ROE and lists of protected or restricted sites and areas during urban operations. FSCMs usage may
increase. Identify potentially hazardous industrial, cultural, and other protected sites that may require
restrictive FSCMs. Consider underground danger areas, such as gas, water, and power lines. A natural gas
explosion or electrical fire near a protected structure, civilians, or friendly troops can become a ROE
violation. Coordinate FA fires carefully due to the close proximity of friendly and enemy units (for
example, use of a numbering system for each building may aid in coordinating fires within close proximity
of friendly troops).
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-95. Anticipate an increased use of certain munitions (for example, delay and concrete piercing fuzes,
high explosive, smoke, Excalibur, or precision guidance kit). Use several smaller resupply convoys if
movement is restricted. Anticipate difficulty moving large sustainment vehicles inside firing positions. Use
locally available power sources and supplies, when available. Plan for increased time for resupply actions.
Consider use of prestocked supplies.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-96. Use existing structures as hardened positions. Ensure stability of building structure prior to
occupation. Shock waves may cause weak walls and ceilings to collapse. Plan to increase observation posts
and listening posts, as terrain allows threat forces to infiltrate and get closer to artillery positions. Plan foot
traffic routes to minimize exposure from observation and sniper fires from tall buildings. Consider using
supplemental positions for battery or platoon defense. Avoid obvious positions if possible (for example,
parks and schoolyards). Establish guidance and drills for key situations (for example, snipers and
minefields), to include consideration for unseen dangers (for example, underground gas, water, electrical
lines, or improvised explosive devices).
ENCIRCLED FORCES
6-97. The FA battalion may support the breakout of encircled forces as part of the encircled force, or from
outside the encirclement. Determine considerations as part of the encircled force, which may include:
 Identify FA, FS, and target acquisition assets within the encirclement and direct or participate in
the reorganization. Ensure centralized control where possible and recommend the establishment
of a force field artillery HQ, as required.
 Complete 6,400-mil coverage.
 Retain the capability to mass fires, as required.
 Plan for air resupply of ammunition and critical items.
 Plan to reallocate ammunition to support the fire unit(s) supporting the breakout.
 Identify FA outside the encirclement that can range the FA battalion’s zone of fire and
coordinate support if possible.
 Reorganize FS communications to minimize overloading of these networks.
 Stress survival techniques.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-13

Chapter 6
 Identify appropriate FSCMs, such as a restrictive fire area or a restrictive fire line.
 Review existing or necessary airspace coordinating measures.
 Consider the use of censor zones by the weapons locating radars over friendly FA units in both
the encircled force and the main force areas to prevent fratricide.
 Plan for restrictions on firing and reallocation of ammunition caused by shortages of munitions.
 Plan to mass fires to support the main breakout effort, but ensure as much 6,400-mil coverage as
possible.
6-98. The FA battalion should be neither the first nor the last unit out of the perimeter during a breakout of
an encirclement. If more than one firing element is within the perimeter, phase the withdrawal to maximize
the time FA fires are available. Consider external FA support if available. Maintain unit integrity at platoon
or battery level. The FA battalion commander must keep in contact with both the lead element commander
and the forces remaining in the perimeter. Moving units must anticipate emergency occupations. During
linkup, the FA battalion commander determines considerations, which may include:
 Integrate fires with the breakout plan and establish FSCMs.
 Position weapons to support the relieving force.
 Plan for subsequent actions to include follow-on missions for the FA.
 Establish and exchange weapons locating radar zone information.
PASSAGE OF LINES
6-99. Coordination and synchronization during passage of lines is critical. The details on an FA battalion
conducting forward and rearward passage of lines follows.
FORWARD PASSAGE
6-100. During an offensive passage of lines, responsibility for FA fires passes from the stationary force to
the passing force at the same time control passes to the maneuver units. The stationary FA force may be
attached to the passing FA force or it may be ordered to reinforce the passing FA force from its present
positions, until the passing force has moved out of range. Considerations, for forward passage of lines
include:
 Establish liaison and communications with the stationary FA HQ.
 Obtain and review the passage plans of the supported force.
 Determine security requirements.
 Obtain available target lists and fire plans from the stationary force.
 Plan and review position areas and routes.
 Review possible enemy observation capabilities in the area.
 Review existing, in effect, and needed FSCMs, ACMs, and airspace plans.
 Consider resupply operations for the future.
 Coordinate elements that are needed forward.
 Exchange survey data with the stationary FA HQ.
 Exchange radar zone data.
 Plan for follow-on mission(s).
REARWARD PASSAGE
6-101. Withdrawal actions in the defense often involve a rearward passage of lines. This often occurs
when a covering force withdraws behind the forward edge of the battle area. FA units with each force
exchange liaison and critical information as early as possible. They coordinate fire plans to synchronize and
maximize their combined firepower. This includes the transfer of FA support responsibilities within the
maneuver unit’s sector. This transfer usually coincides with the passing of maneuver control.
Considerations for rearward passage of lines include:
 Exchange FA fire plans.
6-14 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Establish communications requirements.

 Coordinate clearance of position areas and routes, as required.
 Coordinate resupply, if appropriate.
 Exchange survey data in the area with the passing brigade FSO and survey planning and
coordination officer (additional duty).
 Establish and exchange recognition signals with the stationary force.
RELIEF IN PLACE
6-102. Normally, the FA units will not be relieved at the same time as the maneuver forces. The change of
FA responsibilities is as agreed upon by the two FA commanders unless otherwise directed.
6-103. During a relief in place, the outgoing force passes fire plans to the incoming force so those plans
can be continued. Both FA commanders determine considerations, which may include:
 Establish liaison and communications between FA units.
 Exchange signal information.
 The incoming FA unit reviews and, if necessary, adjusts fire plans to support the incoming force.
 Establish procedures for the relief.
 Establish the tasks of the outgoing FA.
 Disseminate specific tactical standard operating procedure items of the incoming force.
 Disseminate the current target list to the incoming force.
 Plan fires to support or emplace a barrier or obstacle, as required.
 Plan smoke to screen friendly movements.
 Support the deception plan.
 Displacement of relieved artillery units, movement, and emplacement of relieving artillery units
to avoid reduction of support or alerting the enemy.
GAP CROSSING OPERATIONS

6-104. Determine considerations during an offensive gap crossing (deliberate, hasty, or covert), which
may include:
 Air observers and UAS can provide surveillance beyond the gap depending on availability and
visibility. Smoke may limit ground observation.
 Consider using CFZs, with well defined cueing techniques, on the gap-crossing site, associated
assembly areas, and air defense positions.
 Fire series and groups to neutralize the bridgehead area and then to isolate it. Use in depth fires
to prevent or delay enemy reinforcements.
 Position firing units to facilitate rapid crossing of the maneuver force.
 Ammunition expenditures of smoke and, possibly, illuminating projectiles may be high during a
deliberate crossing. Consider air resupply initially to the far bank to offset congested crossing
sites, or stockpiling it in logistics sites along firing platoons’ routes of march to the crossing site.
 Maintaining communications is critical when units are split on the two banks of the gap
crossing.
 FA battalion units should displace to far bank positions as soon as maneuver units seize first-
phase objectives on the far bank and secure FA positions are available. FA units must cross the
gap before their supported maneuver units move out of range. FA crossings require well-planned
integration into the overall combined arms movement plan.
 Survey assets should cross as soon as possible. When a survey team equipped with survey
crosses a wet gap by barge or boat, ensure plans allocate time for it to do a ten minute zero-
velocity update just before crossing.
6-105. Considerations during a retrograde gap crossing (deliberate, hasty, or covert) include:
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-15

Chapter 6
 Anticipate fires to the flanks on enemy crossing sites and infiltrating forces involved in enemy
flanking efforts.
 Consider using CFZs, with well defined cueing techniques, on the gap-crossing site, associated
assembly areas, and air defense positions.
 Use call for fire zones and templating to locate enemy FA that attempts to interdict friendly
routes of withdrawal, reinforcement, and resupply.
 Plan for increased close combat fires (for example, final protective fires, smoke, and scatterable
mines) and massed fire missions to assist disengagement and withdrawal of the last maneuver
elements across the gap.
 Move FA across the gap as soon as possible, while maintaining mission capability, to avoid
entrapment or congestion.
 If the maneuver force plans to establish defensive positions across the gap, and stabilize the
forward line of own troops, consider engineer support to harden FA and forward observer and
FIST positions across the gap.
 FA battalion units may be able to move into hardened positions vacated by supporting FA units.
However, consider the risks that the previous firing may have compromised the positions.
BREACHING OPERATIONS
6-106. Breaching is a synchronized combined-arms operation under the control of a maneuver
commander. Breaching operations begin when friendly forces detect an obstacle and begin to apply the
breaching fundamentals, and they end when battle handover has occurred between follow-on forces and a
unit conducting the breaching operation. Considerations for breaching operations include:
 Provide suppressive indirect fires. Anticipate the need for high volumes of suppressive and
obscuration ammunition. Develop expeditionary support packages to support breaching related
FS tasks and schedule delivery to maximize ammunition resupply operations.
 Provide fires during phases of the breaching (for example, suppress, obscure, secure, reduce, and
assault). For more information, see FM 3-09.
 Alternate plans are especially critical to maintaining suppressive and obscuration fires while the
breaching team is exposed.
 Unplanned breaching operations may require that the FA battalion S-3 quickly review
ammunition status for impact on other tasks.
 Position a forward observer or FIST member forward to coordinate fires for the breaching team.
Plan for observers in depth, including air observers and UAS.
 All FA firing units must understand the primary and alternate triggering plans to shift fires to the
assault force.
 Anticipate SEAD fires if air assets participate in the operation.
 Consider using scatterable mines to prevent reinforcement or counterattack. Ensure it does not
interfere with the breaching or the follow-on assault.
 Coordinate weapons locating radar coverage and zones in support of the breaching operation.
 Plan for extensive use of smoke and possibly illumination.
 Consider use of infrared illumination during night breaches.
 Avoid use of dual-purpose improved conventional munitions on or near the breaching site and
avenues of advance due to the possibility of hazardous duds.
 Position artillery forward, but clear of avenues of approach.
 Be prepared to quickly move firing units through the breach.
6-107. For more information on breaching operations, see ATTP 3-90.4.
SECURITY OPERATIONS
6-108. Units conduct security operations tasks to provide early warning of enemy operations, to provide
the force being protected with time and space within which to react, and to develop the situation for the
6-16 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

protected force. The five types of security operations tasks are screen, guard, cover, area, and local, which
respectively contain increasing levels of combat power and security. Local security operations tasks are not
discussed. The FA battalion commander and staff must understand the differences in these tasks and the
implications for the FA battalions.
6-109. For more information on security operations, see FM 3-90-2.
COVERING FORCE OPERATIONS

6-110. The covering force is a tactically self-contained security force operating a considerable distance to
the front or rear of a moving or stationary force. Offensive covering force operations emphasize
reconnaissance along the main body’s axis of advance and attempt to destroy the enemy’s reconnaissance
and security forces, determine enemy force dispositions, identify gaps or weaknesses that the main body
can exploit, and to defeat and destroy forces, as directed. Defensive covering operations focus on counter
reconnaissance. They attempt to prevent the main body from being surprised, to defeat the enemy’s
reconnaissance and advance elements, determine the size and direction of the enemy’s main attack, and
delay and disorganize enemy forces in order to allow the main body additional time to prepare its defense.
Covering force operations are frequently fast-paced operations involving extended forces operating over
long distances.
6-111. A FA battalion may be part of a larger covering force operation where a FAB functions as the
force field artillery HQ. The FA battalion will provide organic FS to its BCT, but may also have a support
relationship of reinforcing, general support-reinforcing or general support. If directed by the maneuver
commander, the FA battalion may serve as the covering force FA HQ. In either case, the FA battalion may
have one or more attached or reinforcing howitzer batteries from a FAB. Considerations for FA battalion
and supporting FA units involved in covering force operations include:
 Locate the enemy and provide responsive fires to leading elements and elements in contact.
 Use priority of fires and quickfire channels.
 Attack targets in depth with massed fires to prevent enemy reinforcements.
 Plan for hasty attack contingencies.
 Anticipate frequent moves and emergency fire missions.
 Keep ammunition uploaded.
 Plan for employment of hasty smoke, illumination, and increased suppressive fires.
 Plan to use scatterable mines to delay enemy formations and employ Excalibur and precision
guidance kit for selected high-payoff targets.
 Prepare for the use of permissive, on order FSCMs and rapidly moving forward line of own
troops requiring frequent position updates.
 Plan for a passage of lines, by reviewing passage of lines procedures.
 Position supporting FA forward. Consider future missions in selecting FA positions when the
covering force operation nears completion.
SCREEN
6-112. Screen describes a force whose primary task is to observe, identify, and report information. A
screen force fights only in self-protection. The screening force maintains surveillance, provides early
warning to the main body, destroys enemy reconnaissance elements within its capability, and impedes and
harasses the enemy. Indirect fires are a significant means of impeding and harassing the enemy. FA
planning and execution in support of a screen mission is similar to that for a defense in sector mission.
GUARD
6-113. Guard describes a force whose primary task is to protect the main force by fighting to gain time,
while also observing and reporting information, and to prevent enemy ground observation or direct fire
against the main body by reconnoitering, attacking, defending, and delaying. A guard force normally
operates within the range of the main body's indirect fire weapons. The FA battalion supporting this
operation, plans, prepares, and executes this mission as it would for any other security operations task.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-17

Chapter 6
AREA SECURITY
6-114. Units conduct area security operations to protect friendly forces, installations, and actions in a
specific area. Area security preserves the force commander’s freedom to move his reserves, position FS
assets, conduct operations, and provide for sustainment operations. Area security actions, which may be
offensive or defensive in nature, could include area reconnaissance; sustainment operations; and security of
designated personnel, equipment, facilities, and critical points. Applications of area security missions are
convoy and route security. FA battalion considerations, for area security, are similar to those identified to
support the brigade support area.
BASE AND BRIGADE SUPPORT AREA SECURITY

6-115. The objective of base security is to maintain a secure position, defending in all directions. The
commander can employ base security when conducting either offensive or defensive operations. The
supported higher HQ establishes base security when the supported unit must hold critical terrain in areas
where the defense is not tied in with adjacent units. The supported higher HQ can also form a perimeter and
conduct base security when it has been bypassed and isolated by the enemy, and must defend in place.
6-116. Security operations must synchronize the sustainment operations functions of terrain management,
security, sustainment, and movement in consonance with the supported higher HQ commander's concept
and intent.
6-117. A FA battalion must employ fires throughout the supported higher HQ area of operations, to
include FS for base and brigade support area operations. The supported higher HQ fires cell plans fires and
coordinates the clearance of airspace for the base and brigade support area operations. The FA battalion S-3
should consider position area selection, nonstandard mission assignment, on order mission of reinforcing
FA when developing plans to execute FA fires in support of base and brigade support area operations.
6-118. While the division and corps fires cells are the primary planners and coordinators of division and
sustainment area fires, FAB battalions may participate in the reinforcing, general support-reinforcing and
general support fires process. They may assist in coordinating fire plans with nearby sustainment units or
host nation military, paramilitary, or civil authorities. They may also provide call for fire training to key
personnel, especially those responsible for base cluster defenses.
6-119. Three levels of response to threats serve as guides for planning brigade support area operations.
These levels focus on the nature of the friendly actions needed to defeat the threat, which may include:
 Level I. Smaller threats that the base or base cluster self-defense measures can defeat.
 Level II. Threats beyond the capability of the base or base cluster self-defenses, but relatively
small response forces (for example, military police) can defeat.
 Level III. Threats that require commitment of a combined arms tactical combat force to defeat.
6-120. These threats can result from enemy forces infiltrating the base and brigade support area. A
successful defense against a Level III threat requires planning and preparation for the tactical combat
force’s employment. The S-3 should consider the use of fires in support of tactical combat force security
operations.
6-121. Commanders will generally provide FA fires for Level III threats or in support of a military police
force engaging a Level II threat in an area where the possibility of collateral damage is reduced. These
threats can result from enemy forces infiltrating the base and brigade support area. A successful defense
against a Level III threat requires planning and preparation for the tactical combat force’s employment. The
S-3 should consider the use of fires in support of tactical combat force security operations.
6-122. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of base and brigade support area security
are:
 Deploy and conduct movement.
 Employ fires.
 Exercise control.
6-18 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 FS coordination.
 Protect the force.

6-123. Brigade support area FSOs can assist FA battalions and supporting FA with terrain management
issues. Level III threats may cause significant traffic as sustainment units and civilians move away from the
threat. The FA battalion may need to request priority for movement and military police assistance if
available. Consider positioning of firing elements to provide supporting fires.
6-124. The S-2 should closely monitor developing situations in the brigade support area to better
anticipate potential battalion involvement and determine the nature and extent of enemy brigade support
area threats.
EMPLOY FIRES
6-125. FA units must quickly review assigned FS tasks and other tasks to determine the impact of brigade
support area missions. If the FS plans are not adequate, the unit should notify the supported higher HQ fires
cell and the force field artillery HQ (if established) so the FS tasks can be reassigned or terminated.
Ammunition restrictions on scatterable mines and dud producing munitions may limit FA to high explosive
rounds, except in major penetrations. Illumination may require high-angle fire to allow safe firing. Consider
fire hazards.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communications
6-127. Communication with the higher HQ fires cell may be difficult due to distances. A FA battalion
may need to relay fire planning and FS coordination information through another FA battalion or even a
battalion or squadron fires cell. Nonstandard communications arrangements may be necessary. Sustainment
units may not have digital equipment that interface with FA systems. Host nation civil or paramilitary
forces may not have compatible radios.
Fire Support Coordination

6-128. Commander’s guidance, FSCMs, and ROE for FA fires in brigade support areas are generally
restrictive in nature (for example, restrictive fire areas and no-fire areas). The supported commander may
task the FA battalion in support of a brigade support area to provide forward observers or FSOs to assist
with support area operations. Fire mission requests in brigade support areas may frequently involve
untrained observers. A FA battalion may participate in development of a hasty fire plan with the FSO of a
responding tactical combat force, military police, and other response forces. Consider using restrictive fire
lines to control fires between converging friendly forces.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-129. The FA battalion and other FA units may request other joint fires assets when available.
STATIC POSITIONS
6-130. Static positions create a 6,400-mil defense for basing units. These static positions are a secure area
and most would have guard towers, indirect fire protection, and an infrastructure to support the unit. Many
times the support elements of the supported higher HQ are in the same static positions as the combat unit.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-19

Chapter 6
6-131. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of static positions include deploy and
conduct movement, develop intelligence, employ fires, exercise control, perform sustainment, and protect
the force.

6-132. Prepare to conduct battery and platoon operations. Understand the theater specific ROE and
collateral damage estimation procedures. Employment of a firing element may require coordination with
adjacent units in order to properly manage terrain.
6-133. Air photography can be extremely helpful in identifying potential firing points, better
understanding the general topography of the land, and major routes in the area from friendly and enemy
perspectives. The supported maneuver unit S-2 may be able to assist in templating FA and non-FA enemy
forces in the forward operating base or fire base area. Incorporate intelligence gathering and source
development into patrol plans and other contacts with the local population.
EMPLOY FIRES
6-134. Determine the impacts of the terrain on the specific type of howitzer being employed. Consider
immediate and intervening crests. Consider ability to access survey data and aiming points dependent on
weapon system and its ability to conduct degraded operations. Consider potential requirements to displace
in support of the maneuver force. Select alternate and supplementary positions. Position firing elements for
mutual support.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-136. Determine the primary and alternate means of communication and provide redundancy. Consider
the use of line of sight and non-line of sight communications.

6-137. One FDC may provide control and technical and tactical fire direction for one to six howitzers at
one static location. Consider redundant means of communication and fire direction.
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-138. Determine location of maintenance support team. Support assets should be readily available. Use
mutual support for common chassis vehicles, if available. Determine primary and alternate means of
support for classes of supplies. Determine required supply rate and controlled supply rate. Determine assets
available to deliver ammunition. Use mutually supporting transportation assets, if available. Consider
emplacement of ammunition resupply vehicles and required material handling equipment. Consider
hazardous material restrictions in theater.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-139. Position units based on enemy ground, air, and artillery threats, as well as, the amount of space
provided by the supported higher HQ. Be prepared to provide 6,400-mil firing and weapons locating radar
capability. Always position units to provide for mutual defense of the area. Prepare unit defense taking
maximum advantage of available intelligence and air photographs. Update intelligence and security by
contacts developing sources among any local population.
6-20 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

LINKUP OPERATIONS
6-140. Linkup operations join two friendly forces. Both forces may be moving toward one another or one
may be stationary. Often, a linkup operation requires a passage of lines. When the linkup is made, the
linkup force may join the stationary force or it may pass through or around and continue the attack. The
controlling HQ of both forces establishes the command relationship between the two forces and the
responsibilities for each. It also establishes the control measures. Considerations for linkup operations
include:
 As the linkup nears completion, consider future operations in positioning of FA battalion
elements.
 Plan for the increased use of on-order restrictive fire lines and coordinated fire lines.
 Place increased emphasis on maintaining updated position locations FSCMs and ACMs in both
automated and manual systems.
 Anticipate blocking fires to prevent trapped enemy forces from escaping the linking forces.
 Ensure clearance of fires procedures address contingencies and FA forces. General support or
general support-reinforcing FAB units may need to clear fires with both linking forces.
 Exchange targeting and communications information, triggers, quickfire channels, laser
designation codes, and other essential items.
 Exchange recognition signals and disseminate to personnel.
 FA battalions supporting linking forces should consider exchanging liaison. If the linkup
involves a stationary and moving force, the moving FA HQ should provide liaison to the
stationary FA HQ.
ARTILLERY RAID OPERATIONS

6-141. An artillery raid is a type of spoiling attack that uses FA as its primary attack mechanism. Raid
missions support the supported higher HQ objectives by sending firing elements forward to engage enemy
targets that are currently beyond the maximum range of available FA weapons. Raids may occur in
conjunction with a large ground attack that seizes the terrain needed for the firing unit, with a small force
that creates a relatively small moving pocket, or even without a significant ground force (if the threat is
low). Towed FA units may conduct airmobile FA raids. An artillery raid is frequently a platoon or battery-
sized operation, but can involve an entire battalion.
ARTILLERY RAID TECHNIQUES

6-142. The artillery raid consists of the unit selection, raid briefing, execution of the raid, and checklists.
Details of the artillery raid techniques follow.
Unit Selection
6-143. If supported higher HQ does not specify the firing element, the battalion S-3 determines which unit
and firing element will conduct the raid based on factors, to include:
 Number and characteristics (for example range, rate of fire) of available howitzers.
 Ammunition availability (for example, number and type of rounds).
 Location of firing element (for example, proximity to firing points).
 Tactical situation.
 Personnel (for example, amount, training, and experience).
Raid Briefing
6-144. For cross forward line of own troops operations, the battalion HQ will conduct a raid briefing with
the commander of the selected battery and platoon. If available, the commander of the maneuver security
force should be present during the briefing in order to enable coordination. Due to time constraints or travel
distance involved, a face-to-face meeting with the maneuver commander may not be feasible. For raids to
be conducted behind the forward line of own troops with minimal external assistance, raid missions may be
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-21

Chapter 6
passed via radio (voice or digital). The battalion commander or S-3 conducts the raid briefing, which may
include:
 SITUATION. Friendly, enemy, attachments, and detachments.
 MISSION. Who, what, when, where, and why (for example, the size of the element to conduct
raid, method of control, and target and firing point grids).
 EXECUTION
 Route.
 Start point, check point, and release point locations.
 FA position areas.
 Rally point after mission.
 Target grids.
 Firing window or time on target.
 Number and type rounds per target.
 Number of howitzers required.
 Call signs and frequencies.
 FSCMs and ACMs.
 Abort authority and abort code word.
 Emergency destruction criteria.
 FS assets available.
 Link up-point with maneuver element guides.
 Protection (for example, air defense artillery, electronic warfare, FS assets, and escort).
 Passage lane and passage point.
 Procedures and signals for passage of lines.
 Maneuver call signs and frequencies.
 Maneuver commander name and rank.
 Medical and casualty evacuation.
 SUSTAINMENT
 Maintenance support and contact team requirements.
 Survey support available.
 Reload requirements.
 Amount of ammunition to be brought forward.
 Rearming and refueling support.
 COMMAND AND SIGNAL
 Retransmission location and frequency.
 Command nodes (for example, FDC vehicle and antennae).
Execution of the Raid

6-145. Identify responsibilities and outline steps for the actual execution of the raid, which may include:
 Firing units will carry forward only the number of vehicles necessary to accomplish the mission
as designated by battalion. Depending on the importance of the target, one additional howitzer
will be brought forward and laid on the target in case of technical or mechanical difficulties.
Weapons platforms with automated fire control systems will move forward with the mission in
their system and a hardcopy of the mission in case manual fire mission processing is required.
 The officer in charge or noncommissioned officer in charge of the raid party will brief the
maneuver unit commander or representative at link up point or via communications as directed.
 Once the brief is conducted, the leader of the raid unit or a maneuver escort will bring the firing
elements to the link-up points.
 Security force will move forward and clear the route to the firing point.
6-22 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 If possible, report link-up, movement and checkpoints, and in position to battery or platoon
FDC. If necessary, a vehicle will be brought forward with the raid element to act as a relay
between the raid element and the controlling raid HQ if constant communications is required. If
not, the communication will be maintained between the supported unit HQ, the battalion
command post, and the raid officer in charge. The raid officer in charge must be prepared to
accept target updates prior to the designated time.
 Once the maneuver security force has cleared the route, the firing element will be called forward
to the firing points.
 The mission(s) is (are) fired. Units will report shot on each target and rounds complete to the
controlling HQ.
 Firing elements will then withdraw to a pre-designated rally point.
 If the firing unit was briefed that it was to perform a follow-on mission, the unit would proceed
to the next location and fire the mission. Upon rounds complete, the firing element will
withdraw to the rally point.
 Battalion will provide abort criteria.
Checklists
6-146. The use of checklists can assist raid planners. Develop checklists as part of the unit tactical
standard operating procedure or battle books. Provided is an example of a battalion level checklist for an
artillery raid operation in table 6-1 on page 6-24.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-23

Chapter 6
Table 6-1. Artillery raid planning checklist (example)

ARTILLERY RAID PLANNING CHECKLIST (BATTALION)
ITEM ACTIVITY
1 Verify raid order contains all pertinent data.

2 If not specified, what size FA unit is necessary for a successful mission?
3 Who is the raid force commander (for example, maneuver or FA)?
4 What protection assets will support the raid force?
Maneuver Force?
Fire Support Plan?
Air Defense?
Reconnaissance and Security?
Radar?
Observers?
5 What are the ABORT criteria?
6 What frequencies will be used to command the raid?
7 Any updates on enemy and friendly situation that impact on raid?
8 What is the route (does it require clearance by a maneuver commander)?
9 Passage of Lines.
Linkup Routes,Grid and Time?
Maneuver Graphics?
Engineer Plan (mobility and countermobility)?
Air Defense Plan and Coverage to include the Airspace control overlay?
Fire Support and Observation Plan?
Control (Raid Battle Handover Line)?
Medical Evacuation Support?
Maintenance Support?
10 What survey support is optimal and adequate for raid force?
11 Is meteorological data available and valid?
12 Will ammunition need to be brought forward? How much?
13 What is the reload plan (approved location for reload operations)? Need to conduct reload to
complete the mission?
14 Will the firing point require clearance by a maneuver force? Will this be in addition to the
security force?
15 What is the link-up grid for coordinating with the raid force commander? When will link-up take
place?
16 What are the name, frequency, and call sign of the raid force commander and security force?
17 Notify the raid commander of the raid mission and time and place of briefing.
18 Plot firing positions, passage lanes, points, and routes.
19 Determine and verify firing elements, number of howitzers, and command structure.
20 Develop timetable (start point, time on target).
21 Brief the commander of the raid element battery or platoon.
22 Track planning and rehearsal schedule coordinated by battery and platoon.
23 Monitor and track progress of raid.
6-24 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

SECTION VI – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION SUPPORT OF STABILITY

OPERATIONS AND DEFENSE SUPPORT OF CIVIL AUTHORITIES
6-147. The FA battalion provides support for stability operations. Stability operations are joint force
operations and involve significant political considerations. The FA battalion leadership should understand
the nature of the joint, multinational, civil, and military relationships, and the cultures of our allies and the
host nation. The FA battalion’s success relies in large part on the legitimacy provided by international
agreements, the battalion’s ability to abide by established agreements, and the ROE while executing
assigned tasks.
6-148. Defense support of civil authorities are conducted within the United States. The FA battalion’s
communications infrastructure, coordination skills, and inherent mobility can enhance and assist a
command’s overall coordination and liaison effort. Potential responsibilities include enhancing effective
command, convoy operations, local security operations, and liaison.
STABILITY OPERATIONS
6-149. Stability operations encompass activities where the FA battalion is employed in areas outside the
United States. The battalion may conduct offensive and defensive tasks but may also support operations in
nontraditional, noncombat roles. Disaster relief and humanitarian assistance and security are examples.
6-150. Stability operations encompass various military missions, tasks, and activities conducted outside
the United States in coordination with other instruments of national power to maintain or reestablish a safe
and secure environment, provide essential governmental services, emergency infrastructure reconstruction,
and humanitarian relief. Stability tasks emphasize constructive effects and focus toward achieving the
desired end state. Stability tasks a FA battalion may perform include:
 Establish civil security.
 Establish civil control.
 Restore essential services.
 Support to governance.
 Support to economic and infrastructure development.
6-151. For more information on stability operations, see ADRP 3-07.
DEFENSE SUPPORT OF CIVIL AUTHORITIES

6-152. The Defense support of civil authorities is conducted in the United States. FA units contribute in
nontraditional ways during defense support of civil authorities. See ADRP 3-28 for additional information
on defense support of civil authorities.
SECTION VII – OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS

6-153. Both climate and terrain can vary widely between different operational areas. FA battalions
frequently adjust their tactics, techniques, and procedures to account for these differences. This section
describes FA battalion techniques and considerations for climate and terrain.
NIGHT OPERATIONS
6-154. The basic ingredient of successful night operations is the confidence of the individual Soldier in
his ability and equipment. This confidence stems from detailed planning and effective training. The adverse
effects of darkness require a change in techniques.
6-155. Objectives of night operations include:
 Exploit our technological advantage at night over a less sophisticated enemy.
 Achieve surprise and avoid losses that might be incurred in daylight over the same terrain.
 Compensate for advantages held by a numerically superior enemy who has air superiority.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-25

Chapter 6
 Retain the initiative by defeating enemy night operations.

6-156. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of night operations are deploy and
the force.

6-157. Plan and rehearse reconnaissance, selection, and occupation of a position area for night
occupation. Plan for increased movement times at night. Plan for the increased use of traffic control points
during movement. Guide every vehicle into position according to the track plan. Erect tentage before
darkness and check for light leaks. Install generators and light sets before darkness.
6-158. Scout high traffic routes during daytime to identify potential ambush sites, intersections, or turns
where vehicles and convoys may become misdirected or where large vehicles may have difficulty
traversing. Identify locations of military police, maneuver, and other friendly force checkpoints and patrols.
Also, identify host nation checkpoints. Verify clearance procedures are in place to ensure there are no
misunderstandings in the dark.
EMPLOY FIRES

6-160. Limited sound flash observations by forward observers may be possible to supplement radar.
Provide observation posts with night vision devices.
Deliver Fires
6-161. Adjust final protective fires and danger close targets during daylight, if possible. Establish
procedures for marking the end of the orienting line and the orienting station. During periods of relatively
low activity and stable fronts, consider firing from supplementary positions at night to reduce night
survivability moves of the platoons. Review commander’s guidance on use of illumination and smoke.
Anticipate requests for illumination in the brigade support areas when enemy infiltration risk is moderate to
high. Coordinate FSCMs and clearance of fire procedures. Obtain current friendly force locations. Plan for
the increased time to perform tasks, particularly ones as complex as hasty survey. Illumination canister may
pose a down-range hazard.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-163. Install and check communications equipment and operation of local area network systems..

6-164. Determine the specific area in which the commander desires to use smoke to degrade enemy night
vision capabilities. Ensure smoke does not degrade friendly night vision capabilities. Coordinate
distribution of ammunition as early as possible during daylight hours. Determine where infrared
illumination can and cannot be used in place of white light illumination.
6-26 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-165. Plan resupply operations at night to decrease vulnerability. Ensure adequate amounts of
illuminating and smoke projectiles are on hand and in the proper locations. Perform noisy operations while
the unit is firing. Firing will mask the noise of heavy vehicular traffic and material handling equipment.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-166. Plan and adjust on-call final protective fires around unit positions prior to darkness. Establish
direct fire sectors prior to darkness. Stress light and noise discipline. Include self-illumination in the unit
defense plan. In urban operations, consider employing and emplacing weapon locating radars at night in
order to reduce exposure to harassing and sniper fires.
COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS

6-167. Cold weather operations involve long nights, snow, and extreme cold. Weather phenomena such as
whiteouts and grey outs cause loss of depth perception, which increases the hazards of driving. Ice fogs
often form over troop concentrations and disclose their location. In extreme cold, metal becomes brittle,
hydraulic oil thickens, and parts breakage rates increase. Rates of fire for indirect fire weapons decrease as
a result of heavily clothed howitzer crews, cold weapons, and fogged lenses on fire control devices.
6-168. Winterization of equipment is critical for sustaining combat effectiveness. Indoctrination, training,
and acclimatization of individual Soldiers in cold weather environments are essential first steps to
overcoming these adversities. Thorough planning and preparation will help a FA unit fulfill its mission
while facing the extremes of this environment. Since daylight hours are shorter, maximize light availability
for preparations, reconnaissance, rehearsals, and other key activities.
6-169. For more information on cold weather operations, see ATTP 3-97.11.
6-170. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of cold weather operations include
deploy and conduct movement, develop intelligence, employ fires, exercise control, perform sustainment,
and protect the force.

6-171. Consider route reconnaissance by both ground and air. Determine ice thickness and load bearing
before crossing frozen lakes and rivers. Determine position areas prior to movement since frozen, snow-
covered terrain may limit the number of available positions. Anticipate icy road conditions and blocked
routes in mountain passes during cold weather. Hot springs exist in some cold weather locations. They may
freeze during extreme cold but will weaken and thaw before other areas. Plan for increased movement
times due to local conditions. Use air assets, if available, to position artillery weapons. Train Soldiers to
operate equipment on ice and snow. Enforce track plans in the position area.
6-172. Increase air reconnaissance, especially when there are adverse road conditions. Photographic
reconnaissance may provide valuable information on possible enemy FA locations, especially after fresh
snow.
EMPLOY FIRES

6-174. Anticipate degradation of weapons locating radar operations due to extreme cold weather. Update
meteorology data when abrupt temperature changes occur.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-27

Chapter 6
Deliver Fires
6-175. Plan for increased use of airburst munitions. Improved conventional munitions and scatterable
mines effectiveness is decreased in snow and frozen ground. Use WP as marking rounds; however,
phosphorus may burn undetected in the snow for extended periods and create a hazard to friendly troops.
White smoke may not be observable against snow and clouds. Consider the use of colored smoke when
available for marking. Plan to use variable time fuzes for cold weather operations; however, snow and ice
may cause premature detonation. Use the M732 series proximity fuze for cold weather operations. Plan for
decreased rates of fire as a result of heavily clothed howitzer crews, cold weapons, and fogged lenses on
fire control devices. Place additional emphasis on monitoring propellant temperatures. If registration is
required, plan for the use of high-burst or radar registrations and meteorological data plus velocity error.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-177. Plan for decreased communications effectiveness. Replace batteries more frequently since they
become less effective with the decrease in temperature. Cover the mouthpieces of microphones to prevent
frost from forming. Plan for difficulty in establishing a good electrical ground in permafrost and snow.
Keep antennas free of snow and ice. Check technical manuals for radios and power sources regarding
special precautions during operation in extremely cold climates. Ensure retransmission teams are well
supplied to endure longer periods without resupply during inclement weather. Monitor storms that could
cause them to become snowed in at high altitude or in mountainous cold weather regions.

6-178. Plan for limited ground mobility of artillery weapons and ammunition supply vehicles and
increased time preparing for operation. Frequently relieve personnel in exposed, extremely cold static
listening post and observation post positions. Establish a marking system for friendly locations.
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-179. Plan for decreased logistical resupply due to reduced mobility and difficulty in determining grid
locations. Ensure supply convoys travel in close columns during whiteout conditions and prolonged
darkness. Plan for an increase in parts breakage as metal becomes brittle in extremely cold temperatures.
Plan maximum use of air resupply. Order larger quantities of petroleum, oil, and lubricants due to an
increased use of personnel heaters and vehicle warm-up operations. Check vehicle winterization often to
ensure continued protection. Exercise weapon recoil systems often between fire missions. Adhere to
preventive maintenance checks and services as prescribed for cold weather operations. Implement a
maintenance plan for extreme cold weather and exercising equipment (for example, periodic starting of
engines and alternative lubricants, as required).
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-180. Provide firing areas with firing platform stability. Avoid emplacement in avalanche-prone areas, as
the shock wave produced by firing can cause an avalanche. Maintain seasonal camouflage for use by units.
Train Soldiers on the prevention of cold weather injuries. Provide warming areas for Soldier use.
DESERT OPERATIONS
6-181. Military operations in desert regions are characterized by rapid, highly mobile warfare conducted
over great distances. These fast-moving battles, with long-range visibility, are more suited to mechanized
rather than light forces. Deserts offer little life support.
6-28 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

6-182. Active deception techniques play key roles in the concentration and dispersal of units and security
takes on added importance. Long-range engagements are common due to terrain, weather, and fields of fire.
However, heat waves, mirages, dust, and sandstorms can hamper ground observation. Air observation is
highly effective in this environment; however, the absence of prominent landmarks in some areas degrades
this capability. In addition, the lack of trees and hills makes aircraft more vulnerable to enemy air defenses.
6-183. For more information on desert operations, see FM 90-3.
6-184. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of desert operations include deploy and
the force.

6-185. Position radars to provide the maximum screening crest. Consider the effect of sand and dust on
visibility and convoy speeds. Position howitzers in defilade. Avoid predictable FA positions.
6-186. Friendly ground observation is enhanced but additional early warning is required due to rapid
movement rates. Quickly disseminate notifications of enemy penetrations or infiltrations to affected FA
units.
EMPLOY FIRES

6-188. Anticipate terrain association and navigation errors that increase target location errors. Use laser
designators to perform target area survey. Emplace and camouflage radars and equipment at night, if
possible. Exploit situational cueing. Anticipate increased survivability moves. Use survey to establish
observation post locations and directional reference.
Deliver Fires
6-189. Stress uniform storage and frequent measuring of propellant temperature due to high surface
temperature effect on propellants. Request meteorological data for transitional periods because of abrupt
weather changes (especially temperature) in the morning and evening. Plan to provide survey control over
extended distances.
6-190. Determine considerations for increase in hasty survey, which may include:
 Graphic resection if maps are available and accurate.
 Simultaneous observation.
 Use of survey to determine direction and global positioning system for location in establishing
survey control points.
 Consider the location of survey control points and their effect on providing control.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-192. Consider increased ranges for radio communications. Plan for early emplacement of
retransmission assets. Protect radio equipment. Failure rates increase due to blowing sand and large
temperature variances.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-29

Chapter 6

6-193. Anticipate rapid enemy movement. Provide SEAD fires in support of close air support and attack
helicopters. Prepare to support forces dispersed over wide expanses of terrain, but retain the ability to mass
fires as much as possible.
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-194. Plan for extended supply lines. Plan for increased water consumption. Plan for increased vehicle
overheating, electrical component breakdown, and faster tire wear. Stockpile filters, coolants, lubricants,
cleaning materials, and tires. Train Soldiers in the prevention of heat and cold weather injuries. Plan for
night and air resupply. However, dust clouds from helicopters and convoys must not give away position
areas. Check vehicles batteries often and maintain adequate supplies of distilled water. Electrolyte in wet-
cell batteries evaporates quickly. Perform frequent maintenance on vehicles, equipment, and weapons.
Apply surface lubrication sparingly.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-195. Anticipate more heat and burn cases, snake, and insect bite victims. Use the terrain to provide
depth and dispersion. Use wadis for concealment. Use desert camouflage nets. Request attachment of anti-
tank teams if contact with enemy armor or mechanized forces is anticipated. Employ crew-served weapons
to maximize effective ranges.
JUNGLE OPERATIONS
6-196. Jungle operations involve a greater, but not exclusive, reliance on air assets for mobility,
observation, and resupply of engaged forces. Surface mobility (wheeled and tracked) is limited. Light
forces are best suited for jungle operations. Insert and extract light personnel and equipment by helicopter.
High temperatures and humidity take their toll on equipment and Soldiers. Frequent jungle operations
include ambushes, raids, and small unit patrols.
6-197. Close in fighting is common in jungle terrain. Fires may be limited to high-angle indirect fires and
close air support. If the friendly force has a substantial advantage in FS, the enemy will most likely try to
establish and maintain extremely close contact. This limits the effectiveness of fires because of the
fratricide danger. Massing fires may be difficult because firing units may be dispersed over large areas in
order to support small-unit operations.
6-198. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of jungle operations include deploy and
the force. For more information on jungle operations, see FM 90-5.

6-199. Select positions accessible by roads, when available. Plan to reposition towed artillery with air
assets. Anticipate difficulty in mobility for wheeled and tracked vehicles. Anticipate weather conditions
and its effect on mobility. Plan equipment loads to maximize available air assets.
6-200. Consider increased ground reconnaissance in and around position areas and routes, as well as
security assistance from military police and maneuver units. The S-2 should look for signs that the enemy
is using cleared locations as firing areas while using nearby cover for hide areas.
EMPLOY FIRES
6-30 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015


6-202. Stress safety considerations since map reading (self-location, target location, and friendly unit
location) is difficult. Plan for increased use of weapons locating radars for counterfire missions. Use ground
surveillance radars and remote sensors, if available. Plan for the use of UAS.
Deliver Fires
6-203. Ammunition considerations include:
 High explosive-delay fuzes penetrates the treetops and splinters the trees, creating additional
fragmentation.
 Smoke has limited effectiveness in dense vegetation.
 WP is effective as a marking round. Consider using an airburst WP round as the initial round in
adjustment.
 Plan for a reduction in illumination effects because of vegetation.
 Anticipate increased hasty survey techniques as survey control points may be scarce and difficult
to establish.
 Use creeping fires in heavy vegetation.
 Anticipate increased maintenance problems due to moisture and rust.
 Expect ammunition expenditure to be high and plan accordingly.
 Use air as the primary means of resupply, when possible.
EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-205. Communication personnel plan for communication degradation in a triple-canopy jungle. Ensure
antenna cables, connectors, power, and telephone cables are off the ground. Having the cables off the
ground minimizes the effects of moisture, fungus, and insects. Elevate antennas above the jungle canopy,
when possible. Coordinate for air observers or airborne command platforms to act as relay stations, when
possible. Use directional antennas to increase the range of communications. Plan the use of retransmission
assets. Coordinate fires. Plan to fire high-angle missions and for an increase in the requests for SEAD.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-206. Position units for mutual defense, especially when thick vegetation increases vulnerability to
ground attack. Plan and adjust for mutual support. Prepare to use anti-personnel mines (Claymores) and
direct fire cannon munitions (flechette rounds or high-explosive rounds with fuzes set on the minimum time
– killer junior rounds) for immediate use while in position. Establish local security. Select alternate and
supplemental positions. Plan for increased health hazards, disease, and snake and insect bites. Coordinate
engineer support for firing positions, as required.
MOUNTAIN OPERATIONS
6-207. Mountain operations include many of the same problems found in cold weather regions.
Mountainous areas typically have rugged, compartmented terrain with steep slopes, treacherous mobility,
and poor road networks. Weather may span the entire spectrum from extreme cold with ice and snow in
winter to extreme heat during the summer. In mountain operations, the advantages favor the defender, and
the focal point is the battle to control the high ground. Infantry units are the most suitable force for this type
of combat, particularly when properly supported. In addition, the terrain promotes isolated battles that make
command difficult. Small-unit commanders often operate semi-independently.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-31

Chapter 6
6-208. Planning considerations for the basic FA tasks in support of mountain operations include deploy
and conduct movement, develop intelligence, employ fires, exercise control, perform sustainment, and
protect the force. For more information on mountain operations, see FM 3-97.6.

6-209. Position FA in defilade to increase their survivability, but beware of snow, rockslides, and possible
enfilading fire from enemy rocket propelled grenades and mortars in these positions. Give self-propelled
units priority in position area selection due to terrain limitations. Maximize helicopter airlift for movement,
especially for elements such as retransmission sites and survey. The staff should plan for air reconnaissance
of routes and positions, when possible. On narrow mountain roads, identify ambush and choke points.
Turnaround point locations for large vehicles and those pulling trailers may be scarce. Locate potential
turnaround points during route reconnaissance. Personnel plan for increased hasty survey. Place special
emphasis on accurate altitude.
6-210. Increase use of air reconnaissance, intelligence platforms, and internal and external intelligence
reports to compensate for reduced visibility. Conduct active patrolling and reconnaissance. Place increased
emphasis on terrain considerations in templating enemy FA. Do not underestimate the enemy’s ability to
position mortars in difficult terrain. Range capabilities are useful in templating enemy indirect fire
locations.
EMPLOY FIRES

6-212. Request forward observers on high ground to maximize visibility; however, they may need to be
staggered at different levels if low-level clouds are possible. Anticipate poor visibility due to clouds, fog, or
snow blindness. Employ weapons locating radars to detect high-angle fires. Position radars to maximize
terrain masking. Target acquisition personnel plan for ground surveillance radars and remote sensors, if
available.
Deliver Fires
6-213. Choose shell and fuze combinations based on terrain, High explosive-point detonating, high
explosive-delay, and improved conventional munitions have reduced effectiveness in snow; but are highly
effective in rocky terrain. The adverse effect of the slope of the terrain impact on both scatterable mines
and improved conventional munitions effectiveness includes:
 Scatterable mines must stabilize within 30 seconds of impact for the submunitions to arm.
 Uneven terrain (for example, plowed ground and jumbled rocks) may keep mine trip wires from
deploying properly.
 Dual-purpose improved conventional munitions do not function if the angle of impact is greater
than 60°. Anticipate difficulty in adjusting fires due to the mountainous terrain. Anticipate
increased high-angle fires and registration.
 Plan high-angle fires with airburst munitions on reverse slopes of hills and mountains.
 Use scatterable mines to restrict routes, especially at chokepoints.
 Anticipate difficulty in transfer of firing data due to the wide variance in altitude of firing units.
 Plan frequent meteorological data updates due to rapidly changing weather conditions
6-32 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

EXERCISE CONTROL
Communicate
6-215. Consider the masking effects of mountains or hills on communications. Use directional antennas to
increase range. Maximize line-of-sight radio communications. Plan retransmission capabilities, to include
helicopter radio relay. Airlift retransmission units onto hilltops, when possible.
PERFORM SUSTAINMENT
6-216. Use helicopter and airdrop resupply when appropriate. Plan for increased maintenance on vehicles
and equipment due to the increased strain caused by terrain and weather. Plan for additional cold weather
contingency items required for sustained unit operations in mountainous terrain.
PROTECT THE FORCE

6-217. Coordinate attack helicopter or air support for the FA battalion as the mountains may reduce the
use of mutually supporting fires. Request military police ground reconnaissance of routes, especially at
chokepoints. Consider the danger of flash flooding in dry riverbeds or flood plains. Consider using open
column convoy techniques through mountain passes and other restrictive terrain. Maximize use of terrain
for cover and concealment to compensate for limited hardening potential. Position units in defilade.
Position observation posts, listening posts, and crew-served weapons to enhance survivability by providing
early warning and defensive fires. Plan for defensive cannon direct fire missions.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 6-33

Chapter 7
Field Artillery Battalion Sustainment
The FA battalion must provide responsive, effective, and sustainable fires in a variety
of environments across the range of military operations. Joint operations will be the
norm. The sustainment warfighting function is the related tasks and systems that
provide support and services to ensure freedom of action, extend operational reach,
and prolong endurance (ADRP 3-0). Sustainment is the warfighting function that
deals with arming, fueling, supplying, providing medical care and maintenance for
the FA battalion, enabling it to fulfill its mission. The BSB is the core of sustainment
to the FAB and BCT. The BSB is organic to the brigades and consists of functional
and multifunctional companies assigned to provide support. Because FA battalion
sustainment operations are conducted in conjunction with maneuver sustainment
operations, FA battalion commanders and staffs must completely understand FAB,
DIVARTY and BCT sustainment. For more information on sustainment, see ADRP 4-
0.
SECTION I – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION SUSTAINMENT OVERVIEW

7-1. Sustainment operations are simultaneous operations distributed across the area of operations in
accordance with the maneuver commander’s intent and operations plan. In the most decentralized
operations, Paladin howitzer platoons in the ABCT and towed howitzer platoons in the IBCT and SBCT,
will routinely maneuver within 2-4 kilometers (km) of maneuver elements enabling mutual support from
dispersed locations. This proximity to maneuver elements provides protection and security to individual
systems (both FA battalion assets and maneuver). Sustainment of the FA battalion is normally conducted in
conjunction with sustainment of the supported higher HQ. It will probably not be a separate event unless
ammunition expenditure rates of the FA battalion drive separate resupply.
FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION SUSTAINMENT OVERVIEW

7-2. The forward support company is the cornerstone of the distribution system at the FA battalion level.
The forward support company contains logistic elements plus direct support maintenance. The FA battalion
staff provides human resources, financial management, religious, legal, and command information support.
Note. Although this chapter’s discussion addresses sustainment within the BCT FA battalion,
those FA battalions task organized to a FAB are supported in a similar manner. For more
information on sustainment in the BCT or FAB, see FM 3-90.6.
7-3. The BCT’s FA battalions are sustained from their augmenting forward support companies, the BSB,
and at times directly from the division, corps, and theater sustainment base. The FA battalion executive
officer is responsible to the FA battalion commander for monitoring sustainment operations and inserting
himself where appropriate to ensure sustainment of the battalion. Under the supervision of the battalion
executive officer, the battalion staff identifies sustainment requirements for the FA battalion concept of
operations and provides the requirements to the forward support company or brigade commander. The
forward support company provides supply, maintenance, and transportation to the FA battalion and is the
key sustainment operator at the FA battalion level. The battalion staff plans sustainment operations. The S-
4 will request any additional logistics support from the BSB.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-1

Chapter 7
7-4. The battery commander concentrates on fighting his unit to accomplish the tactical mission.
Sustainment responsibilities at battery level are primarily to report status, supervise operator level
maintenance, request support, and execute internal sustainment operations.
7-5. Regardless of the brigade sustainment structure, the FA battalion commander ensures that support is
provided not only for his organic and attached elements but for any supporting units as well. The battalion
staff (primarily S-1 and S-4) coordinates support for the attachments and verifies who is to provide the
support and how to request the support. When a large unit attachment joins the FA battalion, the attachment
should bring an appropriate slice of sustainment assets from its parent unit. The forward support company
commander usually controls these sustainment assets (less medical, human relations, legal, and religious).
The attached unit leader must coordinate with the FA battalion S-1 and furnish him a copy of his unit battle
roster as well as provide the FA battalion S-4 the status of major pieces of equipment. Thereafter, the
attached unit submits reports and requests for resupply according to the FA battalion standard operating
procedure.
7-6. In the FA battalions, sustainment assets are assigned to the forward support company, except for the
medical platoon, which is assigned to the FA battalion HQ and HQ battery. The focal point for sustainment
support is at the battalion combat trains command post. The combat trains command post, under the
supervision of the battalion S-4, anticipates, requests, coordinates, and supervises execution of sustainment
by either HQ and HQ battery or forward support company assets.
SECTION II – ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONS

7-7. The FA battalion commander can task organize the sustainment assets for centralized or
decentralized control. Centralized control leaves the forward support company intact and controlled by the
forward support company commander. Decentralized control places elements of the forward support
company and medical platoon (-) under a command relationship of a firing battery. Centralized support
lightens the support burden on the firing batteries and can increase mobility. Decentralized logistic support
gives the firing batteries more control over their sustainment operations, facilitates attachment of a battery
to another FA unit or to a maneuver unit, and allows independent operations. Considerations may include:
 Mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil
considerations (METT-TC).
 Personnel status (for example, strength and experience) of these sections.
 Availability of equipment.
 Availability of external support.
 Capability of the battalion staff to supervise additional sections.
FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY

7-8. The BSBs forward support companies can be given a command or support relationship to supported
maneuver or FA battalions of the brigade. The forward support company provides field maintenance and
supply distribution for the FA battalion. The company commander is responsible for executing the
sustainment plan in accordance with the FA battalion commander’s guidance. The company has a
distribution platoon and a maintenance platoon that support Class I, Class III, Class V, Class IX,
maintenance, and recovery. The forward support company can operate from either unit trains in one
location or echeloned trains organized into battery trains, battalion combat trains, unit maintenance
collection point(s), battalion aid station, or battalion trains.
7-9. The field maintenance platoon can function consolidated or echeloned, depending on METT-TC. It
consists of a platoon HQ, maintenance control section, service and recovery section, maintenance section,
and two field maintenance teams designed to provide support to the firing batteries.
7-10. The distribution platoon has a Class III, V and a general supply section. The distribution platoon
provides distribution of all classes of supply (minus Class VIII). The forward support company has no
authorized stockage list, except as necessary to support issue and turn-in operations. It may carry critical
line replaceable units and combat spares as authorized or directed. Combat spares are a combination of
shop stock, bench stock, and prescribed load list.
7-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

7-11. The company is organized with a food service section that is designed to provide the FA battalion
with Class I and field feeding. It can operate one main kitchen serving Unitized Group Rations – A options,
up to three mobile kitchens serving Unitized Group Rations heat and serve, or distribute Meals Ready to
Eat or Unitized Group Rations – E option in accordance with the brigade field feeding plan. When field
feeding teams are operating with a firing battery separate from the forward support company, they will fall
under the command of that battery.
7-12. The platoon HQ section manages the distribution of supplies in support of the FA battalion, which
may include:
 Maintain a current listing for on-hand commodities.
 Establish facilities for limited storage, receipt, and issue of supported commodities.
 Perform limited storage, receipt, and issue of supported commodities.
 Deliver issued assets (for example, logistics packages) and picks up retrogrades (for example,
turn-ins to maintenance or for disposal).
7-13. The distribution section is responsible for supporting retail fuel operations in the FA battalion.
7-14. The distribution section is responsible for supporting Class V operations in the FA battalion. Small-
arms ammunition constitutes an insignificant portion of the FA battalion daily tonnage requirements and is
handled routinely with normal ammunition resupply. The FA battalion S-4 plans for and supervises Class V
operations, and the distribution platoon leader supervises resupply operations. The S-3, S-4, coordinates
with the forward support commander and the distribution platoon leader exchanging information
concerning ammunition. Each must know the required supply rate submitted to the supported higher HQ,
the controlled supply rate established by the supported higher HQ, and the authorized basic load. Provide
this information to the battalion and battery commanders so they can plan resupply operations and set
priorities.
SECTION III – SUSTAINMENT PLANNING

7-15. The lead sustainment planner in the FA battalion is usually the S-4, assisted by the S-1, the battalion
surgeon, and forward support company commander. Representatives from these and other sections form a
sustainment planning cell at the FA battalion main command post to ensure sustainment plans are fully
integrated into operations planning. The standard operating procedure should be the basis for sustainment
operations with planning conducted to determine specific requirements and to prepare for contingencies.
Battalion and battery orders should address only specific support matters for the operation and any
deviations from standard operating procedure.
7-16. Although the sustainment planners at the battalion main command post control and coordinate
sustainment and other support for specific FA battalion operations, routine operations are usually planned
in the field trains. The battalion S-1 may have representatives at or near the brigade S-1 to handle various
human resources functions (for example, replacement or monitor casualty operations). The battalion S-4
may choose to locate with the BSB sustainment officer.
7-17. To provide effective support, sustainment planners and operators must understand the mission
statement, intent, and concept of the operation. The S-4 is responsible for producing the sustainment
paragraph and annexes of the FA operation order, operation plan or support plan, which should include:
 Commander’s priorities.
 Class III and Class V resupply during the mission, as required.
 Movement criteria.
 Type and quantities of support required.
 Priority of support, by type and unit.
 Sustainment overlay.
 Supply routes.
 Logistic release points.
 Casualty evacuation points.
 Maintenance collection points.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-3

Chapter 7
REPORTS
7-18. The accurate reporting of sustainment status is essential to keeping units combat ready. Standard
operating procedures should establish report formats, reporting times, and voice brevity codes to keep
sustainment networks manageable. The FBCB2 helps commanders automate the sustainment data-
gathering process through sustainment situation reports, personnel situation reports, logistical calls for
support, sustainment task order messaging, situational awareness, and task management capabilities.
7-19. At the BSB and BCT level, the Battle Command Sustainment Support System (BCS3) collects
sustainment data from various sustainment-related information systems throughout the BCT to provide
actionable sustainment information to support sustainment-related decisions. To assist planners, BCS3 has
a simulation tool that enables the user to project supply consumption for a given course of action by event
or across time. To assist in execution, BCS3 gives the commander the latest available status of critical
weapons systems, fuel, ammunition, and personnel. BSC3 also provides a map-centric view of inbound
vehicles and cargo that are equipped with movement tracking devices.
7-20. Although sustainment planners may have data available from BCS3 and FBCB2 sustainment and
personnel status messages, it may need to use nonstandard text messages to identify equipment and
personnel issues. The battalion staff must be proactive in identifying and solving sustainment issues, to
include:
 Use FBCB2, BCS3, and other systems to maintain sustainment situational awareness.
 Work closely with higher HQ’ staff to resolve sustainment problems.
 Establish sustainment priorities that conform to mission requirements.
 Recommend sustainment related commander’s critical information requirements.
 Inform the commander of critical sustainment issues.
7-21. The S-6 and forward support company commander must work together to ensure that FBCB2, BCS3,
and sustainment information systems have interconnectivity. The S-4, S-1, and forward support company
commander must monitor the status of this system and implement alternate means of reporting, as required.
MEDICAL REPORTING
7-22. The medical communications for combat casualty care and Defense Health Information Management
System is an automated system, which links health care providers and medical support providers, at all
roles of care, with integrated medical information. The medical communications for combat casualty care
and Defense Health Information Management System receives, stores, processes, transmits, and reports,
medical surveillance, casualty movement and tracking, medical treatment, medical situational awareness,
and medical data across all roles of care.
7-23. The brigade surgeon’s section uses BCS3, FBCB2, and medical communications for combat casualty
care and Defense Health Information Management System to support mission planning, coordination of
orders and subordinate tasks, and to monitor and ensure execution throughout the mission.
SUSTAINMENT SUPPORT FOR ATTACHMENTS

7-24. Generally, attachments to the FA battalion should arrive with their appropriate sustainment
augmentation. When a platoon, section, or detachment is attached to the FA battalion, the battalion S-4
integrates their sustainment augmentation pieces into the battalion support system. The battalion S-4 must
clearly state who will provide medical, maintenance and recovery, and supply support for Class III, V, and
IX. When receiving attachments, sustainment planners require some basic information from the sending
unit’s S-4 to anticipate how to develop a synchronized concept of support, to include as required:
 Number and type of vehicles, personnel by specialty, and weapons systems.
 Current status and strength.
 When attachment is effective and for how long.
 What support assets are coming with the attached unit.
 When and where linkup will occur, and who is responsible for linkup.
7-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

SECTION IV – SUPPLY AND TRANSPORTATION

7-25. Supply and transportation are elements of sustainment. The classes of supply and a reference to
transportation related to supply make up this section.
SUPPLY
7-26. Supplies are grouped into ten classes for supply management and planning (table 7-1). Resupply
operations are based on these classes.
Table 7-1. Classes of supply
SUPPLY CLASS DEFINITION
I Subsistence, water, and gratuitous health and comfort items

Clothing, individual equipment, tentage, organizational tool sets and kits, hand
II tools, unclassified maps, administrative and housekeeping supplies and
equipment
III Petroleum, oil, and lubricants
IV Construction and barrier materiel
V Ammunition
VI Personal demand items normally sold through exchanges
VII Major end items

VIII Medical materiel to include repair parts peculiar to medical equipment
IX Repair parts and components
X Materiel to support nonmilitary programs
EXPEDITIONARY SUPPORT PACKAGING

7-27. To facilitate the ordering and distribution of supplies, the Army uses expeditionary support packages
to package commonly requested supplies. The Army uses expeditionary support packages for training
exercises; deployments; war reserves, pre-positioned stocks; and predictable demands to meet the unit
commanders' requirements.
7-28. Expeditionary support packages allow for a minimum of handling from the storage point through the
transportation system and into the supported units. These loads are equipped with radio frequency tags or
other automated methods. The radio frequency tags and automation enable logisticians to track supplies and
redirect the expeditionary support packages to accommodate changes in missions and priorities.
7-29. Expeditionary support packages are appropriate for all classes of supply except some Class VII major
end items.
7-30. The BCT will use standard expeditionary support packages in conjunction with a "pure palleting"
methodology to provide responsive support for meeting actual requirements during the sustainment phase
of operations. This allows commanders the ability to order only what is necessary and minimize retrograde
of unnecessary material.
PURE PALLETING
7-31. Pure palleting is a process that collects supply requisitions for a given unit using their Department of
Defense activity address code, configures standard expeditionary support packages and other supply items
into loads, then throughputs them to their destination. Time limit for the collection process is usually three
days. Packages not filling a whole pallet are then combined with other packages to produce consolidated
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-5

Chapter 7
loads, destined for multiple Department of Defense activity address codes in a BCT will be shipped to the
BCT’s supply and distribution company.
7-32. Develop pure palleting for supplies, which may include:
 Class II (for example, chemical, biological, radiological, nuclear; clothing; and religious
supplies).
 Class III (for example, packaged petroleum, oil, and lubricants).
 Class IV (for example, construction and barrier materials).
 Class VIII (for example, medical).
 Class IX (for example, batteries and repair parts).
RATIONS
7-33. The FA battalion deploys with three days of operational rations as its unit basic load. The BSB draws
its operational supplies once it is in the joint operations area, based upon unit strength reports. Currently,
the office of the surgeon general limits the continuous use of meals ready to eat to 21 days. Theater food
service officers provide guidance on when to introduce unitized group rations and other ration supplements.
Fresh food (A-rations) after deployment may be available through regional commercial contractors. This
must be approved by the commander’s guidance and either Army veterinary services or through the civilian
augmentation program.
WATER
7-34. Water is provided to Soldiers in two forms: bulk, and bottled (or packaged). Water support will be
provided through an organic water purification and distribution capability when feasible. Bulk potable
water is used as needed for individual Soldiers. Bottled water may be provided on a limited basis, usually
during the deployment phase of operations.
7-35. Bottled water and rations are broken down into daily lots at the BSB distribution point, and picked up
by the forward support company supply section. Each battery has water trailers and five-gallon containers
for distribution of potable water. Battery supply sergeants maintain water trailers in their battery area, and
refill from the brigade support area. Refilling of five-gallon containers occurs during logistics package
operations. Usually, a one-for-one exchange is conducted with the containers (one empty for one full); the
supply section refills the containers.
CLASS I & II (PACKAGED)

7-36. Usually, the BCTs deploy with 30 days of common consumable supplies. Battery supply sergeants
maintain the appropriate level of CBRN protective equipment. These supplies are provided by the BSB and
are maintained as part of the unit’s authorized stockage list. Vehicles also carry a small amount of
commonly used packaged petroleum products for immediate use. These loads are established in the unit
standard operating procedures.
7-37. Replenishment and other necessary supplies are ordered by company supply sergeants from the BSB.
Supplies are provided at the BCT distribution point, usually within the brigade support area to the forward
support company supply for the appropriate battery. They are carried forward with the next logistics
package, or immediately, if needed.
Religious Supplies
7-38. The unit ministry team of the FA battalion orders consumable chaplain supplies through the BCT
unit ministry team, as required. These supplies are considered Class II.
Maps
7-39. Maps are considered a Class II supply. Usually, paper map sheets are delivered with appropriate
supplies to the requester. Unit standard operating procedure should detail the specific procedures for digital
maps.
7-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

CLASS III (BULK)

7-40. The FA battalion usually deploys with half-full vehicle fuel tanks, purged fuelers, and empty fuel
cans. Fuel is issued upon arrival in the operational area. Fuel for UAS will be issued by a dedicated fuel
asset within the BCT.
7-41. The battalion S-4 forecasts the battalion’s requirements based upon the current or upcoming mission.
The forecast is standard operating procedure dependent, but usually is for the 72-hour period beyond the
next day, or out to 96 hours. The forward support company conducts forward distribution to the platoons,
batteries, command posts, and attachments.
CLASS IV
7-42. FA battalion units deploy with a limited amount of Class IV barrier materiel, primarily for protection
of unit perimeters and key positions (for example, command posts). This material is part of the unit’s basic
load, and usually is carried on tactical vehicles.
7-43. Battery supply sergeants order replenishment from the BSB. The forward support company carries
the supplies forward with the next logistics package, or immediately, if needed. Barrier materiel may also
be requested as expeditionary support packages.
CLASS V
7-44. A combat load is the unit commander’s designated quantity of munitions and items authorized to be
carried by unit personnel and combat vehicles (for example, turret-load). Troop-carried munitions to
accompany troops are those issued before departure from the air port of embarkation. Turret-load and
combat load munitions are those authorized for transportation in thick-skinned vehicles for deployment
purposes. Generally, BCTs have the capability to haul one combat load of critical munitions.
7-45. Most units do not deploy with their ammunition combat load of Class V ammunition. Instead, they
are issued their combat load upon arrival in the joint operations area. When the urgency of the deployment
and the requirement for decisive action dictate the necessity to initiate combat operations immediately upon
arrival in the operational area, selected units deploy with a full combat load of ammunition.
7-46. The BSB does not deploy with sustainment stocks. Initially, munitions are delivered to the brigade
support area as expeditionary support packages from pre-positioned stocks (in-theater or afloat) or from the
continental United States.
7-47. The battalion S-4 determines the battalion’s ammunition resupply requirements based on information
provided in the batteries’ situation reports, and guidance received from the battalion commander and S-3.
The S-4 submits the forecast to the BCT or FAB S-4.
7-48. To sustain tactical operations, operational planners determine their munitions requirements, and
develop a required supply rate. Required supply rates are computed by S-3s as rounds per weapon per day.
Sustainment planners at the expeditionary sustainment command and theater support command consider
the required supply rate, available stocks, and due in stocks, and develop a controlled supply rate. The
controlled supply rate limits the issue of munitions that are in short supply. If the required supply rate
exceeds the controlled supply rate, the commander determines who receives the ammunition. Controlled
supply rates may be published in the operation order or as a fragmentary order. They may be included in
the FS plan, FA operation order or FA support plan.
Ammunition Terms
7-49. Utilize common ammunition terms, to include as required:
 Army Regulation 5-13 discusses Combat Load as the standard quantity and type of munitions an
individual weapon, crew-served weapon or a weapons platform and its modified table of
organization and equipment designated munitions carriers are designed to hold. Combat loads
for bulk munitions (grenades, signals, and so forth) are not associated with a weapon or weapons
platform. Bulk munition combat loads are assigned by standard resource code and reflect the
quantity of munitions required to give units capability and flexibility. Combat loads support the
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-7

Chapter 7
initiation of combat operations and are the basic building blocks of Army war reserve
requirements.
 The required supply rate is the amount of ammunition expressed in terms of rounds per
weapon per day for ammunition items fired by weapons, in terms of other units of measure
per day for bulk allotment, and other items estimated to be required to sustain operations
of any designated force without restriction for a specified period. Tactical commanders use
this rate to state their requirements for ammunition to support planned tactical operations at
specified intervals. The required supply rate is submitted through command channels. It is
consolidated at each echelon and is considered by each commander in subsequently determining
the controlled supply rate within the command.
 The controlled supply rate is the rate of ammunition consumption that can be supported,
considering availability, facilities, and transportation. It is expressed in rounds per unit,
individual, or vehicle per day. The Army service component commander announces the
controlled supply rate for each item of ammunition, and, in turn, each tactical commander
announces a controlled supply rate to the next subordinate tactical commander. A unit may not
draw ammunition in excess of its controlled supply rate without authority from its next higher
HQ. The controlled supply rates may be published in the operation order or as a fragmentary
order. They may be included in the FS plan or the FA support plan.
 Ammunition for immediate consumption is ammunition drawn for a specific purpose, such as a
preparation. This ammunition is drawn in addition to the controlled supply rate. It is drawn to be
expended within the next 24 hours and is considered expended when issued. If circumstances
preclude expenditure as planned, the battalion must report this ammunition as excess daily until
it is expended or reallocated.
 An ammunition transfer holding point is a designated site operated by a BSB distribution
company where ammunition is received and transferred to supported units within a BCT. May
also temporarily hold or store ammunition as required (ATP 4-90).
 An expeditionary support package is a single or multi-type load of ammunition built to the
anticipated or actual needs of a firing unit, thereby facilitating throughput to the lowest echelon.
Expeditionary support packages are often designed to fit standard transportation assets and for
transportation as a single unit. FA munitions are packaged and delivered in completed rounds
(for example, fuzes, primers, propellants, and projectiles). See table 7-2 (on page 7-9) for FA
examples of expeditionary support packages.
 Descriptions of other ammunition loads may be found in Army Regulation 5-13.
7-8 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Table 7-2. Field artillery expeditionary support packages (example)
Required Supply Rate Calculation

7-50. The required supply rate is the FA battalion’s estimate of the amount of ammunition it will require
for an operation. Determining the required supply rate is the responsibility of the battalion S-3 and can be
accomplished in a number of ways. These include personal experience, historical data from similar battles
and use of automated planning factors on the operations logistics planner’s software. Required supply rate
reporting requirements may verify with tactical standard operating procedure and the situation. Generally,
the required supply rate is submitted through the supported maneuver force or senior FA HQ, with
information copies to appropriate HQ. Required supply rates are consolidated and reviewed at higher HQ,
and used in determining the controlled supply rate for each unit. The FA battalion will generally receive its
controlled supply rate through the same channels that it reports its required supply rate.
7-51. The manual method discussed here provides a method in computing a required supply rate for
artillery ammunition. Determine the required supply rate steps, which may include:
 Step 1—Determine the level of the operation using table 7-3 on page 7-10.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-9

Chapter 7
Table 7-3. Levels of operation

LEVELS OF OPERATION
Level of Percent of Commitment Commitment of
Operation Maneuver Fire Support Higher Headquarters Reserves
Heavy 60+ 100 Probable

Moderate 30+ 50+ Not Anticipated
Light 30- 50- No
 Step 2—From Table 7-4 (on page 7-11), select the type of weapon system for which the required
supply rate is being calculated. Rounds are expressed in number of rounds per tube per day.
 Step 3—Select the type of operation and level of operation in Table 7-4. If the type of operation
is not listed, use the conversion table listed in Table 7-5 (on page 7-11).
 Step 4—Compute ammunition requirements for the operation by using Table 7-4:
 Day 1—Number of rounds required for the first day extracted from the first day column in
the table.
 Day 2-4—Number of rounds from the succeeding day’s column multiplied by the number of
days to be computed (see Note (1), Table 7-4).
 Day 5—Average the number of rounds from the succeeding and protracted days for the
weapon system (see Note (1), Table 7-4).
 Day 6-15—Number of rounds from the protracted day’s column multiplied by the number
of days (see Note (1), Table 7-4).
7-10 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Table 7-4. Daily ammunition requirements—rounds per weapon and short ton (example)
Table 7-5. Conversion factors table

TYPE OF OPERATION CONVERSION FACTOR
Attack of position 100% of attack of position (deliberately organized)
Covering Force 100% of defense of position
Inactive Situation 80% of protracted period
Meeting Engagement 200% of protracted period
Pursuit 40% of protracted period
Retrograde Operation 59% of defense of position (succeeding days)
Assault of Hostile Shore 100% of defense of position (succeeding days)
 Step 5—Beyond day 15, use safety bulletin 38-26.
 Step 6—Divide the total rounds by the number of days in the operation. This will give the
number of rounds per tube per day.
7-52. Ammunition supplies are provided from the supported higher HQ ammunition transfer holding point
(normally within the brigade support area) to the forward support company. They are carried forward with
the next logistics package, or immediately, as required. Ammunition and explosives are accounted for and
provided proper physical security at all times.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-11

Chapter 7
CLASS VI
7-53. Soldiers usually carry 30 days of personal comfort items with them when deploying. They replenish
their own supplies through the Army and Air Force Exchange System or local purchase.
7-54. Health and comfort packs provide forward area troops everyday necessities required when the
exchange system is not available. Delivery of health and comfort packs is based on headcounts provided for
field feeding
CLASS VII
7-55. Units normally deploy with their modification table of organization and equipment required
equipment. There may be additional equipment issued in the joint operations area. Battery commanders
must ensure their supply sergeants establish accountability on new equipment by creating hand receipts
from packing lists or inventory. Report new equipment through the battalion S-4 and brigade S-4 to the
appropriate property book officer. Property book officers account for and order Class VII and other non-
expendable items in the supported higher HQ.
7-56. Class VII replacement is based on losses reported through command channels to the brigade S-3 and
S-4 per unit standard operating procedure. This permits the commander to remain apprised of the
operational status of subordinate commands, and to direct the distribution of items to those units having the
most critical need. Replacement Class VII equipment is delivered to the supported higher HQ in the brigade
support area. The brigade S-4 and BSB sustainment officer should confirm if replacement weapons systems
(for example, howitzers) will be delivered with basic issue items, additional authorized list, munitions, and
crew. This allows the battalion S-3 and S-4 to better apportion replacements.
7-57. Low density, specialized equipment in the battalion may require additional evaluation by Department
of the Army civilians or contractors before classifying it as a loss.
CLASS VIII
7-58. Usually Role 1 medical treatment facilities deploy with a three-day supply of consumable medical
supplies, and batteries deploy with complete combat lifesaver bags. Individual Soldiers should deploy with
a 180-day supply of their prescribed medications. As they deploy, Soldiers must advise their supporting
medical unit of their specific needs so the medical sustainment system can sustain these prescriptions.
CLASS IX
7-59. Each battery stocks and deploys with combat spares for repair parts (for example, weapons and radio
maintenance). Battery spares are a combination of prescribed load list, shop stock, and bench stock. The
forward support company also has combat spares or shop stock to support maintenance of vehicles,
generators, and other equipment.
7-60. The battery supply sergeant and maintenance personnel replenish their combat spares and order other
parts as needed through the forward support company to the BSB. Class IX repair part requisitions are
prioritized based on the commander’s priority of maintenance and need.
CLASS X
7-61. If the FA battalion conducts civil-military operations, the battalion S-4 must seek guidance on
ordering supplies and materiel for non-military use through the chain of command. Materiel for civil-
military operations usually is provided by the Department of State, host nation, or non-governmental
organizations (for example, Red Cross).
7-62. For more information on processing of unit strength reports and the flow of all classes of supplies to
the FA battalion, see FM 3-90.6.
7-12 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

TRANSPORTATION
7-63. The FA battalion is 100% mobile with organic vehicles and trailers. The BSB, including the forward
support company is mobile for organic equipment, and has been designed to be mobile with three combat
loads for BCT units. The BSB commander, in coordination with the brigade commander, may choose to
sacrifice mobility for extra supply stocks. If the BSB’s limited assets are committed, and extra
transportation is required, the brigade S-4 requests transportation assets from higher HQ.
7-64. For information on supply operations involving air delivery, deployment, and the retrograde of flat
racks, see FM 3-90.6.
SECTION V – EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE DISPOSAL

7-65. Explosive ordnance disposal capabilities are not organic to the BCT, FAB, or DIVARTY. Request
explosive ordnance disposal augmentation from higher HQ to support operations. Requests for explosive
ordnance disposal support are processed through the BSB sustainment officer, who then forwards the
request to the supporting explosive ordnance disposal HQ. Once unexploded ordnance is located, the
locating unit will send an explosive ordnance disposal 9 Line Report through their chain of command
requesting explosive ordnance disposal support. If there is a constant presence of hazards, such as
improvised explosive devices, explosive ordnance disposal teams may be in Direct or General Support of
the BCT, FAB, or DIVARTY.
SECTION VI – FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

7-66. The battalion has no organic financial management support assets. Financial management
detachments are deployed to provide area financial support to a brigade or equivalent size unit, or as
directed by the financial management company commander. Financial management support includes
banking and currency support, disbursing support, tracking cost and accounting, host nation support, and
limited pay support. Typical finance requirements of the FA battalion include temporary duty requests,
purchase requests and commitments, and multinational support.
SECTION VII – HUMAN RESOURCES SUPPORT

7-67. Human resources support operations are embedded within the battalion S-1 section. The S-1 plans,
provides, and coordinates the delivery of human resources support, services, or information to all assigned
or attached personnel. Human resources support beyond the capability of the S-1 is coordinated with the
BSB S-1. The S-1 is the coordinating office for religious, medical, financial management, and the Red
Cross. For more information, see FM 1-0.
SECTION VIII – RELIGIOUS SUPPORT

7-68. Each battalion has a unit ministry team, consisting of a chaplain and chaplain assistant, to provide
religious support to their Soldiers. The chaplain serves the commander as a personal staff officer. The
chaplain plans, synchronizes, and coordinates religious support, within the battalion area of operations. The
brigade unit ministry team is responsible for the technical oversight of the unit ministry teams in
subordinate units.
SECTION IX – LEGAL SUPPORT

7-69. The BCT has an organic legal team identified as the brigade legal section. The brigade legal section
provides legal support to the command, brigade staff, and subordinate battalions across the Judge Advocate
General's Corp's legal disciplines: military justice, international and operational law, administrative and
civil law, contract and fiscal law, claims, and legal assistance. The Brigade Judge Advocate usually locates
the legal section in the brigade's main command post to provide immediate support to the brigade
commander and the fires cell. Each battalion typically has a paralegal noncommissioned officer assigned to
the S-1 section to provide immediate legal support to battalion commanders and staff, although they remain
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-13

Chapter 7
under the supervisory control of the brigade judge advocate. See FM 1-04, Legal Support to the
Operational Army, for additional information about brigade legal section support.
SECTION X – ARMY HEALTH SYSTEM
ROLE 1 MEDICAL SUPPORT

COMBAT LIFESAVERS
7-70. The combat lifesaver is a nonmedical Soldier selected by the unit commander for additional training
beyond basic first aid procedures. A minimum of one individual per squad, crew, team, or equivalent-size
unit should be trained. The primary duty of this individual does not change. The additional duty of the
combat lifesaver is to provide enhanced first aid for injuries before the combat medic arrives. The combat
lifesaver is usually the first person on the scene to begin the process of providing enhanced first aid to
wounded and injured personnel. The combat lifesaver is not intended to take the place of medical
personnel, but to stabilize a wounded or injured Soldier’s condition until medical personnel arrive.
BATTALION MEDICAL PLATOON

7-71. The battalion medical platoon is the focal point of Army health system support for the battalion. The
platoon receives, treats, and evacuate patients and coordinates further medical evacuation, as required. It
establishes and operates the battalion aid station, which is the primary role 1 medical treatment facility for
the battalion.
7-72. For more information on medical platoon operations, see ATP 4-02.3.
SECTION XI – MAINTENANCE
7-73. The Army has two levels of maintenance, field and sustainment. Field maintenance consists
primarily of replacing parts on the user’s system. It is generally a merging of organizational and direct
support levels of maintenance. Field-level maintainers are concentrated in the BSB, either in the supported
higher HQ BSB’s forward support company or the field maintenance company. Sustainment maintenance
consists of repairing of components removed from the user’s system. Sustainment maintenance is generally
a merging of the former general support and depot levels of maintenance. Generally, sustainment-level
maintainers are located in the sustainment brigade, usually in a component repair company.
FIELD MAINTENANCE
7-74. Field maintenance is on-system maintenance and is mainly preventive maintenance and replacement
of defective parts. Field maintenance returns repaired equipment to the Soldier. It covers tasks previously
assigned to operator or crew, organization or unit, and direct support maintenance levels. It includes some
off-system maintenance critical to mission readiness.
7-75. Battery commanders ensure that vehicle crews and equipment operators perform preventative
maintenance checks and services. To provide quick turnaround of maintenance problems, each battery has
a field maintenance team from their supporting forward support company dedicated to support them. These
field maintenance teams have contact maintenance trucks and mechanics trained in the company’s
equipment.
7-76. The forward support company performs field maintenance. The forward support company has a
maintenance platoon that repairs automotive, armament, ground support, electronic, and missile equipment.
The forward support company focuses on line replaceable unit replacement, using combat repair team and
field maintenance team stocks, on board spares and shop stock. It has a service and recovery section and
also performs battle damage assessment and repair. The forward support company’s maintenance control
section orders and manages repair parts. The forward support company commander establishes unit
maintenance collection points in coordination with the FA battalion S-4.
7-14 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

7-77. The maintenance platoon leader task-organizes the maintenance platoon according to directives he
receives from the forward support company commander. The battalion executive officer, S-3, S-4, and
forward support company commander analyze the current and anticipated support requirements and
recommend to the FA battalion commander the maintenance concept to be used. They will recommend to
the commander the appropriate support at battery, maintenance collection point, command post, and trains
locations.
7-78. In most tactical situations, the forward support company will provide each firing battery a
maintenance support team. In some instances, the forward support company’s recovery vehicles may also
be positioned forward with each firing battery but remain under battalion control. This provides a quick-fix
capability for those items that can be repaired quickly without hindering tactical operations and a recovery
capability for those items requiring repairs that are more extensive.
7-79. The rest of the maintenance platoon is in the combat trains under the control of the maintenance
platoon sergeant. The platoon maintenance section performs maintenance on forward support company and
HQ and HQ battery equipment and assists the field maintenance teams, as required.
7-80. Maintenance of low density, specialized equipment usually requires maintenance by Department of
the Army civilians or contractors. The battalion S-4 must coordinate through the forward support company
for specific management procedures for this maintenance.
SUSTAINMENT MAINTENANCE
7-81. Sustainment maintenance actions typically involve repair of repairable Class IX components, off-
system, for return to the supply system. Examples of sustainment maintenance include inside-the-box repair
of line replaceable units, and rebuild of engines and transmissions.
7-82. A repairable is an item that can be cost-effectively repaired. When a repairable such as a diesel
engine or turbine fuel control malfunctions, it can be replaced by a repaired or rebuilt component; it usually
does not need to be replaced by a new item. Although the mechanics in the supported higher HQ cannot
repair unserviceable repairables, the component repair companies in the sustainment brigade need those
unserviceables to create serviceable repair parts.
SECTION XII – SUPPORT AREAS

7-83. A support area is a designated area in which sustainment elements, some staff elements, and other
elements locate to support a unit. Types of support areas include the brigade support area, battalion trains,
and battery trains.
7-84. The brigade support area is the logistical, personnel, and administrative hub of the supported higher
HQ. It consists of the BSB, but could also include a supported higher HQ alternate command post, battalion
field trains, brigade engineer battalion units, air and missile defense assets, signal assets, and other
sustainment units from higher HQ. The brigade support area is located to maintain support to the supported
higher HQ, but not to interfere with the tactical movement of supported higher HQ units, or with units that
must pass through the supported higher HQ area. Usually the brigade support area is on a main supply route
and ideally is out of the range of the enemy’s medium artillery. The brigade support area should be
positioned away from the enemy’s likely avenues of approach into the brigade support area.
TRAINS
7-85. Trains are a unit grouping of personnel, vehicles, and equipment to provide sustainment. It is the
basic sustainment tactical organization. Battalions use trains to array their subordinate sustainment
elements, including their forward support company. Battalion trains usually are under the control of the
battalion S-4, and assisted by the battalion S-1. The composition and location of battalion trains varies
depending on the number of units attached to, or augmenting, the battalion. The battalion trains can be
employed in two basic configurations, as unit trains or as echeloned trains. See FM 3-90.6 for additional
information on sustainment trains.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-15

Chapter 7
UNIT TRAINS
7-86. When logistical support resources are centralized in one location, they are called unit trains. There
are benefits to utilizing this option, which may include:
 Coordinated control and a single base for logistical personnel and equipment.
 Enhanced security and capability for ground defense.
7-87. Unit trains may be appropriate in slow-moving or static situations, when the tactical situation forces
the trains to be a self-contained operation, during reconstitution, when the battalion is in an assembly area,
or during an extended tactical march. Unit trains normally consist of the forward support company
sustainment assets, except for field maintenance teams positioned with the firing batteries and possibly a
maintenance collection point. The maintenance collection point may be positioned closer to the firing
batteries or near the FA battalion command post to facilitate rapid repair and evacuation of equipment. The
forward support company commander is responsible for and commands unit trains.
7-88. Towed FA battalions normally lack sufficient resources to effectively use the echeloned trains
concept and typically operate under a unit trains organization. The unit trains are normally in or near the
brigade support area. An example of field and combat trains is located in table 7-6 (on page 7-17).
ECHELONED TRAINS
7-89. The battalion trains may consist of three types (for example, battery trains, combat trains and field
trains). The preferred method of supporting the self-propelled FA battalion is through echeloned trains.
There are also benefits to utilizing this option, which may include:
 Immediate responsive forward support tailored to the tactical situation.
 Flexible resource usage.
 Increased resource survivability and enhanced responsiveness when the tactical situation is fluid
or when the battalion is operating over extended distances.
7-16 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Table 7-6. Field trains and combat trains (example)

Field Trains Combat Trains
Forward Support Company (-) Forward Support Company (-) FWD
Forward Support Company Commander And Field Maintenance Teams
First Sergeant
Maintenance Platoon Headquarters (-) Headquarters and Headquarters Battery
Commander (If collocated with battalion
command post)
Food Service Section Maintenance Collection Point
Maintenance Section Maintenance Control Section
Distribution Platoon Headquarters (-) Battalion Aid Station
General Supply Section Class III Section (-)
Class III Section (-) Class V Section (-)
Class V Section (-) Field Artillery Battalion S-1 And S-4 (-)
Field Artillery Battalion S-1 And S-4 (-)
Note: This is one example of how the field and combat trains could be configured based on mission, enemy, terrain and
weather, troops and support available, time available, and civil considerations ( METT-TC). The commander will configure the
field artillery battalion trains to meet operational requirements.
FWD – forward, S-1– manpower and personnel staff officer, S-4 – logistics staff officer
BATTERY TRAINS
7-90. Battery trains may be formed to provide sustainment for a battery during combat operations. The
battery organizes its organic and attached sustainment assets into its battery trains, which usually include
the first sergeant and medical aid and evacuation teams. The supply sergeant and armorer are generally
located in the battalion field trains. Generally, the battery trains include a maintenance support team from
the forward support company, with capabilities for maintenance, recovery, and limited combat spares.
COMBAT TRAINS
7-91. The battalion combat trains usually consist of the forward support company and the battalion medical
unit and are organized to provide immediate critical sustainment support to the firing batteries. The combat
trains are the hub of sustainment operations for the battalion. When the combat trains are collocated with
the battalion command post, the HQ and HQ battery commander may be designated as the commander of
the combat trains. When the combat trains are located away from the HQ and HQ battery command post
area, the FA battalion commander designates who commands the combat trains. The battalion trains
command post is located in the combat trains, and the S-4 may be responsible along with the forward
support company commander for supervising and managing this command post.
7-92. The S-4 section along with forward support company personnel may form the basis of a combat
trains command post, which may be established to plan and coordinate sustainment for tactical operations.
Although the combat trains command post may serve as an alternate main command post in maneuver
battalions, the combat trains command post typically does not have the communications and tactical fire
control capabilities to do so for a FA battalion. If the combat trains command post is required to take
command of the battalion, the AFATDS capability for tactical fire direction is provided from the battalion
command post. When established, the combat trains command post usually consists of the elements of the
forward support company, battalion S-1, and battalion S-4. Most of the time, the S-4 is the officer in charge
of the combat trains command post. There are situations that may dictate the need for a combat trains
command post, which may include:
 Fast-moving, fluid operations
 BSB forward element operations.
 Reception, staging, onward movement, and integration operations.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-17

Chapter 7
7-93. Determine the optimum balance of combat trains elements, to include as required:
 The S-1 and S-4 (minus) combat trains command post.
 Maintenance control section.
 Petroleum, oil, and lubricant (for example, emergency resupply to the batteries and platoons).
 Ammunition (for example, emergency distribution to the firing platoons).
 Battalion aid station.
 Decontamination assets.
 Elements of the communications platoon.
 Maintenance collection point.
 Maintenance support teams with recovery, if not forward with batteries.
7-94. The combat trains are located close enough to be responsive to the forward batteries and platoons
but, if possible, they should not be within range of enemy indirect fire. They generally occupy an area
between the brigade support area or the field trains (if deployed separately) and about one to four kms
behind the forward battery or platoon position areas. Combat trains may move often to stay in supporting
distance of the firing units.
7-95. The combat trains command post is the focal point of battalion sustainment operations. The
command post concentrates on ammunition and petroleum, oil, and lubricants resupply, priority equipment
repair and salvage, and emergency medical care. The combat trains post must stay abreast of the tactical
situation to include monitoring the battalion command network, identifying logistic support requirements,
and receiving requests, reports, and requirements from subordinate elements.
7-96. The combat trains command post uses FBCB2 to maintain tactical situational awareness. The S-4
also operates the BCS3. This system provides the capability to monitor and track requests for and the status
of repair parts and supplies for the FA battalion. This system provides the FA battalion the capability to
develop sustainment estimates for future operations as well as to provide the commander with the status of
sustainment operations supporting current operations.
7-97. Logistic personnel analyze, consolidate, and forward battalion requirements to the battalion
sustainment center (field trains). The battalion sustainment center coordinates with and directs elements of
the forward support company in the FA battalion support area to take actions to meet the requirements of
the forward units.
MAINTENANCE COLLECTION POINT

7-98. The FA battalion often establishes a maintenance collection point to provide forward maintenance
support to the battalion. The forward support company commander may designate either the maintenance
platoon leader or platoon sergeant as the commander of the maintenance collection point. Under the
echeloned trains concept, the maintenance collection point may locate in the combat trains, especially when
increased security is required. However, the unit may also establish the maintenance collection point
outside of, but near the combat trains to facilitate mission accomplishment, as required.
FIELD TRAINS
7-99. Field trains include those assets not located with the combat trains. The field trains can provide direct
coordination between the battalion and the BSB. The field trains personnel assist the coordination and
movement of support from the BSB to the battalion by ensuring that logistics packages are organized and
configured per the unit’s requests and that the logistics packages make it forward to the release points and
back to the brigade support area.
7-100. The field trains may collocate with the brigade support area, operate independently between the
brigade support area and combat trains, or collocate with trains of another FA or maneuver battalion. The
threat and the distances between the forward elements of the battalion and the brigade support area affect
the field trains’ location.
7-101. If the battalion is operating within the support distance of the brigade support area, the battalion
field trains may collocate with the BSB in the brigade support area. This facilitates support by the BSB,
7-18 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

eases communications requirements, simplifies security requirements, and reduces the need for additional
coordination with the supported higher HQ for terrain. When collocating with the BSB, the field trains fall
under the operational control of the BSB commander for movement, security, terrain management, and
synchronization of sustainment activities. The positioning needs of the battalion must be coordinated with
the BSB. If possible, the battalion field trains should be positioned near the exit points of the brigade
support area in order to move forward to better support the battalion. If the battalion is operating at
extended ranges from the brigade support area, the field trains may be positioned between the BSB and the
battalion to better facilitate support.
7-102. The battalion field trains command post may act as the primary direct coordination element
between the FA battalion and the brigade support area. When established, the field trains command post
usually consists of the elements of the forward support company, FA battalion S-1 and S-4, and selected
HQ and HQ battery personnel (for example, HQ and HQ battery commander or executive officer, first
sergeant, chemical noncommissioned officer, and supply sergeant). The FA battalion commander may
determine the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge of the field trains command post. Situations
that may dictate the need for a field trains command post include periods of supply or resupply of major
end items or periods when sustainment elements of the squadron are no longer 100% mobile. The field
trains command post tracks the current battle; plans for sustainment of future operations; provides
sustainment representation to the main command post for planning and integration; forecasts and
coordinates future requirements; and coordinates the return to duty of Soldiers and repaired equipment.
7-103. The designated trains commander is responsible for trains security. In trains areas, a perimeter
defense is planned. Elements in the trains are assigned a specific sector to defend. Mutually supporting
positions that dominate likely avenues of approach are selected for vehicles armed with crew-served
weapons. Reaction forces and observation posts are established in accordance with the tactical standard
operating procedure. To enhance security, an alarm or warning system (such as rocket, artillery, missile
warning) is arranged. Sector sketches, fire plans, and obstacle plans should be prepared. The designated
trains commander directs rehearsals to ensure that personnel know the parts they play in the defensive
scheme.
SECURITY OF SUPPORT AREAS

7-104. Sustainment elements must organize and prepare to defend themselves against ground or air
attacks. The number of support areas established depends upon METT-TC. Obviously the more areas that
are established, the more difficult they become to defend as personnel and defensive means are spread over
multiple locations. The security of the trains at each echelon is the responsibility of the individual in charge
of the trains. The best defense is to avoid detection. Determine considerations that enable trains security,
which may include:
 Select trains sites that use available cover, concealment, and camouflage.
 Use movement and positioning discipline, as well as noise and light discipline to prevent
detection.
 Establish a perimeter defense.
 Establish observation posts and patrols.
 Position weapons for self-defense.
 Plan mutually supporting positions.
 Prepare a fire plan and make sector sketches.
 Identify sectors of fires.
 Emplace or select target reference points to control fires, and for use of indirect fires.
 Integrate available combat vehicles within the trains (for example, vehicles awaiting
maintenance or personnel) into the plan, and adjust the plan when vehicles depart.
 Conduct rehearsals.
 Establish rest plans.
 Identify an alarm or warning system that would enable rapid execution of the defense plan
without further guidance; the alarm, warning system, and defense plan are usually included in
the standard operating procedure.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-19

Chapter 7
 Designate a reaction force. Ensure the force is equipped to perform its mission. The ready
reaction force must be well rehearsed or briefed on ROE.
 Unit assembly.
 Friendly and threat force recognition.
 Actions on contact.
SUPPLY ROUTES
7-105. The FA battalion S-4, in coordination with the forward support company commander and battalion
S-3, select supply routes between support areas. Main supply routes are routes designated within the
supported higher HQ area of operations upon which the bulk of sustainment traffic flows in support of
operations. Select a main supply route based on the terrain, friendly disposition, enemy situation, and
scheme of maneuver. Plan alternate supply routes in the event that a main supply route is interdicted by the
enemy, or becomes too congested. In the event of contamination, either the primary or alternate main
supply route may be designated as the “dirty main supply route” to handle contaminated traffic. Alternate
supply routes should meet the same criteria as the main supply route. Military police and engineer units if
available may assist with regulating traffic, and maintain routes. Security of supply routes may require the
commander to commit non-sustainment resources.
7-106. Determining route considerations, include:
 Location and planned scheme of maneuver for subordinate units.
 Location and planned movements of other units moving through the battalion’s area of
operations.
 Route characteristics such as route classification, width, obstructions, steep slopes, sharp curves,
and type roadway surface.
 Two-way, all-weather trafficability.
 Classification of bridges and culverts.
 Requirements for traffic control such as at choke points, congested areas, confusing
intersections, or along built-up areas.
 Number and locations of crossover routes from the main supply route to alternate supply routes.
 Requirements for repair, upgrade, or maintenance of the route, fording sites, and bridges.
 Route vulnerabilities that must be protected. This may include bridges, fords, built-up areas, and
choke points.
 Enemy threats such as air attack, conventional and unconventional tactics, mines, ambushes, and
chemical strikes.
 Known or likely locations of enemy penetrations, attacks, chemical strikes, or obstacles.
 Known or potential civilian and dislocated civilian movements that must be controlled or
monitored.
SECTION XIII – SUSTAINMENT SUPPORT PLANNING

7-107. Sustainment planning must focus on tasks and systems that provide support and services to the
battalion’s Soldiers and weapon systems. Sustainment planning must address sustainment support during
phases of an operation. The battalion staff develops the sustainment support plan concurrently with the
tactical plan. Supporting sustainment plans must be as detailed as the tactical plan and fully synchronized
and integrated. Use of tactical standard operating procedure and contingency plans greatly help the support
staff officers in the planning effort. The FA battalion operation order or the FA support plan addresses the
key what, where, when, why, and how of logistic support issues as well as deviations from the tactical
standard operating procedure.
7-108. To develop and execute sound plans, logistic support personnel must achieve and maintain a high
degree of situational awareness and initiate actions well before the start of operations they are to support.
Careful management of the information flow demands that information requirements be clearly identified
early in the process, and shared with all involved.
7-20 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

7-109. FA logistics preparation is a conscious effort to identify and assess factors that facilitate, inhibit, or
deny support to the FA battalion. Logistic preparation involves a review of known FS tasks involving
sustainment support and the use of S-2 intelligence preparation of the battlefield products as an aid in
analyzing the operating, arming, fueling, fixing, moving, and sustaining factors. The goal is to determine
the FA battalion logistic support requirements that will allow the development of a sustainment estimate
and a feasible concept of support.
7-110. The logistic preparation process requires that the FA battalion commander, executive officer, and
S-3 understand data needed by sustainment support staff to plan and provide timely, effective support. It
requires that the S-1, S-4, and the forward support company commander understand the mission, the
scheme of maneuver, fires, and battlefield time and space implications for support. Logistics preparation is
a coordinated effort, which may include:
 Determine data requirements to support required actions.
 Identify sources for pertinent data and collect raw or processed data.
 Analyze collected data and develop it into decision information by assessing the impact on the
mission and competing courses of action.
 Integrate decision information into the MDMP by incorporating it into logistical estimates, fires
plans, and actions.
7-111. Determine sources that provide relevant logistical data, which may include:
 Supported higher HQ briefings, plans, and orders.
 FA battalion commander’s planning guidance and intent.
 Operations and intelligence briefings and overlays.
 Wargaming and rehearsals.
 Organizational equipment, subordinate unit status reports, and route reconnaissance overlays.
 Traffic circulation and highway regulation plans.
7-112. A sustainment running estimate, which includes logistics preparation, is a continuous analysis of
sustainment factors affecting mission accomplishment. Emphasis is on how the status of logistic support
will affect proposed courses of action. Sustainment planners use this estimate to recommend the best course
of action that can be supported and to develop plans to support the operation.
7-113. The sustainment running estimate at the FA battalion level is usually informal. At a minimum it is
formulated in a briefing format that should address facts, assumptions, and conclusions, to include as
required:
 Human resources (for example, personnel strength data, gains and losses, status of key
personnel, and casualty estimates).
 Ordnance (for example, Class V status; restrictions, distribution system, required supply rate,
controlled supply rate, expeditionary support package, maintenance, Class IX status, repair
times, and evacuation policy).
 Supply (for example, Class III [bulk] status, distribution system, and restrictions).
 Transportation (for example, status of transportation assets, critical lines of communication, and
main supply route status).
 Sustainment of Soldiers and their systems (for example, Classes I, II, III, IV, VI, VII, IX, water,
and field services status).
 Courses of action that can be supported.
7-114. Based on mission analysis, compare resources with requirements, evaluate shortfalls in close
coordination with operations planners to determine their effect on selected courses of action.
7-115. The sustainment staff must provide the sustainment running estimate in time for commanders to
confirm the feasibility of the plan, modify plans and priorities as necessary, and calculate risks. Timely
completion also facilitates the generation and coordination of supply and support requests.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 7-21

Appendix A
Field Artillery Battalion Operation Order
This appendix discusses development, format, and content of a formal FA battalion
operation order written in the five-paragraph field order format. Section I provides
context for development of the FA battalion operation order including the operations
order, concept of operations, FS plan, and attendant FA support. Section II is an
annotated outline, which provides basic guidance on the content for various parts and
paragraphs of the FA battalion operation order. Section III provides an example of the
FA battalion operation plan and operation order and associated annexes.
SECTION I – THE OPERATION ORDER, CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS, FIRES

ANNEX, FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT APPENDIX, AND FIELD ARTILLERY
BATTALION OPERATION ORDER
A-1. There is necessary input required to develop a FA battalion operations order. Section I provides an
overview of the operation order, concept of operations, fires annex, field artillery support appendix, in the
development of the FA battalion operations order.
OPERATION ORDER
A-2. The brigade FSO and the fires cell planners participate in the supported higher HQ operation order
process, which includes development and dissemination of the supported higher HQ FS plan. The brigade
commander's selected course of action, his concept of the operation, his intent, and guidance given during
the planning process form the basis for the development of the supported higher HQ operation order. The
supported higher HQ operation order merges maneuver and fires. Paragraph three of the supported higher
HQ operation order outlines how the brigade commander wants to use his FS and maneuver assets. The FS
plan, prepared by the brigade FSO and fires cell planners provides the detailed FS information that supports
the supported higher HQ operation plan or operation order. Those portions of the supported higher HQ FS
plan that detail FA battalion involvement are prepared in conjunction with the FA battalion command post.
CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS
A-3. Concept of operations is a statement of the brigade commander's intent that expands why the
supported higher HQ has been tasked to do the mission. It also states the results expected, how these results
facilitate future operations, and how, in broad terms, the brigade commander visualizes achieving those
results. The brigade commander states the concept in enough detail to ensure appropriate action by
subordinates in the absence of additional communications or further instructions. The “who” (for example,
subordinate units) that will accomplish the concept of operation is detailed in subparagraphs. If an
operations overlay is used, it is referenced here; however, the concept statement must be present on the
overlay.
FIRE SUPPORT PLAN

A-4. The brigade FSO and fires cell planners are responsible for preparation of the fires portion of the
concept of operation. The brigade S-3, FSO, and fires cell planners must carefully weigh the need for a
fires annex, and the level of detail required, based on the complexity of the operation, deviations from
standard operating procedures, maneuver commander guidance, and time available to develop, publish, and
disseminate the operation order. If the fires information in the basic fires subparagraph is enough to
constitute an adequate FS plan for the operation, a fires annex is not published. If the fires subparagraph
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-1

Appendix A
needs more amplification, the brigade FSO and fires cell planners are responsible for preparation of a fires
annex to the supported higher HQ operation order, which constitutes the supported higher HQ FS plan. The
supported higher HQ FS plan includes a subparagraph for each FS agency (for example, close air support,
FA support, and naval FS) involved in the operation. The appropriate FS representatives within the
supported higher HQ fires cell prepare input for these subparagraphs. Those portions of the supported
higher HQ FS plan that detail FA battalion involvement are prepared in conjunction with the FA battalion
command post.
FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT

A-5. For very simple operations, the FA subparagraph of the fires subparagraph of the supported higher
HQ operation order may be all that is needed to describe FA support for the impending operation. For more
complex operations that require more detail, the needed information is contained in the FA subparagraph of
the FS annex to the supported higher HQ operation order. The FA battalion operation order normally serves
as the FA appendix, although a separate FA appendix may be prepared by the FA battalion if still more
detail is needed.
SECTION II – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION OPERATION ORDER

A-6. The purpose of the written FA battalion operation plan (OPLAN) or operation order (OPORD) is to
inform FA battalion subordinate and supporting units of tasks and requirements that are peculiar to a
specific operation and to synchronize their involvement. The FA battalion operation plan or operation order
is the FA battalion commander’s tactical plan for employing the fires of FA assets under his span of
responsibility. The FA battalion operation plan or operation order is an integral supporting document to the
supported higher HQ operation plan or operation order, FS annex, and if present supporting FA appendix.
FA battalions with a support relationship of reinforcing, general support-reinforcing and general support
battalions usually prepare a stand-alone operation plan or order.
A-7. The FA battalion operation plan or operation order explains the FA battalion missions and tasks and
provides the FA battalion commander’s guidance, intent, and concept of operations. It assigns
responsibilities to subordinate and supporting elements, focusing on FA battalion actions necessary to
execute FA tasks. The FA battalion operation plan or operation order must address the FA battalion
commander’s guidance, changes to fire order standards involving how and when to attack targets, and
assignment of unit responsibilities for specific high-payoff targets and other key targets or missions. The
operation plan or operation order also addresses movement and positioning plans, mission command
arrangements (for example, data links), target acquisition tasks, sustainment information, and protection
measures.
A-8. The FA battalion’s operation plan or operation order generally does not duplicate information from
the supported higher HQ operation order, FS plan or from the battalion’s tactical standard operating
procedures. However, it may be necessary to repeat critical information in the battalion’s operation plan or
operation order if the higher-level FS plan, FA support plan, or the battalion’s tactical standard operating
procedures are not disseminated to all of the battalion’s subordinate or supporting elements.
A-9. Appropriate annexes and appendices should be prepared for portions of the operation order that are
better explained in a different format (for example, overlay or matrix), that are too extensive to be in the
operation order, that are expected to change or lengthen, or that are submitted too late to be included in the
operation order. Determine commonly included annexes and appendices, which may include:
 FS overlay.
 FS execution matrix.
 Targeting.
 Target lists.
 FA support.
 Air support.
 Naval FS.
 Cyber electromagnetic activities.
A-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Fire plan (schedules).

 Survey annex.
 Target acquisition annex.
 Digital annex AFATDS fire direction system links, and subscriber tables.
 FA positioning and movement overlay.
A-10. The FA execution matrix is a concise planning and execution tool that graphically depicts the FA
battalion’s FA tasks. It identifies key tasks for each element and ties accomplishment of those tasks to the
requirements of Annex D (Fires) of the maneuver operation order. See figure A-1 page A-21 for an
example of a FA execution matrix.
A-11. Another annex or appendix for consideration is risk management. Risk management provides a
standard by which to define and communicate the potential impact of hazards (risks) in terms of potential
loss compared to potential gain. The risk management process is aligned with each step of the MDMP.
A-12. For more information on risk management, see ATP 5-19.
FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION OPERATION ORDER

ANNOTATED FORMAT
A-13. The format for the FA battalion operation order is illustrated in the following annotated example.
Explanations are given for the various paragraphs and subparagraphs in the relevant portions of the order.
Note. See FM 6-0 for a full operation order format. For purposes of brevity, only the portions
applicable to FA are included.
[CLASSIFICATION]
Place the classification at the top and bottom of every page of the operation plan (OPLAN) or operation
order (OPORD). Place the classification marking (TS), (S), (C), or (U) at the front of each paragraph and
subparagraph in parentheses. Refer to AR 380-5 for classification and release marking instructions.
Copy___of___copies
Issuing headquarters
Place of issue
DTG of signature
Message reference number
The first line of the heading is the copy number assigned by the issuing headquarters. Maintain a log of
specific copies issued to addressees. The second line is the official designation of the issuing headquarters
(for example, 1st Infantry Division). The third line is the place of issue. It may be a code name,
postal designation, or geographic location. The fourth line is the 24 September 2015 or 24 September
2015-time group that the plan or order was signed or issued and becomes effective unless specified
otherwise in the coordinating instructions. The fifth line is a headquarters internal control number
assigned to all plans and orders in accordance with unit standard operating procedures (SOPs).
OPERATION PLAN Or ORDER [number] [(code name)] [classification of title)]

Example: OPORD 5913 (Operation Bold Buzzard) (Unclassified)
Number plans and orders consecutively by calendar year. Include code name, if any.
(U) References: List documents essential to understanding the OPLAN or OPORD. List references
concerning a specific function in the appropriate attachments.
[page number]
[CLASSIFICATION]
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-3

Appendix A
[CLASSIFICATION]
(a) List maps and charts first. Map entries include series number, country, sheet names, or numbers,
edition, and scale.
(b) List other references in subparagraphs.
(U) Time Zone Used throughout the OPLAN or OPORD: State the time zone used in the area of
operations during execution. When the OPLAN or OPORD applies to units in different time zones, use
Greenwich Mean (ZULU) Time.
(U) Task Organization: Describe the organization of forces available to the issuing headquarters and their
command and support relationships. Refer to Annex A (Task Organization) if long or complicated. This
subparagraph gives a clear statement of the organization including command or support relationship. For
United States Marine Corps or NATO unit if assigned, FA tactical missions of the subordinate units in the FA
battalion (see FM 3-09). Task organization will normally be done by various phases corresponding to the
operation. Anticipated on-order changes to organization or tactical missions are included in this subparagraph.
List those FA battalion subordinate units that will provide support to BCT battalions or squadrons (for
example, dedicated elements) and supporting FAB, DIVARTY or other FA units with a command or support
relationship.
1. (U) Situation. The situation paragraph describes the conditions of the operational environment that impact
operations in the following subparagraphs:
a. (U) Area of Interest. Describe the area of interest. Refer to Annex B (Intelligence) as required.
b. (U) Area of Operations. Describe the area of operations. Refer to the appropriate map by its
subaparagraph under references, for example, “Map, reference (b).” See Appendix 2 (Operation
Overlay) to Annex C (Operations) as required.
(1) (U) Terrain. Describe the aspects of terrain that impact operations. Refer to Annex B
(Intelligence) as required.
(2) (U) Weather. Describe the aspects of weather that impact operations. Refer to Annex B
(Intelligence) as required.
c. (U) Enemy Forces. Identify enemy forces and appraise their general capabilities. Describe the
enemy’s disposition, location, strength, and probable courses of action. Identify adversaries and
known or potential terrorist threats within the area of operations. Refer to Annex B (Intelligence) as
required. Specific information on the threat to the FA battalion should include:
 Indirect fire threat.
 Ground threat.
 Air threat.
A-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

d. (U) Friendly Forces. Briefly identify the missions of friendly forces and the objectives, goals, and
missions of civilian organizations that impact the issuing headquarters in following subparagraphs:
(1) (U) Higher Headquarters Mission and Intent. Identify and state the mission and
commander’s intent for headquarters two levels up and one level up from the issuing headquarters.
(a) (U) Higher Headquarters Two Levels Up. Identify the higher headquarters two
echelons above (for example, Joint Task Force-18).
1. (U) Mission.
2. (U) Commander’s Intent.
(b) (U) Higher Headquarters. Identify the higher headquarters one echelon above (for
example, 1st [U.S.] Armored Division).
1. (U) Mission.
2. (U) Commander’s Intent.
(2) (U) Missions of Adjacent Units. Identify and state the missions of adjacent units and other
units whose actions have a significant impact on the issuing headquarters.
e. (U) Interagency, Intergovernmental, and Nongovernmental Organizations. Identify and state

the objective or goals and primary tasks of those non-Department of Defense organizations that have a
significant role within the area of operations. Refer to Annex V (Interagency Coordination) as required.
f. (U) Civil Considerations. Describe the critical aspects of the civil situation that impact operations.
Refer to appendix 1 (Intelligence Estimate) to Annex B (Intelligence) as requried.
g. (U) Attachments and Detachments. List units attached to or detached from the issuing
headquarters. State when each attachment or detachment is effective (for example, on order, on commitment of
the reserve) if different from the effective time of the OPLAN or OPORD. Do not repeat information already
already listed in Annex A (Task Organization). This includes attached target acquisition assets and sensor
system downlinks, as well as detached batteries and platoons.
h. (U)Assumptions. List assumptions used in the development of the OPLAN or OPORD. If the FA
battalion operation plan supports another operation plan, assumptions may be required. If the FA battalion
operation order is part of an operation order, assumptions are not included.
2. (U) MISSION. State the unit’s mission—a short description of the who, what (task), when, where, and why
(purpose) that clearly indicates the action to be taken and the reason for doing so.
3. (U) EXECUTION. Describe how the commander intends to accomplish the mission in terms of the
commander’s intent, an overarching concept of operations, schemes of employment for each warfighting
function, assessment, specified tasks to subordinate units, and key coordinating instructions in the
subparagraphs below.
a. (U) Commander’s Intent. Commanders develop their intent statement personally. The commander’s
intent is a clear, concise statement of what the force must do and conditions the force must establish with
respect to the enemy, terrain, and civil considerations that represent the desired end state. It succinctly
describes what constitutes the success of an operation and provides the purpose and conditions that define that
desired end state. The commander’s intent must be easy to remember and clearly understood two echelons
down. The commander’s intent includes:
 Purpose—an expanded description of the operation’s purpose beyond the “why” of the mission
statement.
 Key tasks—those significant activities the force as a whole must perform to achieve the desired
end state.
 End state—a description of the desired future conditions that represent success.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-5

Appendix A
b. (U) Concept of Operations. The concept of operations is a statement that directs the manner in
which subordinate units cooperate to accomplish the mission and establishes the sequence of actions the force
will use to achieve the end state. It is normally expressed in terms of the commander’s desired operational
framework as discussed in ADRP 3-0. It states the principal tasks required, the responsible subordinate units,
and how the principal tasks complement one another. Normally, the concept of operations projects the status of
the force at the end of the operation. If the mission dictates a significant change in tasks during the operation,
the commander may phase the operation. The concept of operations may be a single paragraph, divided into
two or more subparagraphs, or if unusually lengthy, summarize here with details located in Annex C
(Operations). If the concept of operations is phased, describe each phase in a subparagraph. Label these
subparagraphs as “Phase” followed by the appropriate Roman numeral, for example, “Phase I.” If the
operation is phased, all paragraphs and subparagraphs of the base order and all annexes must mirror the
phasing established in the concept of operations. The operation overlay and graphic depictions of lines of effort
help portray the concept of operations and are located in Annex C (Operations). The concept of operations is a
detailed statement of the FA battalion commander’s visualization of the conduct of FA battalion support for the
BCT operation by phase to the desired end state. The concept clarifies the purpose of the BCT operation (by
phase), then how the FA battalion will support it. It is a detailed explanation of the commander’s intent. It is
stated in enough detail to ensure appropriate action by subordinate units in the absence of more specific
instructions. This paragraph may include a summary of the BCT operation plan or operation order concept of
operations by phase for units that do not receive the BCT operation order.
c. (U) Scheme of Movement and Maneuver. Describe the employment, of maneuver units in
accordance with the concept of operations. Provide the primary tasks of maneuver units conducting the
decisive operation and the purpose of each. Next, state the primary tasks of maneuver units conducting shaping
operations, including security operations, and the purpose of each. For offensive tasks, identify the form of
maneuver. For defensive tasks, identify the type of defense. For stability tasks, describe the role of maneuver
units by primary stability tasks. If the operation is phased, identify the main effort by phase. Identify and include
priorities for the reserve. Refer to Annex C (Operations) as required.
(1) (U) Scheme of Mobility and Countermobility. State the scheme of mobility and
countermobility including priorities by unit or area. Refer to Annex G (Engineer) as required.
(2) (U) Scheme of Battlefield Obscuration. State the scheme of battlefield obscuration,
including priorities by unit or area. Refer to Appenix 9 (Battlefield Obscuration) to Annex C (Operations)
asrequired.
(3) (U) Scheme of Information Collection. Describe how the commander intends to use
reconnaissance missions and surveillance tasks to support the concept of operations. Include the primary
reconnaissance objectives. Refer to Annex L (Information Collection) as required.
(Note: Army forces do not conduct reconnaissance missions and surveillance within the United States and its
territories. For domestic operations, this paragraph is titled “Information Awareness and Assessment” and the
contents of this paragraph comply with Executive Order 12333.)
d. (U) Scheme of Intelligence. Describe how the commander envisions intelligence supporting the
concept of operations. Include the priority of effort to situation development, targeting, and assessment. State
the priority of intelligence support to units and areas. Refer to Annex B (Intelligence) as required.
e. (U) Scheme of Fires. Describe how the commander intends to use fires to support the concept of
operations with emphasis on the scheme of maneuver. State the FS tasks and the purpose of each task. State the
priorities for, allocation of, and restrictions on fires, as it applies to the BCT operation. Refer to Annex D
(Fires) as required.
f. (U) Scheme of Protection. Describe how the commander envisions protection supporting the
concept of operations. Include the priorities of protection by unit and area. Include survivability. Address the
scheme of operational area security, including security for routes, bases, and critical infrastructure. Identify
tactical operating forces and other reaction forces. Use subparagraphs for protection categories (for example,
air and missile defense and explosive ordnance disposal) based on the situation. Refer to Annex E (Protection)
as required.
A-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

g. (U) Cyber Electromagnetic Activities. Describe how cyber electromagnetic activities (including
cyberspace operations, electronic warfare and spectrum management operations), supports the concept of
opeations. Refer to Appendix 12 (Cyber Electromagnetic Activities) to Annex C (Operations) as required. Refer
to Annex H (Signal) for defensive cyberspace operations, network operations and spectrum management
operations as required.
h. (U) Stability Tasks. Describe how stability tasks support the concept of operations. Describe how the
commander envisions the conduct of stability operations in coordination with other organizations. (See FM 3-
07.) If other organizations or the host nation are unable to provide for civil security, restoration of essential
services, and civil control, then commanders with an assigned area of operations must do so with available
resources, request additional resources, or request relief for these requirements from higher
headquarters.Commanders assign specific responsibilities for stability tasks to subordinate units in paragraph
3j (Tasks to Subordinate Units) and paragraph 3k (Coordinataing Instructions). Refer to Annex C (Operations)
and Annex K (Civil Affairs Operations) as required.
i. (U) Assessment. Describe the priorities for assessment and identify the measures of effectiveness
used to assess end state conditions and objectives. Refer to Annex M (Assessment) as required.
j. (U) Tasks to Subordinate Units. State the task assigned to each unit that reports directly to the
headquarters issuing the order. Each task must include who (the subordinate unit assigned the task), what (the
task itself), when, where, and why (purpose). Use a separate subparagraph for each unit. List units in task
organization sequence. Place tasks that affect two or more units in paragraph 3k. (Coordinating
Instructions).This portion is used to issue instructions unique to subordinate units and to amplify instructions
found in the matrices. For example, “See FA battalion support matrix and overlay for movement, position
areas, azimuths of fire, and location of sustainment units and functions."
k. (U) Coordinating Instructions. List only instructions and tasks applicable to two or more units not
covered in unit SOPs. Include instructions and details of coordination applicable to two or more sub elements of
the FA battalion. Instructions included in this subparagraph may also be addressed in annexes to the FA
battalion operation plan or operation order. If a separate annex is developed, include in the coordinating
instructions subparagraph only items of general interest. Place details of interest only to a particular element in
the annex. If an annex is prepared, reference it (for example, “see Annex___”) in the body of the FA battalion
operation plan or operation order. This paragraph should detail instructions, which may include:
 Time or condition when the OPORD becomes effective.

 Target acquisition including a counterfire reference grid and instructions to or about specific
target acquisition sources.
 Survey including priorities for survey, accuracy required, sources authorized, timing, position
requirements, and future plans spheroid, datum, ellipsoid, codes for survey and computations.
 Automated and manual fire control and fire direction instructions, especially coordination
requirements with units of similar, but not identical, automated systems. Mutual support unit
taskings and changes from continuity of operations standard operating procedures are identified
here.
 High-payoff target list taken directly from BCT operation order or operation plan.
 Attack guidance matrix, that may appear as a matrix in the annex, or taken directly from the
BCT operation order or operation plan.
 Targeting synchronization matrix from brigade combat team operation order or operation plan
and fires cell.
 Chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear defense.
 Meteorology including source, type, and times of meteorological data messages.
 Liaison requirements.
 Fire plan(s) including target list, schedules of fires, schedules of targets, and FSCMs.
 Commander’s critical information requirements, priority intelligence requirements, essential
elements of friendly information, friendly forces information requirements, and other
intelligence datum and information, as required.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-7

Appendix A
 Intelligence acquisition tasks, as required.

 Ammunition restrictions (for example, expenditure restrictions, approval requirements, and risk
limitations for dual-purpose improved conventional munitions based on expected dud rates).
 Fratricide prevention measures (for example, special vehicle markings) that are not found in the
tactical standard operating procedure.
 Rehearsals.
 Time or condition when the OPORD becomes effective.
 Commander’s Critical Information Requirements. List commander’s critical Information
requirements (CCIRs).
 Essential Elements of Friendly Information. List essential elements of friendly Information
(EEFIs).
 FSCMs. List critical FS coordination or control measures.
 Airspace Coordinating Measures. List critical airspace coordinating or control measures.
 Rules of Engagement. List rules of engagement. Refer to Appendix 11 (Rules of Engagement) to
Annex C (Operations) as required.
 Risk Reduction Control Measures. State measures specific to this operation not included in unit
SOPs. They may include mission-oriented protective posture, operational exposure guidance,
troop-safety criteria, and fratricide avoidance measures. Refer to Annex E (Protection) as
required.
 Personnel Recovery Coordination Measures. Refer to Appendix 2 (Personnel Recovery) to
Annex E (Protection) as required.
 Environmental Considerations. Refer to Appendix 5 (Environmental Considerations) to Annex G
(Engineer) as required.
 Themes and Messages. List information themes and messages.
 Other Coordinating Instructions. List in subparagraphs any additional coordinating instructions
and tasks that apply to two or more units, such as the operational timeline and any other critical
timing or events.
A-8 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

4. (U) SUSTAINMENT. Describe the concept of sustainment, including priorities of sustainment by unit or
area. Include instructions for administrative movements, deployments, and transportation—or references to
applicable appendixes—if appropriate. As a minimum, the controlled supply rate and the sustainment locations
(for example, combat trains, field trains, and casualty collection points) should be given. Address only those
sustainment aspects that apply to the operation. Address the pertinent aspects of the sustainment functions of
manning, operating, arming, fueling, fixing, moving, and sustaining Soldiers and their systems. Use the
following subparagraphs to provide the broad concept of support for logistics, personnel, and health system
support. Provide detailed instructions for each sustainment subfunction in the appendixes to Annex F
(Sustainment).
a. (U) Logistics. Refer to Annex F (Sustainment) as required.
b. (U) Presonnel. Refer to Annex F (Sustainment) as required.
c. (U) Health Service Support. Refer to Annex F (Sustainment) as required.
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL. The command and signal paragraph should list the locations of the FA battalion
command post and the locations of higher, supporting, and supported unit command posts. The FA battalion
commander’s planned location during the operation, and alternate command post can be in this paragraph.
Plans should also address any alternate battalion fire direction center arrangements not covered in, or that are
changed from, unit standingstandard operating procedure. Other automated mission command systems used or
interface requirements, and any particular aspects for their use also are included here. Address succession of
command if other than tactical standingstandard operating procedure. This information should be entered into
the following paragraphs:
a. (U) Command.
(1) (U) Location of Commander Key Leaders. State where the commander and key leaders intend
to be during the operaion, by phase if the operation is phased.
(2) (U) Succession of Command. State the succession of command if not covered in the unit’s
SOPs.
(3) (U) Liaison Requirements. State liaison requirements not covered in the unit’s SOPs.
b. (U) Control. The second subparagraph contains the index of the effective signal operating instructions
to include edition in effect and courier schedule. Special instructions on the use of radios, wire, multiple
subscriber equipment, retransmission elements, and signals not covered in tactical standard operating
procedures are included here. Additionally, include radio frequency hop instructions, specific data
communications requirements, and multiple subscriber instructions peculiar to the operation. Also, list any
special signals not covered by standard operating procedure here (for example, vehicle recognition markings).
(1) (U) Command Posts. Describe the employment of command posts, including the location of each
command post and its time of opening and closing, as appropriate. State the primary controlling command post
for specific tasks or phases of the operation (for example, “The division tactical command post will control the
air assault”).
(2) (U) Reports. List reports not covered in SOPs. Refer to Annex R (Reports) as required.
c. (U) Signal. Describe the concept of signal support, including location and movement of key signal
nodes and critical electromagnetic spectrum considerations throughout the operation. Refer to Annex H
(Signal) as required.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-9

Appendix A
ACKNOWLEDGE: Provide instructions for how the addressees acknowledge receipt of the OPLAN or
OPORD. The word “acknowledge” may suffice. Refer to the message reference number if necessary.
Acknowledgement of an OPLAN or OPORD means that it has been received and understood.
[Commander’s last name]
[Commander’s rank]
The commander or authorized representative signs the original copy. If the representative signs the original,
add the phrase “For the Commander.” The signed copy is the historical copy and remains in the headquarters’
files.
OFFICIAL:
[Authenticator’s Name]
[Authenticator’s Position]
Use only if the commander does not sign the original order. If the commander signs the original, no further
authentication is required. If the commander does not sign, the signature of the preparing staff officer
requires authentication and only the last name and rank of the commander appear in the signature block.
ANNEXES:
Note. Annexes should be prepared for portions of the FA battalion operation order that are
explained better in a different format (for example, overlay or matrix), that are too extensive for
the BCT operation plan or operation order, that are expected to change or lengthen, or that are
submitted too late to be included. Often subordinate units will not receive the basic BCT
operation order or operation plan or FS annex. Therefore, reprints of portions of these documents
may be required and included as annexes.
Order Annexes as they are referenced in the basic FA battalion operation plan or operation
order. The tactical standard operating procedure may specify that some annexes will always
be produced. Determine the need for common annexes used at FA battalion level, which may
include:
 FA execution matrix - FA battalion command post.
 FA battalion positioning and movement overlay - FA battalion command post.
 Fire plan (note: S-3 may refer to plan names and subordinate elements, can print out target list,
schedules of fires and schedules of targets and FSCMs instead of developing a separate annex) -
BCT fires cell.
 Survey - FA battalion.
 Target acquisition - FA battalion command post.
 AFATDS and other fire direction systems - FA battalion command post.
Other annexes used if time permits–
 Intelligence (for example, overlay, annex, priority intelligence requirements, and information
requirements lists) - BCT or FA brigade command post.
 Sustainment overlay - FA battalion combat trains command post.
 BCT overlays – BCT, FAB, and DIVARTY command post.
 Meteorological data- FA battalion, FAB, and DIVARTY command post.
 Task organization (may be attached from operation order).
 Obstacle overlay - BCT or FAB command post.
 Rules of engagement- BCT, FAB, or DIVARTY command post.
 Air defense artillery, engineer, and other supporting element plans, as required.
 Special distribution items (for example, fratricide prevention information).
 Composite risk management (for example, potential impact of hazards (risks) in terms of
potential loss compared to potential gain).
A-10 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

SECTION III – EXAMPLE FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION OPERATION

ORDER AND ANNEXES
A-14. An example of a FA battalion operation order is shown below. At the top and bottom of each page
insert the classification of the operation order, and at the bottom of each page of the operation order put a
page number.
FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION OPERATION ORDER (OPORD)

BODY (EXAMPLE)
(Classification)
Copy___of___copies
HQs, 1-37 FA, 3-3 ABCT (+) 52 ID
Barstow, CA
271800APR15
MJ9861
OPORD 5913 (Operation Bold Buzzard) (Unclassified)
(U) References:
 Maps: Series V795, California; Sheets; 2453 I, 2454 I, 2454 II, 2553 I, 2553 IV, 2554 I, 2554 II,
2554 III, 2554 IV, 2653 IV, 2654 III, 2654 IV, scale 1:50,000.
 OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
(U) Time Zone Used throughout the OPLAN or OPORD:

Time Zone Used Throughout Order: LOCAL
(U) Task Organization:
 1-37 FA, 3-3 ABCT (+) (155, self-propelled) (M109A6).
 3-163 FA, 52d FAB (155, self-propelled) (M109A6) (R).
 See Annex A (Task Organization) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
1. (U) SITUATION.
Following a breakdown in negotiations over a disputed border province, Eastland walked out of peace talks
with Westland and initiated international propaganda claiming historical rights to several religious sites in
Westland. Although the disputed border province is ethnically mixed, the majority of its population supports the
Westland government. There are, however, Eastland sympathizers in the border region, especially among its
nomadic population. In response to several Eastland-sponsored terrorist attacks against Westland civilians in
Irwin City and an announcement by Eastland that they would conduct military exercises along the international
border, X (United States) Corps was ordered to conduct a joint exercise with the Westland Home Guard
(WHG). During the early evening hours of 20APR15, elements of the Eastland Operational Strategic Command
West (OSC-W) conducted a cross-border attack to seize key terrain prior to the mobilization of WHG forces
and the closure of X United States Corps. WHG border forces engaged these units and forced the attack to stall
generally along phase line (PL) PRUNE. elements of OSC-W are currently holding key terrain vicinity PL
RAISIN at approximately 75% combat power, while the remainder of OSC-W completes preparations to
resume offensive operations on or about 01MAY15. The goals of expected future Eastland attacks are
destruction of United States forces to cause their withdrawal, pre-emption of a counterattack to restore the
international border, and defeat of Westland forces.
a. (U) Area of Interest.
See Annex B (Intelligence) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
b. (U) Area of Operations.
See map, reference (1) Appendix 2 (Operation Overlay) to Annex C (Operations) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3
ABCT (+), 52 ID.
(1) (U) Terrain.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-11

Appendix A
See Appendix 3 (Terrain) to Annex F (Engineer) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
(2) (U) Weather.
See Appendix 4 (Weather) to Annex B (Intelligence) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
c. (U) Enemy Forces.
23DTG conducts a decentralized area defense to retain control of the key terrain captured during the
previous offensive action in order to facilitate future OSC-W offensive operations in 72-96 hours. The
23DTG disruption zone extends to PL PINE and the 231BTG disruption zone extends from PL PRUNE to
PL RAISIN. 23DTG reconnaissance forces occupy observation posts between PL PINE and PL PRUNE,
while 231BTG and battalion reconnaissance forces occupy observation posts between PL PRUNE and PL
RAISIN. Their task is to observe likely BLUFOR decision points and predicted enemy locations to identify
high-value targets for indirect fire attack and to identify the BLUFOR main effort. The 231BTG disruption
force consists of a BMP company (+) from the 231BTG reserve reinforced with one tank platoon (T72),
one antitank platoon (9P148), two air defense platoons (ZSU-23-4, SA18), and a roving battery of 2S1s. Its
task is to conduct a maneuver defense to attrite the lead BLUEFOR combined arms battalion to allow the
battle zone forces to defeat the BCT forward of PL RAISIN. The battle zone consists of a BMP BN (+)
comprised of three BMP-2 companies, each with a tank platoon, deployed in company complex battle
positions vicinity Hill 876, Hill 781 and Hill 985, and an economy of force complex battle position
consisting of a truck mobile infantry company and a BMP-2 platoon in Granite Pass to control the north-
south lines of communication into Irwin City. The battalion will defend from these positions to inflict
maximum casualties on friendly forces and force our attack to culminate prior to securing the key terrain.
Unoccupied defensive positions have been detected west of Medina Ma’akl (NV 4714) which could
potentially be occupied either by the BMP company currently located vic Hill 985 or the 231BTG reserve.
The enemy may use forces in the disruption zone to create windows of opportunity for possible spoiling
attacks by the 231BTG reserve. The 231BTG indirect fire assets, consisting of two 2S1 batteries and a
battery of BM-21s, will initially focus on supporting the disruption zone to destroy friendly reconnaissance
forces and attrite the lead task force. Once friendly forces reach PL RAISIN, enemy priority of fires will
shift to massing fire in planned kill zones within the 231BTG battle zone. Special purpose forces teams and
direct action cell terrorists west of PL PRUNE will conduct reconnaissance operations, ambushes, and
attack high payoff targets to disrupt the 52 ID attack.
The 231BTG indirect fire assets that are expected to support forces opposing 3-3 ABCT (+) - two 2S3
batteries (152-mm self-propelled) and a battery of BM-21s (122-mm) in the support zone and a roving
battery of 2S3s (152-mmself-propelled) in the disruption zone—will initially focus on supporting the
disruption zone to destroy friendly reconnaissance forces and attack the lead BLUEFOR combined arms
battalion. Once 3-3 ABCT (+) reaches PL RAISIN, priority of fires will shift to massing fire in planned kill
zones within the 231BTG battle zone. Special purpose forces teams and Direct Action cells west of PL
PINE will conduct reconnaissance operations, ambushes, and attack high payoff targets to disrupt 3-3
ABCT (+) attack. special purpose forces teams and Direct Action cells pose a threat to weapons locating
radar sections and FA batteries and as well as advance parties and survey.
For additional information see Annex B (Intelligence) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
d. (U) Friendly Forces.
At 301830APR15 52 ID conducts a coordinated frontal attack with 85 SBCT (+) and 3-3 ABCT (+)
abreast, the main effort in the south. The decisive operation is the defeat of the OSC-W forces vicinity
Objective HOOK while minimizing collateral damage in Irwin City. 85 SBCT (+), the division main effort,
attacks to defeat enemy forces vicinity Objective HOOK. On order attacks to the limit of advance and
secures key mountain passes vicinity Objective PUNCH. 3-3 ABCT (+) in the north conducts a shaping
operation to protect the flank of the main effort. 2-52 ABCT (+) attacks to defeat OSC-W forces vicinity
Objective ROUNDHOUSE. On order screens the division’s northern flank from PL PINE to PL SPRUCE.
3BCT, division reserve, occupies assembly area HOUSTON in the southwest with a planning priority to
assume the main effort. 3BCT reconnaissance squadron (2-20 CAV) initially screens the division front
between PL PINE and PL OAK. On order moves to assembly area HOUSTON to link-up with parent unit
and prepare for future operations. The purpose of fires during the attack is to destroy (reduce by 30%) the
artillery supporting the 231BTG. 52 FAB SEAD supports multinational air force attacks on the enemy
A-12 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Integrated Fires Command in the northeast and combat aviation brigade attacks on the elements in the
southeast.
A division preparation triggered by the 85 SBCT (+) will disrupt (reduce by 10%) maneuver forces in
defensive positions vicinity Objectives HOOK and JAB. During the attack, priority of effort is SEAD for
cross-forward line of own troops operations, then counterfire, then support of the close battle. Priority of
electronic attack is against indirect fire systems, mission command nodes, and air defense. 52 FAB is the
counterfire headquarters and will provide target acquisition and counterfire. Division counterfire priorities
are rocket and missile launchers, cannon systems, and then artillery command and control systems. Close
air support weight of effort (two missions) is to the division main effort.
(1) (U) 52 ID.
(a). (U) Mission. At 301830APR15, 52 ID attacks to the limit of advance, PL SPRUCE, to defeat
OSC-W forces and secure key terrain vicinity Objective KAYAK in order to protect the north flank of the
corps main effort and restore the territorial integrity of Westland.
(b). (U) Commander’s Intent.
Purpose is to restore the territorial integrity of Westland. We will do this by decisively defeating
OSC-W forces in our area of operations and defeat any subsequent cross-border attacks while
protecting the flank of the corps main effort.
Key tasks:
 The rapid defeat of enemy forces in the disruption zone forces.
 A coordinated attack by the lead BCTs to defeat enemy forces vicinity Objectives HOOK and
JAB.
 A rapid build-up of combat power along the international border (vicinity Objectives
UPPERCUT and PUNCH) in order to control key passes into Westland.
End state. OSC-W forces in the area of operations are defeated and unable to influence the 23 AD, the
division in control of key terrain along the international border, and our forces in a hasty defense prepared
for future operations.
(2) (U) 3-3 ABCT (+).
This operation begins with shaping operation #1, the reconnaissance of Objectives KINGS,
BLAZERS, SONICS, and JAZZ. Team reconnaissance (dismounted reconnaissance elements from each of
the BCT’s combined arms battalions) is inserted via air on or about line of departure-24 hours to confirm or
deny enemy dispositions and observe enemy attempts to reposition against 85 SBCT (+). Team
reconnaissance operates under BCT control, and executes BCT reconnaissance objectives. Shaping
operation #2 also begins on a line of departure -24 hours as 3-1 CAV begins its zone reconnaissance of the
disruption zone. Shaping operation #2 continues when 3-1 CAV conducts a forward passage of lines with
reconnaissance squadron of 3BCT and attacks to PL PORTLAND to defeat the enemy and its disruption
zone forces to ensure freedom of maneuver for follow-on friendly forces. As 3-1 CAV crosses PL PRUNE,
1-15 IN attacks along AXIS DUKE, through attack position LION, and prepares to accept battle handover
at PL PORTLAND. At the same time, 2-69 AR attacks along AXIS Count. On order, the BCT begins its
decisive operation (the destruction of enemy forces vicinity Objective KINGS) and defeat of enemy forces
vicinity Objective SONICS). 1-15 IN conducts shaping operation #3 by attacking to defeat the enemy
forces vicinity Objective BLAZERS to protect the flank of the BCT main effort. Once this shaping
operation has started 2-69 AR attacks to destroy the enemy vicinity Objective KINGS and defeat of enemy
forces vicinity Objective SONICS to protect the flank of the 52 ID main effort. As 2-69 AR begins its
attack, 1-15 IN crosses PL PORTLAND and initiates shaping operation #4 to fix enemy elements on
Objective JAZZ in order to protect the flank of 2-69 AR. On order 3-1 CAV attacks to defeat the enemy
vicinity Objective JAZZ as 1-15 IN and 2-69 AR attack to the limit of advance to defeat any remaining
Westland forces in sector and secure key terrain vicinity Objective SPURS and Objective SIXERS (52 ID
Objective UPPERCUT) in order to set the conditions for the defense. The brigade accepts risk by having no
tactical combat force.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-13

Appendix A
(a). (U) Mission: At 301830APR15, 3-3 ABCT (+) attacks to the limit of advance to defeat OSC-
W forces vicinity Objective JAB in order to protect the northern flank of 85 SBCT (+), the division main
effort. On order secures key terrain vicinity Objective UPPERCUT, transitions to a hasty defense, and
prepares for future operations.
(b). (U) Commander’s Intent.
Purpose: Defeat enemy forces in area of operations so they cannot reposition against the 85 SBCT
(+).
Key Tasks:
 Emplace reconnaissance elements early so we are aware of, and have the flexibility to respond to
any enemy attempts to reposition forces.
 Defeat the disruption zone combat platoons and air defense artillery ambush elements to allow
for the unimpeded movement of the brigade main body.
 Isolate and decisively defeat the enemy forces in each company complex battle position.
 Quickly build-up combat power and control key terrain along the international border.
End State: OSC-W forces in the 3-3 ABCT (+) area of operations are defeated. The BCT is at no less than
75% combat power. 1-15 IN and 2-69 AR are in hasty defenses controlling key terrain along PL SPRUCE.
3-1 CAV has established a hasty defense in depth.
(2) (U) Missions of Adjacent Units. Not Applicable

e. (U) Interagency, Intergovernmental, and Nongovernmental Organizations. See Annex V
(Interagency Coordination) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
f. (U) Civil Considerations. See Appendix 1 (Intelligence Estimate) to Annex B (Intelligence) OPORD
0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
g. (U) Attachments and Detachments. See Annex A (Task Organization) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT
(+), 52 ID.
h. (U) Assumptions.
 We will retain control of the key terrain.
 We will have air superiority.
 The threat will conduct an area defense.
2. (U) MISSION.
Not later than (NLT) 301830APR15 1-37 FA and 3-163 FA, 52 FAB (R) supports 3-3 ABCT (+) attack to the
limit of advance (PL SPRUCE) to defeat enemy forces vicinity Objective KINGS and Objective BLAZERS and
secure key terrain vicinity Objective SPURS and Objective SIXERS in order to protect the northern flank of the
52 ID main effort.
3. (U) EXECUTION.
a. (U) Commander’s Intent.
NLT 301830APR07 1-37 FA will support with fires the 3-3 ABCT (+) attack to defeat the threat forces
vicinity Objective KINGS and Objective BLAZERS.
Purpose: See concept of operations below.
Key tasks: See the six FS tasks below.
End state: See assessment and effect for each FS task below.
A-14 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

b. Concept of Operations.
(1) Fire Support Task #1
Who: 3-163 FA (R).
When: See trigger.
Where: See key BCT targets below.
What (Task): Destroy (reduce by 30%) enemy Disruption Zone forces in area of operations.
Why (Purpose): To allow 3-1 CAV to defeat the disruption zone force.
How:
Priority: FA priority of fires: 3-1 CAV.
Allocation: 1-15 IN, one active critical friendly zone (CFZ); 2-69 AR, one active CFZ.
Key BCT Targets: 3-1 CAV AB0001 (named area of interest B14), AB0005, AB0010 (3 X
BN3).
Target Allocations: 3-1 CAV can plan two additional targets.
Trigger: 3-1 CAV, as acquired with eyes on NET 3-1 CAV line of departure.
Restrictions: Division coordinated fire line: PL RAISIN; 3-3 ABCT (+) coordinated fire line
PL PORTLAND. No destructive fires prior to 301830APR06. Suppressive fires for
disengagement of 3-1 CAV early reconnaissance are acceptable.
Assessment (Effect): End state—Three BMPs (Enemy Armored Personnel Carrier), one T72,
and two 9P148s (AT-5) destroyed.
Who: 3-163 FA (R).
When: See triggers for each key target below.
Where: See key targets below.
What (Task): Destroy (reduce by 60%) one platoon at the point of penetration vicinity
Objectives KINGS, BLAZERS, and SONICS in the battle zone.
Why (Purpose): Provide favorable force ratios at the point of penetration of each company
battle position.
How:
Priority: FA priority of fires: 2-69 AR.
Allocation: 2-69 AR one active CFZ; 1-15 IN, one active CFZ.
Key BCT Targets-
 AB0015 (NV374083)-BMP platoon, Fired as Series HARRY (3 X BN 6); Observer: 2-69 AR 4;
Trigger: 2-69 AR support force ready to occupy support by fire position.
 AB0020 (NV378088)-BMP platoon, Fired as Series HARRY (3 X BN 6); Observer: 2-69 AR 4;
Trigger: 2-69 AR, support force ready to occupy support by fire position.
 AB0025 (NV395129)-BMP platoon, Fired as Series DICK (3 X BN 6); Observer: 1-15 IN 5;
Trigger: 1-15 IN, support force ready to occupy support by fire position.
 AB0030 (NV395124)-BMP platoon, Fired as Series DICK (3 X BN 6); Observer: 1-15 IN 5;
Trigger: 1-15 IN support force ready to occupy support by fire position.
Target Allocations: 1-15 IN may plan four (4) additional targets in support of attack vicinity
Objective KINGS and SONICS, 2-69 AR may plan two (2) additional targets in support of
attack vicinity Objective BLAZERS.
Restrictions: Division coordinated fire line: PL ELM; Brigade coordinated fire line PL
EUGENE; 2-69 AR, one active CFZ; 1-15 IN; one active CFZ; 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN and 2-69
AR will plan no-fire area (NFA) around scout and FIST locations forward of their respective
forward line of own troops.
Assessment (Effect): End state—Two BMPs and one T72 vicinity Objective KINGS and
SONICS destroyed; two BMPs and one T72 vicinity Objective BLAZERS destroyed.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-15

Appendix A

Who: 1-37 FA.
When: See triggers for each key target below.
What (Task): Disrupt the ability of two platoons at the point of penetration vicinity
Objectives KINGS and BLAZERS from placing effective direct fires on breaching forces.
Why (Purpose): To allow the successful establishment of breach lanes vicinity Objectives
KINGS and BLAZERS.
How:
Priority: FA priority of fires: 1-15 IN.
Allocation: One active CFZ; 1-15 IN, one active CFZ.
Key BCT Targets-
 AB0035 (NV390125)-Smoke vicinity Objective BLAZERS; Observer: 1-15 IN; Trigger: Trail
Company, -1-15 IN crosses PL PORTLAND.
 AB0025 (NV395129)-BMP platoon, Suppression (3 X BN3); Observer: 1-15 IN; Trigger:

Support force in support by fire position.
 AB0030 (NV395124)-BMP platoon, Suppression (3 X BN3); Observer: 1-15 IN; Trigger:
 AB0015 (NV374083)-BMP platoon, Suppression (3 X BN3); Observer: 2-69 AR; Trigger:
 AB0020 (NV378088)-BMP platoon, Suppression (3 X BN3); Observer: 2-69 AR; Trigger:
 AB0040 (NV365078)-Smoke vicinity Objective BLAZERS; Observer: 2-69 AR; Trigger: Trail
Company, 2-69 AR crosses PL PORTLAND.
Target Allocations: 2-69 AR may plan one (1) additional target in support of attack vicinity
Objective KING.
Smoke: 2-69 AR allocated 30 minutes FA smoke (Length: Cross-1400m, Quartering-1000m,
Head and Tail-300m); 1-15 IN allocated 30 minutes FA smoke (Length: Cross-1400m,
Quartering-1000m, Head and Tail-300m).
Restrictions: Restrictions: Division coordinated fire line – PL ELM. 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN and 2-
69 AR will plan NFA around scout and FIST locations forward of their respective forward
line of own troops. 2-69 AR one active CFZ; 1-15 IN; one active CFZ.
Assessment (Effect): End state—Direct fire weapon systems suppressed; 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN
and 2-69 AR breaches complete without effective enemy direct fires.
(4) Fire support Task #4
Who: 1-37 FA.
When: On order.
Where:
What (Task): Limit the effective massed artillery fires against 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN and 2-69
AR.
Why (Purpose): To protect critical friendly forces during the BCTs attack.
How:
Priority: FA priority of fires: 3-1 CAV, On order 1-15 IN.
Allocation: CFZ Allocations: 1-15 IN – five (5) planned, two (2) active; 2-69 AR – five (5)
planned, three (3) active, 3-1 CAV five (5) planned, two (2) active (15 X BN2).
Restrictions: Division coordinated fire line – PL ELM. 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN and 2-22 CAV will
plan NFA around scout and FIST locations forward of their respective forward line of own
troops.
Assessment (Effect): End state—All CFZ violations suppressed, (1) enemy system
destroyed.
A-16 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015


Who: 3-163 FA (R).
When: See trigger below.
What (Task): Disrupt the enemy’s ability to reposition against 1-15 IN.
Why (Purpose): To protect the flank of 1-15 IN.
How:
Priority: FA priority of fires: 3-1 CAV.
Allocation:
Key BCT Targets:
 AB0045 Family of scatterable mines.
 AB0050 repositioning route (templated) CAS1 (4 X BN6).
Target Allocations: Team RECON may plan two additional targets.
Trigger: Identification of forces repositioning vicinity named area of interest B4.
Restrictions: Team RECON, 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN and 2-69 AR will plan NFA around scout and
FIST locations forward of their respective forward line of own troops.
Assessment: End state—Four T72s, close air support; four BMP-2s, FA destroyed.
Who: 1-37 FA
When: See trigger below.
What (Task): Disrupt the enemy’s repositioning forces against 3-3 ABCT (+).
Why (Purpose): To protect 3-3 ABCT (+) attacking maneuver elements.
How:
Priority: FA priority of fires: Team RECON, 2-69 AR, and 1-15 IN.
Allocation:
Key BCT Targets: AB0055 repositioning route (templated) CAS1 (4 X BN6).
Target Allocations: Team RECON may select two additional targets.
Trigger: Identification of forces repositioning vicinity named area of interest B5.
Restrictions: Team RECON, 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN and 2-69 AR will plan NFA around scout and
FIST locations forward of their respective forward line of own troops.
Assessment (Effect): End state—Three T72s, close air support; one T72, FA destroyed.
c. (U) Scheme of Movement and Maneuver.
3-3 ABCT (+) is opposed by elements of the 231BTG of the 23DTG. Assessed forces are
currently at approximately 75% combat power. Directly opposing 3-3 ABCT (+) in a
disruption zone, the enemy has deployed a disruption force – approximately a company of
mechanized infantry with tanks – supported by artillery, anti-tank systems, and a
reconnaissance screen. Expect forces to conduct a maneuver defense generally between PL
PINE and PL RAISIN. Opposing the 3-3 ABCT (+) is a reinforced mechanized infantry
battalion (BMP-2) defending in complex terrain to retain control of key ground lines of
communication that lead into the enemy main effort’s area of operations via Irwin City. A
truck mobile infantry company and at least one tank company augment this battalion. In the
support zone, a combined arms force of mechanized infantry (one company) and a platoon of
tanks form the 231BTG reserve. Also, expect at least 2 x 2S1 batteries and one battery of BM-
21s to be in direct support of the forces opposing 3-3 ABCT (+). Finally, there are elements of
a company of Eastland special purpose forces and two or three cells of Eastland-aligned direct
action cell terrorists operating in the BCT area of operations. The special purpose forces will
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-17

Appendix A
conduct reconnaissance, surveillance, and sabotage operations to disrupt the deployment of X

United States Corps units, while the terrorist cells may work in concert with the special
purpose forces or take independent action against political and military targets. 1-37 FA will
move with 2-69 AR and 3-163 FA (R) will move with 1-15 IN.
(1) (U) Scheme of Mobility and Countermobility. See Annex G (Engineer) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3
ABCT (+), 52 ID.
(2) (U) Scheme of Battlefield Obscuration. See Appendix 9 (Battlefield Obscuration) to Annex C
(Operations) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
(3) (U) Scheme of Intelligence Collection. See Annex L (Intelligence Collection) OPORD 0702-04,
3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
d. (U) Scheme of Intelligence. See Annex B (Intelligence) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
e. (U) Scheme of Fire.
Team reconnaissance has priority of fires from their insertion until the BCT LDs. On order [upon
battle hand-from the reconnaissance squadron of 3BCT (2-20 CAV)]. 3-1 CAV receives priority of
fires and is allocated one priority target for the disruption zone fight. During the attack to the limit of
advance, priority of fires shifts to 2-69 AR followed by 1-15 IN and 3-1 CAV.
Fire Support Tasks #4, #5, & #6 all remain in effect. 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN and 2-69 AR will refine their
targets and submit updates to the target list NLT 2 hours before line of departure.
f. (U) Scheme of Protection. See Annex E (Protection) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
g. (U) Stability Tasks. See Annex C (Operations) and Annex K (Civil Affairs Operations) OPORD 0702-
04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
h. (U) Assessment. See Annex M (Assessment) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
i. (U) Tasks to Subordinate Units.
 A Battery 1-37 FA: Fire Support Task 3; On order Fire Support Task 4.
 B Battery 1-37 FA: Fire Support Task 6; On order Fire Support Task 4.
 3-163 FA (R): Fire Support Tasks 1, 2 and 5, On order Fire Support Task 4.
j. (U) Coordinating Instructions.

 PL SPRUCE is limit of advance for the 3-3 ABCT (+) attack.
 FSCMs.
 Fire support coordination line is PL ELM, On order PL SPRUCE.
 52 ID coordinated fire line - PL RAISIN, On order ELM, On order PL SPRUCE.
 3-3 ABCT (+) coordinated fire line – PL PORTLAND, On order PL RAISIN On order PL
ELM.
 3-1 CAV, 1-15 IN and 2-69 AR will plan NFA (radius 500 meters) around scout and FIST
forward of the task force forward line of own troops.
 No destructive fires within the enemy battle zone prior to line of departure 301830APR15.
 Disengagement fires to support team reconnaissance and 3-1 CAV early reconnaissance are
authorized. .
 On order airspace coordination area BLACK (no fires above 4000m above ground level)
during close air support missions.
 Common Sensor Boundary is PL ELM.
 FS rehearsal 290100APR15.
 Target refinement due to 3-3 ABCT (+) FSO NLT 292130APR15.
A-18 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Observer Codes per standard operating procedure.

 FIST 241-246.
 2-69 AR 255-258.
 3-1 CAV 259-262.
 1-15 IN 263-266.
 Target Numbers per standard operating procedure.
 3-3 ABCT (+) AB0001-1999.
 3-1 CAV AB2000-2999.
 2-69 AR AB3000-3999.
 1-15 IN AB4000-4999.
 1-37 FA AB6000-6999 .
 3-163 FA (R) AB7000-7999.
 Counterfire AB8000-8999.
 CFZ Numbers.
 BCT CFZ 1-20.
 3-1 CAV CFZ 41-60.
 2-69 AR CFZ 61-80.
 1-15 IN CFZ 81-100.
 1-37 FA CFZ 101-120.
 3-163 FA (R) CFZ 121-140.
 Position areas (PA) for FA (2000m x 2000m).
 PA 1 - NV132235.
 PA 2 - NV105217.
 PA 3 - NV095175.
 PA 4 - NV220200.
 PA 5 - NV205185.
 PA 6 - NV205215.
 PA 7 - NV265105.
 PA 8 NV255075.
 PA 9 - NV285155.
 PA 10 - NV346205.
 PA 11 - NV355190.
 PA 12 - NV330214.
 PA 13 - NV460178.
 PA 14 - NV448160.
 PA 15 - NV431124.
4. (U) SUSTAINMENT.
See Annex F (Sustainment) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
a. (U) Logistics.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-19

Appendix A
(U) Class V Allocation

 16 battalion 3 round packages high explosive available.
 24 battalion 3 round packages dual-purpose improved conventional munitions available.
 60 min of FA smoke available (Length: Cross-1400m, Quartering-1000m, Head, and Tail-
300m).
 2 Medium Density area denial artillery munitions and remote antiarmor mine system (400m x
400m).
b. (U) During.
(U) Controlled Supply Rate
Weapon and Ammunition Round,Weapon,Day
155 Dual-purpose improved conventional munition 60
155 High explosive 45
155 Dual-purpose improved conventional munition (base bleed) 9
155 Rocket assisted projectile 8
155 Hexachloroethane smoke 6
155 White phosphorus 6
155 Area denial artillery munitions 3
155 Remote antiarmor mine system 7
155 Illumination 4
c. (U) After. See Annex F (Sustainment) OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID.
5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL
a. (U) Command.
(1) (U) Location of Commander. 1-37 FA battalion command post located grid to be published.
(2) (U) Succession of Command. Succession of command: Battalion executive officer, S-3, A battery
commander, B battery commander..
(3) (U) Liaison Requirements. In accordance with unit’s SOPs.
b. (U) Control.
(1) (U) Command Posts.
 1-37 FA battalion command post located grid to be published.
 3-163 FA (R) battalion command post located grid to be published.
 Combat trains command post (combat trains) located grid to be published.
 Battalion sustainment center (field trains) co-located with the brigade support area.
(2) (U) Reports. In accordance with unit’s SOPs.

c. (U) Signal. Signal operating instructions AKAV 0306 in effect.
ACKNOWLEDGE:
Commander’s last name
Commander’s rank
A-20 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

OFFICIAL:
/Signed/
Redleg
S-3
Annexes
A. FIELD ARTILLERY EXECUTION MATRIX (See figure A-1).
B. TARGET LIST WORK SHEET (See figure A-2).
C. NFA
D. FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT OVERLAY TO OPERATION ORDER (See figure A-3).
ANNEX A (FIELD ARTILLERY EXECUTION MATRIX) TO 1-37 FA OPORD APPENDIX TO ANNEX D

(FIRE SUPPORT) TO OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID (EFFECTIVE 280630 APR 15)
REFERENCE
Maps: Series V795, California; Sheets; 2453 I, 2454 I, 2454 II, 2553 I, 2553 IV, 2554 I, 2554
II, 2554 III, 2554 IV, 2653 IV, 2654 III, 2654 IV, scale 1:50,000. Time Zone Used
Throughout Order: LOCAL.
Figure A-1. Annex A (Field Artillery Execution Matrix) to 1-37 FA OPORD (example)
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-21

Appendix A
ANNEX B (TARGET LIST WORK SHEET) TO 1-37 FA OPORD APPENDIX TO ANNEX D (FIRE
SUPPORT) TO OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID (EFFECTIVE 280630 APR 15)
REFERENCE
II, 2554 III, 2554 IV, 2653 IV, 2654 III, 2654 IV, scale 1:50,000.
Time Zone Used Throughout Order: LOCAL.
Figure A-2. Annex B (Target List Worksheet) to 1-37 FA OPORD (example)
ANNEX C (NO-FIRE AREA) TO 1-37 FA OPORD APPENDIX TO ANNEX D (FIRE SUPPORT) TO

OPORD 0702-04 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID (EFFECTIVE 280630 APR 15)
REFERENCE
NFA for 3-3 ABCT (+) located east of line of departure are listed below. Firing with NFA
safety radius of grid locations requires approval from the responsible task force commander.
Task forces and team reconnaissance are responsible for providing updates on actual
observation post and landing zone location within 15 minutes of unit occupation or vacating
any position.
A-22 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Location Description No Fire Area Safety Radius

NV436194 OBSERVATION POST 500 meters
NV471088 LANDING ZONE GREEN 1000 meters
NV434204 LANDING ZONE YELLOW 1000 meters
NV445175 LANDING ZONE RED 1000 meters
NV2802 MEDINA IRWIN 2000 meters
NV2222 QUUAM SAHKRAT 1000 meters
NV3509 MEDINA WASL 1000 meters
NV4714 MEDINA MA'AKL 1000 meters
ANNEX D (FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT OVERLAY) TO 1-37FA OPORD APPENDIX TO ANNEX D

(FIRE SUPPORT) TO OPORD 0702-04, 3-3 ABCT (+), 52 ID (EFFECTIVE 280630 APR 15)
REFERENCE
Lea ch La k e
INTERNATIONAL BORDER
PL SPRUCE
10 20 30 40 50 60
PL RAISIN
PL OAK
PL PRUNE
PL PINE
30 30
Dr inkwater Lake
PL ELM
BHL/LD
AA EASTLAND
WACO
PL PORTLAND
AA
TEMPLE
AA Nels on Lake INTL BORDER
PL SPRUCE
RAT PA1 AXIS PL EUGENE (LOA)
PA2
DUKE PA12
X
20 PA6
PA4 PA10
20
AA
COUGAR PA11
PA5 OBJ
PA3 ATK
LION JAZZ
AA
BEAR AB0001 PA13
4-4
II
1-11
AA PA14
1-11
RACOON OBJ
AXIS SIXERS
II
PA9
COUNT
AB0010
ATK
1-11
AB0035
TIGER
OBJ II
PA15 Dick 2-22
PL OAK BLAZERS
LD / BHL 1-11 OBJ
II AB0025
SPURS
2-22
PA8 2-22
10 Golds tone Lake PL PRUNE
4 PA7 AB0005
OBJ 10
SONICS
PL PINE AB0055
X
II
AB0020
OBJ
1 AB0045/50
33 KINGS
AB0040
PL PORTLAND AB0015 Mezra’aMazikAhmar

34
Bicycle Lake
PL RAISIN 4
Har r y
X
1
Red Pas s Lake
PL EUGENE
PL ELM
Irwin City
OBJ
HOOK
This sketch is not to scale and is missing a number of critical graphic control measures that are contained in the actual 1:50,000 scale overlay. It is
Only intended to provide the reader of this OPORD with a general frame of reference in the event that the map and overlay are temporarily not available.
(Unclassified)
Figure A-3. Annex D (Field Artillery Support Overlay) to 1-37 FA OPORD (example)
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 A-23

Appendix B
Composite Battalion
Composite FA battalions are made up of cannon batteries consisting of differ caliber
weapons. This chapter provides a brief overview and discussion of techniques and
associated considerations unique to a FA battalion operating as a composite
organization.
OVERVIEW
B-1. Cannon units operating with weapons of different calibers (105-mm, 155-mm) and sometimes types
(towed, self-propelled) characterize composite units. The composite cannon structure consists of any
combination of cannon systems, with associated prime movers and ammunition resupply vehicles, which
include:
 Howitzer, Medium, Towed, 155-mm, M777-series.
 Howitzer, Light, Towed, 105-mm, M119-series.
B-2. Composite units may be organized under tables of organization and equipment or through force tailoring.
Although a battalion may be organized with individual firing batteries equipped with only a given type of
weapon, a mission’s task organization may require that different weapon systems co-exist within the same
battery. Under this circumstance, the battery’s cannon crews should train on and, be certified to operate both
systems for maximum tactical flexibility.
B-3. Combat operations have dictated that units encounter composite unit situations (see the following
example) where they might have any combination of howitzer configurations across the battalion or battery.
These situations affect personnel, equipment, manning, training, and sustainment among others. Identify
considerations associated with composite units as early as possible in the MDMP.
Example
A composite cannon battery organization, where the battery is organized as a dual
unit. In this example, each howitzer section is assigned a M119A2, 105-mm, towed
howitzer and a M777A2, 155-mm, towed howitzer system per section. This
configuration is common in static positions.
B-4. Composite cannon battalion units present unique challenges and tactical considerations for the cannon
battalion commander and key leaders. Considerations for composite battalion units include:
 Unit composition (howitzer mix).
 Manning levels for howitzer sections, FDCs, and battery and platoon leadership.
 Technical firing solution computation capabilities.
UNIT COMPOSITION (LIGHT AND MEDIUM HOWITZER MIX)

B-5. The makeup of a composite cannon battalion will vary. Unit tables of organization and equipment, task-
organization, commander’s preference, personnel strength, level of training, individual capabilities, and other
factors may require the commander to modify unit composition. The commander bases this decision on mission
variables and unit tactical standard operating procedures. The commander issues planning guidance on unit
composition to key leaders.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 B-1

Appendix B
Note. The type of howitzer, associated prime mover (if equipped), and ammunition resupply
vehicle vary among the systems. See the applicable technical manual for general information and
equipment description.
B-6. Planning considerations for unit composition include equipment type, quantity, supply, and maintenance
associated with different types of equipment. Considerations vary according to the type of howitzer(s), quantity
of vehicles, and associated equipment in the cannon battery, which include:
 Position area requirements that decrease with the use of towed howitzers and other wheeled
vehicles.
 Climate and terrain that hampers or restricts movement of vehicles (mountains, jungle, desert,
cold regions, and urban population areas).
 Methods of employment (platoon, paired and grouped, or single howitzer) that differ between
terrain and distance.
 Method of control (centralized or decentralized) based on method of employment.
 Movement by alternate means (airborne or air assault), as required.
Note. For more information on airborne or air assault missions, see FM 3-99.
 Sustainment requirements that increase with the amount of vehicles task-organized to the unit.
 Supply accountability of equipment with hand receipts, shortage annexes, and additional
authorization listings.
 Operator level maintenance and records management of howitzers, vehicles, and associated
equipment new (not organic) to the unit.
 Maintenance support from forward support company and BSB.
Note. A maintenance section is not currently authorized at battalion or battery level.
 Operator licensing requirements for organic and task-organized equipment.

 Ammunition management (105-mm, 155-mm).
B-7. For more information on howitzer systems, see TM 9-1015-252-10 (M119A2), TM 9-1015-260-10
(M119A3) and TM 9-1025-215-10 (M777 Series).
AMMUNITION
B-8. The considerations for ammunition management will vary based on ammunition totals and forecasted
requirements. Unit tables of organization and equipment, task-organization, commander’s preference, personnel
strength, level of training, individual capabilities, and other factors may require the commander to modify
procedures for ammunition management. The commander bases this decision on mission variables and unit
tactical standard operating procedures. The commander issues planning guidance for ammunition management.
B-9. Ammunition lot management is a critical consideration for FDC personnel. Commanders must ensure
these personnel are trained and competent.
B-10. Ammunition management involves the resupply, management, handling, segregation, and preparation of
semi-fixed and separate loading howitzer ammunition, to include forecasting requirements based on mission
variables. Difficulties arise from the improper handling, storage, segregation, and accountability of howitzer
ammunition by type, lot, and weight. These types of actions can lead to a decrease in mission effectiveness and
possible damage of equipment and injury to personnel.
B-11. The type of howitzer, associated prime mover (if equipped), and ammunition resupply vehicle vary
among the systems. Each ammunition section has personnel and equipment to provide limited ammunition
support. Some units may consolidate ammunition sections at battalion level.
B-12. Planning considerations for ammunition management include:
B-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Composite Battalion
 Time available.
 Personnel available.
 Equipment available.
 Ammunition accountability.
 Ammunition supply point.
 Personnel experience and training.
 Hand receipt procedures.
 Ammunition handling procedures.
Note. Ammunition handlers should pay close attention to warning and safety statements for
howitzer ammunition contained in howitzer technical manuals.
Note. For more information on ammunition handling, storage, and safety, see TB 43-0250.
 Transportation by battery elements.

 Hand receipt procedures.
 Training.
 Safety.
 Continuous operation.
 Sleep deprivation.
B-13. Other ammunition management considerations:
 Inventory ammunition by type, lot, and weight, and segregate by the same, if possible.
 Provide a 13B noncommissioned officer to support ammunition operations at the ammunition
supply point.
 Attach and assign knowledgeable personnel to serve as ammunition specialists at the
ammunition transfer holding point, if possible.
 Ensure that basic FA tasks for lot management, transportation and storage of ammunition are
trained within the brigade and battalion.
 Issue ammunition to firing elements as soon as possible.
 Distribute communications security Black Key early, if required.
 Standardize the rearm, refuel, resupply, and survey point.
 Provide additional ammunition, as required, to support the maneuver force in mountainous
terrain due to reduced munitions effectiveness.
 Limit or preclude registrations because they may not be possible or practical due to security and
ammunition requirements.
POSITIONING
B-14. If a FA battalion is given its own area of operations, consider that batteries are not manned or equipped
with a command post like the infantry companies. The personnel to staff these positions are going to have to be
designated by the battalion and battery. Bottom line, if given a maneuver mission, the FA platoons may have to
operate with only a single gun in a firing platoon. The crew from the other guns may be required to supplement
battery or battalion command posts.
B-15. When considering unit positions the following questions must be addressed by the commander and staff:
 What are the slope, soil conditions, and trafficability of the position area?
 Where can observation and listening posts best be positioned?
 Are there site to crest or intervening crest problems?
 What are the percent illumination, moonrise, moonset, and night vision device window?
 What are the precipitation, wind, and temperature?
 Where are the positions to fire from and are they clear?
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 B-3

Appendix B
 Do the positions facilitate fires throughout the maximum area of the supported maneuver force?
 Do the positions enable communications with higher headquarters?
 Do the positions use existing terrain features to prevent threat forces from targeting the unit.
 Do the positions avoid high-speed avenues of approach and have more than one entrance and
exit?
 Does the terrain facilitate movement within the position?
 Do the positions include the primary position, alternate position, and supplementary position?
MANNING
B-16. Manning is the first hurdle that has to be overcome. Units may receive additional howitzers and
equipment but not additional personnel to man and maintain the materiel. Units may have to operate with
reduced crews.
B-17. Certain military occupational specialties must be managed down to the individual soldier. Specifically
howitzer section chiefs and all fire direction personnel. The FDC chiefs you send down range must be able to
operate with little to no supervision.
B-18. The unit manning levels will vary based on unit composition. Unit tables of organization and equipment,
task-organization, commander’s preference, personnel strength, level of training, individual capabilities, and
other factors may require the battery commander to modify requirements for unit manning levels. The battery
commander bases this decision on mission variables and unit tactical standard operating procedures. The battery
commander issues planning guidance on the minimum safe manning levels for howitzer sections and FDC
personnel during firing.
B-19. If the battalion creates additional platoons, consider assigning a gunnery sergeant per platoon. This will
facilitate 24-hour operations, and better handling of ammunition, platoon leaders may have to double as platoon
leader and FDO. If so, the chief of firing battery and gunnery sergeant can supervise the gun line while the
platoon leader is in the FDC.
B-20. It is normal to expect howitzer sections and FDCs to reduce to numbers less than prescribed by tables of
organization and equipment strength due to illness, casualties, battery tasking, and the need to rest personnel.
Combine the duties of section personnel to meet mission requirements and still maintain continuous operation,
as required.
B-21. Planning considerations for manning levels include unit composition and minimum safe manning
requirements. Considerations vary according to the assigned equipment, which include:
 Experience level of howitzer section personnel.
 Experience level of FDC personnel.
 Knowledgeable and competent personnel assignments from section level to platoon leadership.
B-22. Determine minimum safe manning requirements and levels as early as possible in the MDMP. Include
these numbers in the unit tactical standard operating procedures, as applicable.
B-23. HQ and HQ battery composition is critical and must have some handpicked leadership at various levels
to be successful.
HOWITZER SECTION
B-24. Train and certify howitzer sections on both type cannon systems. Cross train and certify howitzer
sections and crews to provide the maneuver commander with more options for FS.
B-25. Closely manage leave for gunner and above, section chief, gunnery sergeant, chief of firing battery, and
platoon leader. This can cause problems for the entire battalion if not managed properly.
B-26. Considerations for howitzer sections include:
 Tactical situation.
 Crew drill on each weapon system (dual assigned).
 Cross training among howitzer platforms to increase proficiency.
B-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Composite Battalion
 Minimum safe manning requirements for firing.

 Training and certification programs for howitzer crews on each assigned weapon system.
B-27. Cross training of section personnel takes on an added importance with the introduction of dual howitzers
at the section level. The howitzer section must be ready and capable of executing dual fire missions on both
systems near simultaneously. In addition to indirect fires, the need may arise to include direct fires, as well (see
example below).
Example
Firing sections conducted a dual fire combat mission, switching between indirect and
direct artillery fire modes on M777A2 and M119A2 or M119A3 weapon systems
against several threat positions. These Soldiers fired nearly simultaneously in support
of nearby troops in contact, while also engaging the forces firing at the combat
outpost, switching between systems and modes within mere minutes.
B-28. Combine howitzer sections to maintain established minimum safe manning requirements. Battery
leadership may perform duties as cannoneers with a howitzer section, if required.
Note. Problems during firing arise due to a lack of training and sacrificing established procedure
for speed. Bypassing established procedures can lead to inaccuracies in fires, wasted rounds, and
a decrease in the effectiveness of FS. Careless or improper procedures at the howitzer contribute
to these inaccuracies. Proper training is the key to minimizing human error and careless gunnery
procedures.
FIRE DIRECTION CENTER

B-29. AFATDS can only do technical computations for one system at a time. The FDC must have a primary
and backup check. Something to consider is using AFATDS and Centaur as primary with Centaur and manual
charts backup.
B-30. Due to the requirement for 24-hour operations and leaves, you will not have enough lieutenants to have
one at every static position FDC. Lieutenants will have to divide their time between the FDC and the gun line
particularly to help manage the ammunition with the gunnery sergeant. If the lieutenant is not FA branched
qualified then the FDC chief is the senior gunnery expert on the combat outpost.
B-31. All FDC personnel must:
 Manage muzzle velocity variations and meteorology requirements to ensure accurate fires.
 Understand airspace control and airspace clearance procedures.
B-32. Considerations for FDC personnel include:

 Military occupational specialty critical shortages.
 Requests for additional military occupational specialty authorizations above tables of
organization and equipment.
 Fire request processing.
 Ammunition management.
B-33. The FDC is the primary fire control facility for the cannon battery. Positive and effective fire control
depends on well-trained and properly staffed personnel to process responsive and accurate firing data to support
the mission. The FDC is organized and equipped to maintain continuous operation. Personnel and equipment
shortages will result in a decrease in mission effectiveness. The commander may develop an operational needs
statement based on mission variables. Identify considerations for critical shortages of military occupational
specialties and requests for additional authorizations as early as possible in the MDMP.
B-34. For more information on duties and responsibilities of FDC personnel, see FM 6-40.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 B-5

Glossary
SECTION I – ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
ABCT armored brigade combat team
ACM airspace coordinating measure
ADRP Army doctrine reference publication
AFATDS Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System
ATP Army techniques publication
BCS3 Battle Command Sustainment Support System
BCT brigade combat team
BMP enemy armored personnel carrier
BSB brigade support battalion
CBRN chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear
CFZ critical friendly zone
DIVARTY division artillery
FA field artillery
FAB field artillery brigade
FBCB2 Force XXI Battle Command, brigade and below
FDC fire direction center
FDO fire direction officer
FIST fire support team
FM field manual
FS fire support
FSCM fire support coordiantion measure
FSCOORD fire support coordinator
FSO fire support officer
HQ headquarters
IBCT infantry brigade combat team
km kilometer
METT-TC mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time
available, and civil considerations
MDMP military decisionmaking process
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NFA no-fire area
NLT not later than
OPLAN operation plan
OPORD operation order
PA position area
PGK precision guidance kit
PL phase line
ROE rules of engagement
S-1 battalion or brigade personnel staff officer
S-2 battalion or brigade intelligence staff officer
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 Glossary-1

Glossary
S-3 battalion or brigade operations staff officer

S-4 battalion or brigade logistics staff officer
S-6 battalion or brigade signal staff officer
SBCT Stryker brigade combat team
UAS unmanned aircraft system
WLR weapons locating radar
WP white phosphorous
SECTION II – TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

*controlled supply rate
The rate of ammunition consumption that can be supported, considering availability, facilities, and
transportation. It is expressed in rounds per unit, individual, or vehicle per day.
* required supply rate
The amount of ammunition expressed in terms of rounds per weapon per day for ammunition items
fired by weapons, in terms of other units of measure per day for bulk allotment, and other items
estimated to be required to sustain operations of any designated force without restriction for a specified
period.
Glossary-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

References
All URLs accessed on 28 July 2015.
REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS
These documents must be available to the intended users of this publication.
ADRP 1-02, Terms and Military Symbols, 2 February 201.
JP 1-02, Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms, 8 November 2010.
RELATED PUBLICATIONS
These documents contain relevant supplemental information.
ARMY PUBLICATIONS
Most Army doctrine publications are available online: http://www.apd.army.mil.
ADP 3-09, Fires, 31 August 2012.
ADRP 1, The Army Profession, 14 June 2015.
ADRP 3-0, Unified Land Operations. 16 May 2012.
ADRP 3-07, Stability, 31 August 2012.
ADRP 3-09, Fires, 31 August 2012.
ADRP 3-28, Defense Support of Civil Authorities, 14 June 2013.
ADRP 3-37, Protection, 31 August 2012.
ADRP 4-0, Sustainment. 31 July 2012.
ADRP 5-0, The Operations Process, 17 May 2012.
ADRP 6-0, Mission Command, 17 May 2012.
ATP 3-09.12, Field Artillery Target Acquisition, 24 July 2015.
ATP 3-09.24, Techniques for the Fires Brigade, 21 November 2012.
ATP 3-09.30, Techniques for Observed Fire, 2 August 2013.
ATP 4-02.3, Army Health System Support to Maneuver Forces, 9 June 2014.
ATP 4-90, Brigade Support Battalion, 2 April 2014.
ATP 5-19, Risk Management, 14 April 2014.
ATTP 3-90.4, Combined Arms Mobility, 10 August 2011.
ATTP 3-97.11, Cold Region Operations, 28 January 2011.
FM 1-0, Human Resources Support, 01 April 2014.
FM 1-04, Legal Support to the Operational Army, 18 March 2013.
FM 3-04.155, Army Unmanned Aircraft System Operations, 29 July 2009.
FM 3-06, Urban Operations, 26 October 2006.
FM 3-07, Stability, 2 June 2014.
FM 3-09, Field Artillery Operations and Fire Support, 4 April 2014.
FM 3-39, Military Police Operations, 26 August 2013.
FM 3-90.6, Brigade Combat Team, 14 September 2010.
FM 3-97.6, Mountain Operations, 28 November 2000.
FM 3-99, Airborne and Air Assault Operations, 6 March 2015.
FM 6-0, Commander and Staff Organization and Operations, 5 May 2014.
FM 6-40, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery, 23 April 1996.
FM 7-15, The Army Universal Task List, 27 February 2009.
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 References-1

References
FM 90-3, Desert Operation, 24 August 1993.

FM 90-5, Jungle Operations, 16 August 1982.
TB 43-0250, Ammunition Handling, Storage and Safety, 03 December 2007.
TM 9-1015-252-10, Technical Manual, Operator`s Manual for Howitzer, Light, Towed: 105-MM,
M119A2, NSN 1015-01-482-4914 (EIC: 3WE) LIN: H57505, 30 September 2010.
TM 9-1015-260-10, Operator Manual for Howitzer, Light, Towed: 105-mm, M119A3 NSN1015-01-598-
4568 (EIC: 3FD), 30 October 2014.
TM 9-1025-215-10, Technical Manual Operator’s Manual for Howitzer, Medium, Towed 155-mm, M777
(1025-01-445-0991) Howitzer, Medium, Towed: 155-mm-M777A1 (1025-99-411-1447) (EIC:
3ET)/ Howitzer, Medium, Towed: 155-mm, M777A2 (NSN 1025-99-463-7551) (EIC: 3EU), 30
November 2012.
TM 9-1320-202-13, Operator And Field Maintenance Manual For Projectile, 155mm: HE, XM982
(Excalibur) (NSN 1320-01-534-2535) Projectile, 155mm: HE, M982 (Excalibur) (NSN 1320-01-
552-1850) Projectile, 155mm: HE, M982A1 (Excalibur) (NSN 1320-01-611-6762) Dummy
Projectile, 155mm: Excalibur Training Aid, Fullweight (NSN 1320-01-559-9526) Dummy
Projectile, 155mm: Excalibur Training Aid, Lightweight (NSN 1320-01-556-7373), 20 June 2014.
PRESCRIBED FORMS
This section contains no entries.
REFERENCED FORMS
Forms are available online: www.apd.army.mil.
DA Form 2028, Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms.
References-2 ATP 3-09.23 (Final Approved Draft) 24 September 2015

Index
forward support company Stryker BCT field artillery

A
(armored and infantry BCTs battalion, 1-3
army battle command system,
only), 1-5 P
2-11
Army battle command system I planning process, 3-1
(also see ABCS), 2-11 intelligence preparation of the R
battlefield, 3-6
C rehearsals, 3-7
intelligence, surveillance, and
climate and terrain
considerations, 6-24
reconnaissance and target S
acquisition, 1 S2 section, 1-13
command and support
internal/external S3 section, 1-11
relationships, 2-1
communications networks,
command post 2-15 supporession of enemy air
organization, 2-4 defense, 5-11
positioning and movement, L support of defensive
2-8 liaison operations, 2-10 operations, 6-6
command post composition, 2- support of offensive operations,
2
M
6-4
command section, 1-5 meteorology, 5-14
support of other tactical
common field artillery tasks for military decision-making operations, 6-8
the field artillery battalion, 6- process, 3-1
support of stability operations
2 mission, 1-2 and civil support operations,
communications network, 2-12 mission command, 2-1, 2-2 6-24
composite units, B-1 modular force overview survey, 5-14
composition, B-1 fires brigade, 1-1 sustainment, 7-1
manning levels, B-4 explosive ordinance
manning levels
N
disposal, 7-13
howitzer section, B-4 network field artillery battalion
manning levels fires brigade sustainment overview, 7-
fire direction center, B-5 communications, 2-12 1
overview, B-1 financial management, 7-13
O
counterfire, 5-8 health service support, 7-14
operational communications human resources support,
D guiidelines and techniques, 7-13
deliver fires, 5-1 2-16 manitenance, 7-14
detect and locate surface operations, 6-1 organization and functions,
targets, 1 operations order, A-2 7-2
planning, 7-3
operations order and annexes-
F religious support, 7-13
example, A-11
fire direction center, 1-15 supply and transportation,
organization 7-5
fire mission processing, 5-1 armor BCT field artillery support areas, 7-15
fire missions requiring special battalion, 1-3 support planning, 7-20
considerations, 5-6 headquarters and
headquarters battery, 1-4 T
fires brigade
communications network, 2- infantry BCT field artillery target acquisition, 4
12 battalion, 1-3
target acquisition platoon, 1-14
24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 Index-1

ATP 3-09.23 (FM 3-09.21)
24 September 2015
By Order of the Secretary of the Army
MARK A. MILLEY
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
GERALD B. O’KEEFE
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
1523804
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and United States Army Reserve: Distributed in electronic media
only (EMO).
PIN:105535-000

ATP 3-09.23 (FM 3-09.21) : Distribution Restriction Approved For Public Release Distribution Is Unlimited

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATP 3-09.23 (FM 3-09.21) : Distribution Restriction Approved For Public Release Distribution Is Unlimited

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATP 3-09.23 (FM 3-09.21) : Distribution Restriction Approved For Public Release Distribution Is Unlimited

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATP 3-09.23 (FM 3-09.

Field Artillery Cannon Battalion

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Headquarters Department of the Army

Army Techniques Publication Headquarters,

Field Artillery Cannon Battalion

Distribution Restriction: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Command Post Positioning and Movement ........................................................ 2-8

ii ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Planning for and Conducting Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses Operations5-12

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 iii

Desert Operations ............................................................................................. 6-28

iv ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

Overview ............................................................................................................. B-1

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 v

vi ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 vii

viii ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

SECTION I – FORCE OVERVIEW

FIELD ARTILLERY BRIGADE

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-1

THE DIVISION ARTILLERY

BRIGADE COMBAT TEAMS

SECTION II – FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION ROLE AND

1-2 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

 Deploy and conduct maneuver.

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-3

HEADQUARTERS AND HEADQUARTERS BATTERY

1-4 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY

SECTION III – FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION KEY PERSONNEL AND

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-5

COMMAND SERGEANT MAJOR

1-6 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-7

1-8 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-9

FORWARD SUPPORT COMPANY COMMANDER

BATTALION S-3 SECTION

1-10 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

BATTALION MASTER GUNNER

CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, AND NUCLEAR OFFICER AND CHEMICAL,

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-11

BATTALION AMMUNITION OFFICER

BATTALION S-2 SECTION

1-12 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

TARGET ACQUISITION PLATOON

TARGET ACQUISITION PLATOON LEADER

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-13

TARGET ACQUISITION PLATOON SERGEANT

BATTALION FIRE DIRECTION CENTER

FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER

1-14 ATP 3-09.23 24 September 2015

CHIEF FIRE CONTROL SERGEANT

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 1-15

SECTION I – COMMAND AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

24 September 2015 ATP 3-09.23 2-1

NONSTANDARD FIELD ARTILLERY SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS

ON-ORDER COMMAND OR SUPPORT RELATIONSHIPS